diagnostic-show-locus.c: remove unused field from class colorizer
[official-gcc.git] / gcc / combine.c
blob8dc62b57266ba29a5e917d966a6d3166ea12f539
1 /* Optimize by combining instructions for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
9 version.
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
14 for more details.
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
20 /* This module is essentially the "combiner" phase of the U. of Arizona
21 Portable Optimizer, but redone to work on our list-structured
22 representation for RTL instead of their string representation.
24 The LOG_LINKS of each insn identify the most recent assignment
25 to each REG used in the insn. It is a list of previous insns,
26 each of which contains a SET for a REG that is used in this insn
27 and not used or set in between. LOG_LINKs never cross basic blocks.
28 They were set up by the preceding pass (lifetime analysis).
30 We try to combine each pair of insns joined by a logical link.
31 We also try to combine triplets of insns A, B and C when C has
32 a link back to B and B has a link back to A. Likewise for a
33 small number of quadruplets of insns A, B, C and D for which
34 there's high likelihood of success.
36 LOG_LINKS does not have links for use of the CC0. They don't
37 need to, because the insn that sets the CC0 is always immediately
38 before the insn that tests it. So we always regard a branch
39 insn as having a logical link to the preceding insn. The same is true
40 for an insn explicitly using CC0.
42 We check (with use_crosses_set_p) to avoid combining in such a way
43 as to move a computation to a place where its value would be different.
45 Combination is done by mathematically substituting the previous
46 insn(s) values for the regs they set into the expressions in
47 the later insns that refer to these regs. If the result is a valid insn
48 for our target machine, according to the machine description,
49 we install it, delete the earlier insns, and update the data flow
50 information (LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES) for what we did.
52 There are a few exceptions where the dataflow information isn't
53 completely updated (however this is only a local issue since it is
54 regenerated before the next pass that uses it):
56 - reg_live_length is not updated
57 - reg_n_refs is not adjusted in the rare case when a register is
58 no longer required in a computation
59 - there are extremely rare cases (see distribute_notes) when a
60 REG_DEAD note is lost
61 - a LOG_LINKS entry that refers to an insn with multiple SETs may be
62 removed because there is no way to know which register it was
63 linking
65 To simplify substitution, we combine only when the earlier insn(s)
66 consist of only a single assignment. To simplify updating afterward,
67 we never combine when a subroutine call appears in the middle.
69 Since we do not represent assignments to CC0 explicitly except when that
70 is all an insn does, there is no LOG_LINKS entry in an insn that uses
71 the condition code for the insn that set the condition code.
72 Fortunately, these two insns must be consecutive.
73 Therefore, every JUMP_INSN is taken to have an implicit logical link
74 to the preceding insn. This is not quite right, since non-jumps can
75 also use the condition code; but in practice such insns would not
76 combine anyway. */
78 #include "config.h"
79 #include "system.h"
80 #include "coretypes.h"
81 #include "backend.h"
82 #include "target.h"
83 #include "rtl.h"
84 #include "tree.h"
85 #include "cfghooks.h"
86 #include "predict.h"
87 #include "df.h"
88 #include "memmodel.h"
89 #include "tm_p.h"
90 #include "optabs.h"
91 #include "regs.h"
92 #include "emit-rtl.h"
93 #include "recog.h"
94 #include "cgraph.h"
95 #include "stor-layout.h"
96 #include "cfgrtl.h"
97 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
98 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
99 #include "explow.h"
100 #include "insn-attr.h"
101 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
102 #include "params.h"
103 #include "tree-pass.h"
104 #include "valtrack.h"
105 #include "rtl-iter.h"
106 #include "print-rtl.h"
108 /* Number of attempts to combine instructions in this function. */
110 static int combine_attempts;
112 /* Number of attempts that got as far as substitution in this function. */
114 static int combine_merges;
116 /* Number of instructions combined with added SETs in this function. */
118 static int combine_extras;
120 /* Number of instructions combined in this function. */
122 static int combine_successes;
124 /* Totals over entire compilation. */
126 static int total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes;
128 /* combine_instructions may try to replace the right hand side of the
129 second instruction with the value of an associated REG_EQUAL note
130 before throwing it at try_combine. That is problematic when there
131 is a REG_DEAD note for a register used in the old right hand side
132 and can cause distribute_notes to do wrong things. This is the
133 second instruction if it has been so modified, null otherwise. */
135 static rtx_insn *i2mod;
137 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the old right hand side. */
139 static rtx i2mod_old_rhs;
141 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the new right hand side. */
143 static rtx i2mod_new_rhs;
145 struct reg_stat_type {
146 /* Record last point of death of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
147 rtx_insn *last_death;
149 /* Record last point of modification of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
150 rtx_insn *last_set;
152 /* The next group of fields allows the recording of the last value assigned
153 to (hard or pseudo) register n. We use this information to see if an
154 operation being processed is redundant given a prior operation performed
155 on the register. For example, an `and' with a constant is redundant if
156 all the zero bits are already known to be turned off.
158 We use an approach similar to that used by cse, but change it in the
159 following ways:
161 (1) We do not want to reinitialize at each label.
162 (2) It is useful, but not critical, to know the actual value assigned
163 to a register. Often just its form is helpful.
165 Therefore, we maintain the following fields:
167 last_set_value the last value assigned
168 last_set_label records the value of label_tick when the
169 register was assigned
170 last_set_table_tick records the value of label_tick when a
171 value using the register is assigned
172 last_set_invalid set to nonzero when it is not valid
173 to use the value of this register in some
174 register's value
176 To understand the usage of these tables, it is important to understand
177 the distinction between the value in last_set_value being valid and
178 the register being validly contained in some other expression in the
179 table.
181 (The next two parameters are out of date).
183 reg_stat[i].last_set_value is valid if it is nonzero, and either
184 reg_n_sets[i] is 1 or reg_stat[i].last_set_label == label_tick.
186 Register I may validly appear in any expression returned for the value
187 of another register if reg_n_sets[i] is 1. It may also appear in the
188 value for register J if reg_stat[j].last_set_invalid is zero, or
189 reg_stat[i].last_set_label < reg_stat[j].last_set_label.
191 If an expression is found in the table containing a register which may
192 not validly appear in an expression, the register is replaced by
193 something that won't match, (clobber (const_int 0)). */
195 /* Record last value assigned to (hard or pseudo) register n. */
197 rtx last_set_value;
199 /* Record the value of label_tick when an expression involving register n
200 is placed in last_set_value. */
202 int last_set_table_tick;
204 /* Record the value of label_tick when the value for register n is placed in
205 last_set_value. */
207 int last_set_label;
209 /* These fields are maintained in parallel with last_set_value and are
210 used to store the mode in which the register was last set, the bits
211 that were known to be zero when it was last set, and the number of
212 sign bits copies it was known to have when it was last set. */
214 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT last_set_nonzero_bits;
215 char last_set_sign_bit_copies;
216 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) last_set_mode : 8;
218 /* Set nonzero if references to register n in expressions should not be
219 used. last_set_invalid is set nonzero when this register is being
220 assigned to and last_set_table_tick == label_tick. */
222 char last_set_invalid;
224 /* Some registers that are set more than once and used in more than one
225 basic block are nevertheless always set in similar ways. For example,
226 a QImode register may be loaded from memory in two places on a machine
227 where byte loads zero extend.
229 We record in the following fields if a register has some leading bits
230 that are always equal to the sign bit, and what we know about the
231 nonzero bits of a register, specifically which bits are known to be
232 zero.
234 If an entry is zero, it means that we don't know anything special. */
236 unsigned char sign_bit_copies;
238 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_bits;
240 /* Record the value of the label_tick when the last truncation
241 happened. The field truncated_to_mode is only valid if
242 truncation_label == label_tick. */
244 int truncation_label;
246 /* Record the last truncation seen for this register. If truncation
247 is not a nop to this mode we might be able to save an explicit
248 truncation if we know that value already contains a truncated
249 value. */
251 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) truncated_to_mode : 8;
255 static vec<reg_stat_type> reg_stat;
257 /* One plus the highest pseudo for which we track REG_N_SETS.
258 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs allocates the array for REG_N_SETS just once,
259 but during combine_split_insns new pseudos can be created. As we don't have
260 updated DF information in that case, it is hard to initialize the array
261 after growing. The combiner only cares about REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1,
262 so instead of growing the arrays, just assume all newly created pseudos
263 during combine might be set multiple times. */
265 static unsigned int reg_n_sets_max;
267 /* Record the luid of the last insn that invalidated memory
268 (anything that writes memory, and subroutine calls, but not pushes). */
270 static int mem_last_set;
272 /* Record the luid of the last CALL_INSN
273 so we can tell whether a potential combination crosses any calls. */
275 static int last_call_luid;
277 /* When `subst' is called, this is the insn that is being modified
278 (by combining in a previous insn). The PATTERN of this insn
279 is still the old pattern partially modified and it should not be
280 looked at, but this may be used to examine the successors of the insn
281 to judge whether a simplification is valid. */
283 static rtx_insn *subst_insn;
285 /* This is the lowest LUID that `subst' is currently dealing with.
286 get_last_value will not return a value if the register was set at or
287 after this LUID. If not for this mechanism, we could get confused if
288 I2 or I1 in try_combine were an insn that used the old value of a register
289 to obtain a new value. In that case, we might erroneously get the
290 new value of the register when we wanted the old one. */
292 static int subst_low_luid;
294 /* This contains any hard registers that are used in newpat; reg_dead_at_p
295 must consider all these registers to be always live. */
297 static HARD_REG_SET newpat_used_regs;
299 /* This is an insn to which a LOG_LINKS entry has been added. If this
300 insn is the earlier than I2 or I3, combine should rescan starting at
301 that location. */
303 static rtx_insn *added_links_insn;
305 /* Basic block in which we are performing combines. */
306 static basic_block this_basic_block;
307 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
310 /* Length of the currently allocated uid_insn_cost array. */
312 static int max_uid_known;
314 /* The following array records the insn_rtx_cost for every insn
315 in the instruction stream. */
317 static int *uid_insn_cost;
319 /* The following array records the LOG_LINKS for every insn in the
320 instruction stream as struct insn_link pointers. */
322 struct insn_link {
323 rtx_insn *insn;
324 unsigned int regno;
325 struct insn_link *next;
328 static struct insn_link **uid_log_links;
330 static inline int
331 insn_uid_check (const_rtx insn)
333 int uid = INSN_UID (insn);
334 gcc_checking_assert (uid <= max_uid_known);
335 return uid;
338 #define INSN_COST(INSN) (uid_insn_cost[insn_uid_check (INSN)])
339 #define LOG_LINKS(INSN) (uid_log_links[insn_uid_check (INSN)])
341 #define FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK(L, INSN) \
342 for ((L) = LOG_LINKS (INSN); (L); (L) = (L)->next)
344 /* Links for LOG_LINKS are allocated from this obstack. */
346 static struct obstack insn_link_obstack;
348 /* Allocate a link. */
350 static inline struct insn_link *
351 alloc_insn_link (rtx_insn *insn, unsigned int regno, struct insn_link *next)
353 struct insn_link *l
354 = (struct insn_link *) obstack_alloc (&insn_link_obstack,
355 sizeof (struct insn_link));
356 l->insn = insn;
357 l->regno = regno;
358 l->next = next;
359 return l;
362 /* Incremented for each basic block. */
364 static int label_tick;
366 /* Reset to label_tick for each extended basic block in scanning order. */
368 static int label_tick_ebb_start;
370 /* Mode used to compute significance in reg_stat[].nonzero_bits. It is the
371 largest integer mode that can fit in HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
373 static machine_mode nonzero_bits_mode;
375 /* Nonzero when reg_stat[].nonzero_bits and reg_stat[].sign_bit_copies can
376 be safely used. It is zero while computing them and after combine has
377 completed. This former test prevents propagating values based on
378 previously set values, which can be incorrect if a variable is modified
379 in a loop. */
381 static int nonzero_sign_valid;
384 /* Record one modification to rtl structure
385 to be undone by storing old_contents into *where. */
387 enum undo_kind { UNDO_RTX, UNDO_INT, UNDO_MODE, UNDO_LINKS };
389 struct undo
391 struct undo *next;
392 enum undo_kind kind;
393 union { rtx r; int i; machine_mode m; struct insn_link *l; } old_contents;
394 union { rtx *r; int *i; struct insn_link **l; } where;
397 /* Record a bunch of changes to be undone, up to MAX_UNDO of them.
398 num_undo says how many are currently recorded.
400 other_insn is nonzero if we have modified some other insn in the process
401 of working on subst_insn. It must be verified too. */
403 struct undobuf
405 struct undo *undos;
406 struct undo *frees;
407 rtx_insn *other_insn;
410 static struct undobuf undobuf;
412 /* Number of times the pseudo being substituted for
413 was found and replaced. */
415 static int n_occurrences;
417 static rtx reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx, machine_mode, const_rtx,
418 machine_mode,
419 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
420 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *);
421 static rtx reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx, machine_mode, const_rtx,
422 machine_mode,
423 unsigned int, unsigned int *);
424 static void do_SUBST (rtx *, rtx);
425 static void do_SUBST_INT (int *, int);
426 static void init_reg_last (void);
427 static void setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn *);
428 static void set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
429 static int cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn *);
430 static int can_combine_p (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *,
431 rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx *, rtx *);
432 static int combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn *, rtx *, rtx, rtx, rtx, int, int, rtx *);
433 static int contains_muldiv (rtx);
434 static rtx_insn *try_combine (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *,
435 int *, rtx_insn *);
436 static void undo_all (void);
437 static void undo_commit (void);
438 static rtx *find_split_point (rtx *, rtx_insn *, bool);
439 static rtx subst (rtx, rtx, rtx, int, int, int);
440 static rtx combine_simplify_rtx (rtx, machine_mode, int, int);
441 static rtx simplify_if_then_else (rtx);
442 static rtx simplify_set (rtx);
443 static rtx simplify_logical (rtx);
444 static rtx expand_compound_operation (rtx);
445 static const_rtx expand_field_assignment (const_rtx);
446 static rtx make_extraction (machine_mode, rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
447 rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int, int, int);
448 static rtx extract_left_shift (rtx, int);
449 static int get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
450 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *);
451 static rtx canon_reg_for_combine (rtx, rtx);
452 static rtx force_to_mode (rtx, machine_mode,
453 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
454 static rtx if_then_else_cond (rtx, rtx *, rtx *);
455 static rtx known_cond (rtx, enum rtx_code, rtx, rtx);
456 static int rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx, rtx, bool = false);
457 static rtx make_field_assignment (rtx);
458 static rtx apply_distributive_law (rtx);
459 static rtx distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx, int);
460 static rtx simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode, rtx,
461 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
462 static rtx simplify_and_const_int (rtx, machine_mode, rtx,
463 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
464 static int merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code *, HOST_WIDE_INT *, enum rtx_code,
465 HOST_WIDE_INT, machine_mode, int *);
466 static rtx simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx, int);
467 static rtx simplify_shift_const (rtx, enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx,
468 int);
469 static int recog_for_combine (rtx *, rtx_insn *, rtx *);
470 static rtx gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode, rtx);
471 static enum rtx_code simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code, machine_mode,
472 rtx, rtx *);
473 static enum rtx_code simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *);
474 static void update_table_tick (rtx);
475 static void record_value_for_reg (rtx, rtx_insn *, rtx);
476 static void check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn *, rtx);
477 static void record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
478 static void record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn *);
479 static int get_last_value_validate (rtx *, rtx_insn *, int, int);
480 static rtx get_last_value (const_rtx);
481 static int use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx, int);
482 static void reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
483 static int reg_dead_at_p (rtx, rtx_insn *);
484 static void move_deaths (rtx, rtx, int, rtx_insn *, rtx *);
485 static int reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx, rtx);
486 static void distribute_notes (rtx, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx, rtx, rtx);
487 static void distribute_links (struct insn_link *);
488 static void mark_used_regs_combine (rtx);
489 static void record_promoted_value (rtx_insn *, rtx);
490 static bool unmentioned_reg_p (rtx, rtx);
491 static void record_truncated_values (rtx *, void *);
492 static bool reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode, const_rtx);
493 static rtx gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode, rtx);
496 /* It is not safe to use ordinary gen_lowpart in combine.
497 See comments in gen_lowpart_for_combine. */
498 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
499 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_for_combine
501 /* Our implementation of gen_lowpart never emits a new pseudo. */
502 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT
503 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT gen_lowpart_for_combine
505 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS
506 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine
508 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES
509 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine
511 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE
512 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE reg_truncated_to_mode
514 static const struct rtl_hooks combine_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
517 /* Convenience wrapper for the canonicalize_comparison target hook.
518 Target hooks cannot use enum rtx_code. */
519 static inline void
520 target_canonicalize_comparison (enum rtx_code *code, rtx *op0, rtx *op1,
521 bool op0_preserve_value)
523 int code_int = (int)*code;
524 targetm.canonicalize_comparison (&code_int, op0, op1, op0_preserve_value);
525 *code = (enum rtx_code)code_int;
528 /* Try to split PATTERN found in INSN. This returns NULL_RTX if
529 PATTERN can not be split. Otherwise, it returns an insn sequence.
530 This is a wrapper around split_insns which ensures that the
531 reg_stat vector is made larger if the splitter creates a new
532 register. */
534 static rtx_insn *
535 combine_split_insns (rtx pattern, rtx_insn *insn)
537 rtx_insn *ret;
538 unsigned int nregs;
540 ret = split_insns (pattern, insn);
541 nregs = max_reg_num ();
542 if (nregs > reg_stat.length ())
543 reg_stat.safe_grow_cleared (nregs);
544 return ret;
547 /* This is used by find_single_use to locate an rtx in LOC that
548 contains exactly one use of DEST, which is typically either a REG
549 or CC0. It returns a pointer to the innermost rtx expression
550 containing DEST. Appearances of DEST that are being used to
551 totally replace it are not counted. */
553 static rtx *
554 find_single_use_1 (rtx dest, rtx *loc)
556 rtx x = *loc;
557 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
558 rtx *result = NULL;
559 rtx *this_result;
560 int i;
561 const char *fmt;
563 switch (code)
565 case CONST:
566 case LABEL_REF:
567 case SYMBOL_REF:
568 CASE_CONST_ANY:
569 case CLOBBER:
570 return 0;
572 case SET:
573 /* If the destination is anything other than CC0, PC, a REG or a SUBREG
574 of a REG that occupies all of the REG, the insn uses DEST if
575 it is mentioned in the destination or the source. Otherwise, we
576 need just check the source. */
577 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
578 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC
579 && !REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
580 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
581 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)))
582 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))))
583 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
584 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)))
585 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
586 break;
588 return find_single_use_1 (dest, &SET_SRC (x));
590 case MEM:
591 case SUBREG:
592 return find_single_use_1 (dest, &XEXP (x, 0));
594 default:
595 break;
598 /* If it wasn't one of the common cases above, check each expression and
599 vector of this code. Look for a unique usage of DEST. */
601 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
602 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
604 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
606 if (dest == XEXP (x, i)
607 || (REG_P (dest) && REG_P (XEXP (x, i))
608 && REGNO (dest) == REGNO (XEXP (x, i))))
609 this_result = loc;
610 else
611 this_result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &XEXP (x, i));
613 if (result == NULL)
614 result = this_result;
615 else if (this_result)
616 /* Duplicate usage. */
617 return NULL;
619 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
621 int j;
623 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
625 if (XVECEXP (x, i, j) == dest
626 || (REG_P (dest)
627 && REG_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j))
628 && REGNO (XVECEXP (x, i, j)) == REGNO (dest)))
629 this_result = loc;
630 else
631 this_result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &XVECEXP (x, i, j));
633 if (result == NULL)
634 result = this_result;
635 else if (this_result)
636 return NULL;
641 return result;
645 /* See if DEST, produced in INSN, is used only a single time in the
646 sequel. If so, return a pointer to the innermost rtx expression in which
647 it is used.
649 If PLOC is nonzero, *PLOC is set to the insn containing the single use.
651 If DEST is cc0_rtx, we look only at the next insn. In that case, we don't
652 care about REG_DEAD notes or LOG_LINKS.
654 Otherwise, we find the single use by finding an insn that has a
655 LOG_LINKS pointing at INSN and has a REG_DEAD note for DEST. If DEST is
656 only referenced once in that insn, we know that it must be the first
657 and last insn referencing DEST. */
659 static rtx *
660 find_single_use (rtx dest, rtx_insn *insn, rtx_insn **ploc)
662 basic_block bb;
663 rtx_insn *next;
664 rtx *result;
665 struct insn_link *link;
667 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
669 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
670 if (next == 0
671 || (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (next) && !JUMP_P (next)))
672 return 0;
674 result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &PATTERN (next));
675 if (result && ploc)
676 *ploc = next;
677 return result;
680 if (!REG_P (dest))
681 return 0;
683 bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
684 for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
685 next && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (next) == bb;
686 next = NEXT_INSN (next))
687 if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (next) && dead_or_set_p (next, dest))
689 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, next)
690 if (link->insn == insn && link->regno == REGNO (dest))
691 break;
693 if (link)
695 result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &PATTERN (next));
696 if (ploc)
697 *ploc = next;
698 return result;
702 return 0;
705 /* Substitute NEWVAL, an rtx expression, into INTO, a place in some
706 insn. The substitution can be undone by undo_all. If INTO is already
707 set to NEWVAL, do not record this change. Because computing NEWVAL might
708 also call SUBST, we have to compute it before we put anything into
709 the undo table. */
711 static void
712 do_SUBST (rtx *into, rtx newval)
714 struct undo *buf;
715 rtx oldval = *into;
717 if (oldval == newval)
718 return;
720 /* We'd like to catch as many invalid transformations here as
721 possible. Unfortunately, there are way too many mode changes
722 that are perfectly valid, so we'd waste too much effort for
723 little gain doing the checks here. Focus on catching invalid
724 transformations involving integer constants. */
725 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (oldval)) == MODE_INT
726 && CONST_INT_P (newval))
728 /* Sanity check that we're replacing oldval with a CONST_INT
729 that is a valid sign-extension for the original mode. */
730 gcc_assert (INTVAL (newval)
731 == trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (newval), GET_MODE (oldval)));
733 /* Replacing the operand of a SUBREG or a ZERO_EXTEND with a
734 CONST_INT is not valid, because after the replacement, the
735 original mode would be gone. Unfortunately, we can't tell
736 when do_SUBST is called to replace the operand thereof, so we
737 perform this test on oldval instead, checking whether an
738 invalid replacement took place before we got here. */
739 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval) == SUBREG
740 && CONST_INT_P (SUBREG_REG (oldval))));
741 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval) == ZERO_EXTEND
742 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (oldval, 0))));
745 if (undobuf.frees)
746 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
747 else
748 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
750 buf->kind = UNDO_RTX;
751 buf->where.r = into;
752 buf->old_contents.r = oldval;
753 *into = newval;
755 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
758 #define SUBST(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
760 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is an int expression. Note that substitution
761 for the value of a HOST_WIDE_INT value (including CONST_INT) is
762 not safe. */
764 static void
765 do_SUBST_INT (int *into, int newval)
767 struct undo *buf;
768 int oldval = *into;
770 if (oldval == newval)
771 return;
773 if (undobuf.frees)
774 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
775 else
776 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
778 buf->kind = UNDO_INT;
779 buf->where.i = into;
780 buf->old_contents.i = oldval;
781 *into = newval;
783 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
786 #define SUBST_INT(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_INT (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
788 /* Similar to SUBST, but just substitute the mode. This is used when
789 changing the mode of a pseudo-register, so that any other
790 references to the entry in the regno_reg_rtx array will change as
791 well. */
793 static void
794 do_SUBST_MODE (rtx *into, machine_mode newval)
796 struct undo *buf;
797 machine_mode oldval = GET_MODE (*into);
799 if (oldval == newval)
800 return;
802 if (undobuf.frees)
803 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
804 else
805 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
807 buf->kind = UNDO_MODE;
808 buf->where.r = into;
809 buf->old_contents.m = oldval;
810 adjust_reg_mode (*into, newval);
812 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
815 #define SUBST_MODE(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_MODE (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
817 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is a LOG_LINKS expression. */
819 static void
820 do_SUBST_LINK (struct insn_link **into, struct insn_link *newval)
822 struct undo *buf;
823 struct insn_link * oldval = *into;
825 if (oldval == newval)
826 return;
828 if (undobuf.frees)
829 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
830 else
831 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
833 buf->kind = UNDO_LINKS;
834 buf->where.l = into;
835 buf->old_contents.l = oldval;
836 *into = newval;
838 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
841 #define SUBST_LINK(oldval, newval) do_SUBST_LINK (&oldval, newval)
843 /* Subroutine of try_combine. Determine whether the replacement patterns
844 NEWPAT, NEWI2PAT and NEWOTHERPAT are cheaper according to insn_rtx_cost
845 than the original sequence I0, I1, I2, I3 and undobuf.other_insn. Note
846 that I0, I1 and/or NEWI2PAT may be NULL_RTX. Similarly, NEWOTHERPAT and
847 undobuf.other_insn may also both be NULL_RTX. Return false if the cost
848 of all the instructions can be estimated and the replacements are more
849 expensive than the original sequence. */
851 static bool
852 combine_validate_cost (rtx_insn *i0, rtx_insn *i1, rtx_insn *i2, rtx_insn *i3,
853 rtx newpat, rtx newi2pat, rtx newotherpat)
855 int i0_cost, i1_cost, i2_cost, i3_cost;
856 int new_i2_cost, new_i3_cost;
857 int old_cost, new_cost;
859 /* Lookup the original insn_rtx_costs. */
860 i2_cost = INSN_COST (i2);
861 i3_cost = INSN_COST (i3);
863 if (i1)
865 i1_cost = INSN_COST (i1);
866 if (i0)
868 i0_cost = INSN_COST (i0);
869 old_cost = (i0_cost > 0 && i1_cost > 0 && i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0
870 ? i0_cost + i1_cost + i2_cost + i3_cost : 0);
872 else
874 old_cost = (i1_cost > 0 && i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0
875 ? i1_cost + i2_cost + i3_cost : 0);
876 i0_cost = 0;
879 else
881 old_cost = (i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0) ? i2_cost + i3_cost : 0;
882 i1_cost = i0_cost = 0;
885 /* If we have split a PARALLEL I2 to I1,I2, we have counted its cost twice;
886 correct that. */
887 if (old_cost && i1 && INSN_UID (i1) == INSN_UID (i2))
888 old_cost -= i1_cost;
891 /* Calculate the replacement insn_rtx_costs. */
892 new_i3_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newpat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
893 if (newi2pat)
895 new_i2_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newi2pat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
896 new_cost = (new_i2_cost > 0 && new_i3_cost > 0)
897 ? new_i2_cost + new_i3_cost : 0;
899 else
901 new_cost = new_i3_cost;
902 new_i2_cost = 0;
905 if (undobuf.other_insn)
907 int old_other_cost, new_other_cost;
909 old_other_cost = INSN_COST (undobuf.other_insn);
910 new_other_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newotherpat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
911 if (old_other_cost > 0 && new_other_cost > 0)
913 old_cost += old_other_cost;
914 new_cost += new_other_cost;
916 else
917 old_cost = 0;
920 /* Disallow this combination if both new_cost and old_cost are greater than
921 zero, and new_cost is greater than old cost. */
922 int reject = old_cost > 0 && new_cost > old_cost;
924 if (dump_file)
926 fprintf (dump_file, "%s combination of insns ",
927 reject ? "rejecting" : "allowing");
928 if (i0)
929 fprintf (dump_file, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i0));
930 if (i1 && INSN_UID (i1) != INSN_UID (i2))
931 fprintf (dump_file, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i1));
932 fprintf (dump_file, "%d and %d\n", INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
934 fprintf (dump_file, "original costs ");
935 if (i0)
936 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + ", i0_cost);
937 if (i1 && INSN_UID (i1) != INSN_UID (i2))
938 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + ", i1_cost);
939 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + %d = %d\n", i2_cost, i3_cost, old_cost);
941 if (newi2pat)
942 fprintf (dump_file, "replacement costs %d + %d = %d\n",
943 new_i2_cost, new_i3_cost, new_cost);
944 else
945 fprintf (dump_file, "replacement cost %d\n", new_cost);
948 if (reject)
949 return false;
951 /* Update the uid_insn_cost array with the replacement costs. */
952 INSN_COST (i2) = new_i2_cost;
953 INSN_COST (i3) = new_i3_cost;
954 if (i1)
956 INSN_COST (i1) = 0;
957 if (i0)
958 INSN_COST (i0) = 0;
961 return true;
965 /* Delete any insns that copy a register to itself. */
967 static void
968 delete_noop_moves (void)
970 rtx_insn *insn, *next;
971 basic_block bb;
973 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
975 for (insn = BB_HEAD (bb); insn != NEXT_INSN (BB_END (bb)); insn = next)
977 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
978 if (INSN_P (insn) && noop_move_p (insn))
980 if (dump_file)
981 fprintf (dump_file, "deleting noop move %d\n", INSN_UID (insn));
983 delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
990 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine DEF. */
991 static bool
992 can_combine_def_p (df_ref def)
994 /* Do not consider if it is pre/post modification in MEM. */
995 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_PRE_POST_MODIFY)
996 return false;
998 unsigned int regno = DF_REF_REGNO (def);
1000 /* Do not combine frame pointer adjustments. */
1001 if ((regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1002 && (!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed))
1003 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
1004 && regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1005 && (!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed))
1006 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1007 && regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[regno]))
1008 return false;
1010 return true;
1013 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine USE. */
1014 static bool
1015 can_combine_use_p (df_ref use)
1017 /* Do not consider the usage of the stack pointer by function call. */
1018 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (use) & DF_REF_CALL_STACK_USAGE)
1019 return false;
1021 return true;
1024 /* Fill in log links field for all insns. */
1026 static void
1027 create_log_links (void)
1029 basic_block bb;
1030 rtx_insn **next_use;
1031 rtx_insn *insn;
1032 df_ref def, use;
1034 next_use = XCNEWVEC (rtx_insn *, max_reg_num ());
1036 /* Pass through each block from the end, recording the uses of each
1037 register and establishing log links when def is encountered.
1038 Note that we do not clear next_use array in order to save time,
1039 so we have to test whether the use is in the same basic block as def.
1041 There are a few cases below when we do not consider the definition or
1042 usage -- these are taken from original flow.c did. Don't ask me why it is
1043 done this way; I don't know and if it works, I don't want to know. */
1045 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
1047 FOR_BB_INSNS_REVERSE (bb, insn)
1049 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
1050 continue;
1052 /* Log links are created only once. */
1053 gcc_assert (!LOG_LINKS (insn));
1055 FOR_EACH_INSN_DEF (def, insn)
1057 unsigned int regno = DF_REF_REGNO (def);
1058 rtx_insn *use_insn;
1060 if (!next_use[regno])
1061 continue;
1063 if (!can_combine_def_p (def))
1064 continue;
1066 use_insn = next_use[regno];
1067 next_use[regno] = NULL;
1069 if (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (use_insn) != bb)
1070 continue;
1072 /* flow.c claimed:
1074 We don't build a LOG_LINK for hard registers contained
1075 in ASM_OPERANDs. If these registers get replaced,
1076 we might wind up changing the semantics of the insn,
1077 even if reload can make what appear to be valid
1078 assignments later. */
1079 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1080 && asm_noperands (PATTERN (use_insn)) >= 0)
1081 continue;
1083 /* Don't add duplicate links between instructions. */
1084 struct insn_link *links;
1085 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, use_insn)
1086 if (insn == links->insn && regno == links->regno)
1087 break;
1089 if (!links)
1090 LOG_LINKS (use_insn)
1091 = alloc_insn_link (insn, regno, LOG_LINKS (use_insn));
1094 FOR_EACH_INSN_USE (use, insn)
1095 if (can_combine_use_p (use))
1096 next_use[DF_REF_REGNO (use)] = insn;
1100 free (next_use);
1103 /* Walk the LOG_LINKS of insn B to see if we find a reference to A. Return
1104 true if we found a LOG_LINK that proves that A feeds B. This only works
1105 if there are no instructions between A and B which could have a link
1106 depending on A, since in that case we would not record a link for B.
1107 We also check the implicit dependency created by a cc0 setter/user
1108 pair. */
1110 static bool
1111 insn_a_feeds_b (rtx_insn *a, rtx_insn *b)
1113 struct insn_link *links;
1114 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, b)
1115 if (links->insn == a)
1116 return true;
1117 if (HAVE_cc0 && sets_cc0_p (a))
1118 return true;
1119 return false;
1122 /* Main entry point for combiner. F is the first insn of the function.
1123 NREGS is the first unused pseudo-reg number.
1125 Return nonzero if the combiner has turned an indirect jump
1126 instruction into a direct jump. */
1127 static int
1128 combine_instructions (rtx_insn *f, unsigned int nregs)
1130 rtx_insn *insn, *next;
1131 rtx_insn *prev;
1132 struct insn_link *links, *nextlinks;
1133 rtx_insn *first;
1134 basic_block last_bb;
1136 int new_direct_jump_p = 0;
1138 for (first = f; first && !NONDEBUG_INSN_P (first); )
1139 first = NEXT_INSN (first);
1140 if (!first)
1141 return 0;
1143 combine_attempts = 0;
1144 combine_merges = 0;
1145 combine_extras = 0;
1146 combine_successes = 0;
1148 rtl_hooks = combine_rtl_hooks;
1150 reg_stat.safe_grow_cleared (nregs);
1152 init_recog_no_volatile ();
1154 /* Allocate array for insn info. */
1155 max_uid_known = get_max_uid ();
1156 uid_log_links = XCNEWVEC (struct insn_link *, max_uid_known + 1);
1157 uid_insn_cost = XCNEWVEC (int, max_uid_known + 1);
1158 gcc_obstack_init (&insn_link_obstack);
1160 nonzero_bits_mode = mode_for_size (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, MODE_INT, 0);
1162 /* Don't use reg_stat[].nonzero_bits when computing it. This can cause
1163 problems when, for example, we have j <<= 1 in a loop. */
1165 nonzero_sign_valid = 0;
1166 label_tick = label_tick_ebb_start = 1;
1168 /* Scan all SETs and see if we can deduce anything about what
1169 bits are known to be zero for some registers and how many copies
1170 of the sign bit are known to exist for those registers.
1172 Also set any known values so that we can use it while searching
1173 for what bits are known to be set. */
1175 setup_incoming_promotions (first);
1176 /* Allow the entry block and the first block to fall into the same EBB.
1177 Conceptually the incoming promotions are assigned to the entry block. */
1178 last_bb = ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun);
1180 create_log_links ();
1181 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block, cfun)
1183 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block);
1184 last_call_luid = 0;
1185 mem_last_set = -1;
1187 label_tick++;
1188 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block)
1189 || single_pred (this_basic_block) != last_bb)
1190 label_tick_ebb_start = label_tick;
1191 last_bb = this_basic_block;
1193 FOR_BB_INSNS (this_basic_block, insn)
1194 if (INSN_P (insn) && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn))
1196 rtx links;
1198 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
1199 subst_insn = insn;
1201 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies,
1202 insn);
1203 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn);
1205 if (AUTO_INC_DEC)
1206 for (links = REG_NOTES (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1))
1207 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (links) == REG_INC)
1208 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (XEXP (links, 0), NULL_RTX,
1209 insn);
1211 /* Record the current insn_rtx_cost of this instruction. */
1212 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn))
1213 INSN_COST (insn) = insn_rtx_cost (PATTERN (insn),
1214 optimize_this_for_speed_p);
1215 if (dump_file)
1217 fprintf (dump_file, "insn_cost %d for ", INSN_COST (insn));
1218 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, insn);
1223 nonzero_sign_valid = 1;
1225 /* Now scan all the insns in forward order. */
1226 label_tick = label_tick_ebb_start = 1;
1227 init_reg_last ();
1228 setup_incoming_promotions (first);
1229 last_bb = ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun);
1230 int max_combine = PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_COMBINE_INSNS);
1232 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block, cfun)
1234 rtx_insn *last_combined_insn = NULL;
1235 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block);
1236 last_call_luid = 0;
1237 mem_last_set = -1;
1239 label_tick++;
1240 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block)
1241 || single_pred (this_basic_block) != last_bb)
1242 label_tick_ebb_start = label_tick;
1243 last_bb = this_basic_block;
1245 rtl_profile_for_bb (this_basic_block);
1246 for (insn = BB_HEAD (this_basic_block);
1247 insn != NEXT_INSN (BB_END (this_basic_block));
1248 insn = next ? next : NEXT_INSN (insn))
1250 next = 0;
1251 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
1252 continue;
1254 while (last_combined_insn
1255 && (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (last_combined_insn)
1256 || last_combined_insn->deleted ()))
1257 last_combined_insn = PREV_INSN (last_combined_insn);
1258 if (last_combined_insn == NULL_RTX
1259 || BLOCK_FOR_INSN (last_combined_insn) != this_basic_block
1260 || DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn) <= DF_INSN_LUID (insn))
1261 last_combined_insn = insn;
1263 /* See if we know about function return values before this
1264 insn based upon SUBREG flags. */
1265 check_promoted_subreg (insn, PATTERN (insn));
1267 /* See if we can find hardregs and subreg of pseudos in
1268 narrower modes. This could help turning TRUNCATEs
1269 into SUBREGs. */
1270 note_uses (&PATTERN (insn), record_truncated_values, NULL);
1272 /* Try this insn with each insn it links back to. */
1274 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1275 if ((next = try_combine (insn, links->insn, NULL,
1276 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1277 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1279 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "two-insn combine", 1);
1280 goto retry;
1283 /* Try each sequence of three linked insns ending with this one. */
1285 if (max_combine >= 3)
1286 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1288 rtx_insn *link = links->insn;
1290 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1291 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1292 if (NOTE_P (link))
1293 continue;
1295 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link)
1296 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, nextlinks->insn,
1297 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1298 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1300 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "three-insn combine", 1);
1301 goto retry;
1305 /* Try to combine a jump insn that uses CC0
1306 with a preceding insn that sets CC0, and maybe with its
1307 logical predecessor as well.
1308 This is how we make decrement-and-branch insns.
1309 We need this special code because data flow connections
1310 via CC0 do not get entered in LOG_LINKS. */
1312 if (HAVE_cc0
1313 && JUMP_P (insn)
1314 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0
1315 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1316 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev)))
1318 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL, NULL,
1319 &new_direct_jump_p,
1320 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1321 goto retry;
1323 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, prev)
1324 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, nextlinks->insn,
1325 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1326 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1327 goto retry;
1330 /* Do the same for an insn that explicitly references CC0. */
1331 if (HAVE_cc0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn)
1332 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0
1333 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1334 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))
1335 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
1336 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
1338 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL, NULL,
1339 &new_direct_jump_p,
1340 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1341 goto retry;
1343 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, prev)
1344 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, nextlinks->insn,
1345 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1346 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1347 goto retry;
1350 /* Finally, see if any of the insns that this insn links to
1351 explicitly references CC0. If so, try this insn, that insn,
1352 and its predecessor if it sets CC0. */
1353 if (HAVE_cc0)
1355 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1356 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (links->insn)
1357 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (links->insn)) == SET
1358 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (links->insn)))
1359 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (links->insn)) != 0
1360 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1361 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))
1362 && (next = try_combine (insn, links->insn,
1363 prev, NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1364 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1365 goto retry;
1368 /* Try combining an insn with two different insns whose results it
1369 uses. */
1370 if (max_combine >= 3)
1371 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1372 for (nextlinks = links->next; nextlinks;
1373 nextlinks = nextlinks->next)
1374 if ((next = try_combine (insn, links->insn,
1375 nextlinks->insn, NULL,
1376 &new_direct_jump_p,
1377 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1380 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "three-insn combine", 1);
1381 goto retry;
1384 /* Try four-instruction combinations. */
1385 if (max_combine >= 4)
1386 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1388 struct insn_link *next1;
1389 rtx_insn *link = links->insn;
1391 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1392 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1393 if (NOTE_P (link))
1394 continue;
1396 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (next1, link)
1398 rtx_insn *link1 = next1->insn;
1399 if (NOTE_P (link1))
1400 continue;
1401 /* I0 -> I1 -> I2 -> I3. */
1402 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link1)
1403 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1404 nextlinks->insn,
1405 &new_direct_jump_p,
1406 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1408 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1409 goto retry;
1411 /* I0, I1 -> I2, I2 -> I3. */
1412 for (nextlinks = next1->next; nextlinks;
1413 nextlinks = nextlinks->next)
1414 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1415 nextlinks->insn,
1416 &new_direct_jump_p,
1417 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1419 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1420 goto retry;
1424 for (next1 = links->next; next1; next1 = next1->next)
1426 rtx_insn *link1 = next1->insn;
1427 if (NOTE_P (link1))
1428 continue;
1429 /* I0 -> I2; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1430 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link)
1431 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1432 nextlinks->insn,
1433 &new_direct_jump_p,
1434 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1436 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1437 goto retry;
1439 /* I0 -> I1; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1440 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link1)
1441 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1442 nextlinks->insn,
1443 &new_direct_jump_p,
1444 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1446 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1447 goto retry;
1452 /* Try this insn with each REG_EQUAL note it links back to. */
1453 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1455 rtx set, note;
1456 rtx_insn *temp = links->insn;
1457 if ((set = single_set (temp)) != 0
1458 && (note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (temp)) != 0
1459 && (note = XEXP (note, 0), GET_CODE (note)) != EXPR_LIST
1460 /* Avoid using a register that may already been marked
1461 dead by an earlier instruction. */
1462 && ! unmentioned_reg_p (note, SET_SRC (set))
1463 && (GET_MODE (note) == VOIDmode
1464 ? SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)))
1465 : (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == GET_MODE (note)
1466 && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
1467 || (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (set), 0))
1468 == GET_MODE (note))))))
1470 /* Temporarily replace the set's source with the
1471 contents of the REG_EQUAL note. The insn will
1472 be deleted or recognized by try_combine. */
1473 rtx orig_src = SET_SRC (set);
1474 rtx orig_dest = SET_DEST (set);
1475 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
1476 SET_DEST (set) = XEXP (SET_DEST (set), 0);
1477 SET_SRC (set) = note;
1478 i2mod = temp;
1479 i2mod_old_rhs = copy_rtx (orig_src);
1480 i2mod_new_rhs = copy_rtx (note);
1481 next = try_combine (insn, i2mod, NULL, NULL,
1482 &new_direct_jump_p,
1483 last_combined_insn);
1484 i2mod = NULL;
1485 if (next)
1487 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "insn-with-note combine", 1);
1488 goto retry;
1490 SET_SRC (set) = orig_src;
1491 SET_DEST (set) = orig_dest;
1495 if (!NOTE_P (insn))
1496 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn);
1498 retry:
1503 default_rtl_profile ();
1504 clear_bb_flags ();
1505 new_direct_jump_p |= purge_all_dead_edges ();
1506 delete_noop_moves ();
1508 /* Clean up. */
1509 obstack_free (&insn_link_obstack, NULL);
1510 free (uid_log_links);
1511 free (uid_insn_cost);
1512 reg_stat.release ();
1515 struct undo *undo, *next;
1516 for (undo = undobuf.frees; undo; undo = next)
1518 next = undo->next;
1519 free (undo);
1521 undobuf.frees = 0;
1524 total_attempts += combine_attempts;
1525 total_merges += combine_merges;
1526 total_extras += combine_extras;
1527 total_successes += combine_successes;
1529 nonzero_sign_valid = 0;
1530 rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
1532 /* Make recognizer allow volatile MEMs again. */
1533 init_recog ();
1535 return new_direct_jump_p;
1538 /* Wipe the last_xxx fields of reg_stat in preparation for another pass. */
1540 static void
1541 init_reg_last (void)
1543 unsigned int i;
1544 reg_stat_type *p;
1546 FOR_EACH_VEC_ELT (reg_stat, i, p)
1547 memset (p, 0, offsetof (reg_stat_type, sign_bit_copies));
1550 /* Set up any promoted values for incoming argument registers. */
1552 static void
1553 setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn *first)
1555 tree arg;
1556 bool strictly_local = false;
1558 for (arg = DECL_ARGUMENTS (current_function_decl); arg;
1559 arg = DECL_CHAIN (arg))
1561 rtx x, reg = DECL_INCOMING_RTL (arg);
1562 int uns1, uns3;
1563 machine_mode mode1, mode2, mode3, mode4;
1565 /* Only continue if the incoming argument is in a register. */
1566 if (!REG_P (reg))
1567 continue;
1569 /* Determine, if possible, whether all call sites of the current
1570 function lie within the current compilation unit. (This does
1571 take into account the exporting of a function via taking its
1572 address, and so forth.) */
1573 strictly_local = cgraph_node::local_info (current_function_decl)->local;
1575 /* The mode and signedness of the argument before any promotions happen
1576 (equal to the mode of the pseudo holding it at that stage). */
1577 mode1 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (arg));
1578 uns1 = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (arg));
1580 /* The mode and signedness of the argument after any source language and
1581 TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES-driven promotions. */
1582 mode2 = TYPE_MODE (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg));
1583 uns3 = TYPE_UNSIGNED (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg));
1585 /* The mode and signedness of the argument as it is actually passed,
1586 see assign_parm_setup_reg in function.c. */
1587 mode3 = promote_function_mode (TREE_TYPE (arg), mode1, &uns3,
1588 TREE_TYPE (cfun->decl), 0);
1590 /* The mode of the register in which the argument is being passed. */
1591 mode4 = GET_MODE (reg);
1593 /* Eliminate sign extensions in the callee when:
1594 (a) A mode promotion has occurred; */
1595 if (mode1 == mode3)
1596 continue;
1597 /* (b) The mode of the register is the same as the mode of
1598 the argument as it is passed; */
1599 if (mode3 != mode4)
1600 continue;
1601 /* (c) There's no language level extension; */
1602 if (mode1 == mode2)
1604 /* (c.1) All callers are from the current compilation unit. If that's
1605 the case we don't have to rely on an ABI, we only have to know
1606 what we're generating right now, and we know that we will do the
1607 mode1 to mode2 promotion with the given sign. */
1608 else if (!strictly_local)
1609 continue;
1610 /* (c.2) The combination of the two promotions is useful. This is
1611 true when the signs match, or if the first promotion is unsigned.
1612 In the later case, (sign_extend (zero_extend x)) is the same as
1613 (zero_extend (zero_extend x)), so make sure to force UNS3 true. */
1614 else if (uns1)
1615 uns3 = true;
1616 else if (uns3)
1617 continue;
1619 /* Record that the value was promoted from mode1 to mode3,
1620 so that any sign extension at the head of the current
1621 function may be eliminated. */
1622 x = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode1, const0_rtx);
1623 x = gen_rtx_fmt_e ((uns3 ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND), mode3, x);
1624 record_value_for_reg (reg, first, x);
1628 /* If MODE has a precision lower than PREC and SRC is a non-negative constant
1629 that would appear negative in MODE, sign-extend SRC for use in nonzero_bits
1630 because some machines (maybe most) will actually do the sign-extension and
1631 this is the conservative approach.
1633 ??? For 2.5, try to tighten up the MD files in this regard instead of this
1634 kludge. */
1636 static rtx
1637 sign_extend_short_imm (rtx src, machine_mode mode, unsigned int prec)
1639 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < prec
1640 && CONST_INT_P (src)
1641 && INTVAL (src) > 0
1642 && val_signbit_known_set_p (mode, INTVAL (src)))
1643 src = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) | ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
1645 return src;
1648 /* Update RSP for pseudo-register X from INSN's REG_EQUAL note (if one exists)
1649 and SET. */
1651 static void
1652 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (reg_stat_type *rsp, rtx_insn *insn, const_rtx set,
1653 rtx x)
1655 rtx reg_equal_note = insn ? find_reg_equal_equiv_note (insn) : NULL_RTX;
1656 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bits = 0;
1657 rtx reg_equal = NULL, src = SET_SRC (set);
1658 unsigned int num = 0;
1660 if (reg_equal_note)
1661 reg_equal = XEXP (reg_equal_note, 0);
1663 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND)
1665 src = sign_extend_short_imm (src, GET_MODE (x), BITS_PER_WORD);
1666 if (reg_equal)
1667 reg_equal = sign_extend_short_imm (reg_equal, GET_MODE (x), BITS_PER_WORD);
1670 /* Don't call nonzero_bits if it cannot change anything. */
1671 if (rsp->nonzero_bits != HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U)
1673 bits = nonzero_bits (src, nonzero_bits_mode);
1674 if (reg_equal && bits)
1675 bits &= nonzero_bits (reg_equal, nonzero_bits_mode);
1676 rsp->nonzero_bits |= bits;
1679 /* Don't call num_sign_bit_copies if it cannot change anything. */
1680 if (rsp->sign_bit_copies != 1)
1682 num = num_sign_bit_copies (SET_SRC (set), GET_MODE (x));
1683 if (reg_equal && num != GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
1685 unsigned int numeq = num_sign_bit_copies (reg_equal, GET_MODE (x));
1686 if (num == 0 || numeq > num)
1687 num = numeq;
1689 if (rsp->sign_bit_copies == 0 || num < rsp->sign_bit_copies)
1690 rsp->sign_bit_copies = num;
1694 /* Called via note_stores. If X is a pseudo that is narrower than
1695 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and is being set, record what bits are known zero.
1697 If we are setting only a portion of X and we can't figure out what
1698 portion, assume all bits will be used since we don't know what will
1699 be happening.
1701 Similarly, set how many bits of X are known to be copies of the sign bit
1702 at all locations in the function. This is the smallest number implied
1703 by any set of X. */
1705 static void
1706 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx x, const_rtx set, void *data)
1708 rtx_insn *insn = (rtx_insn *) data;
1710 if (REG_P (x)
1711 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1712 /* If this register is undefined at the start of the file, we can't
1713 say what its contents were. */
1714 && ! REGNO_REG_SET_P
1715 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb), REGNO (x))
1716 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
1718 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
1720 if (set == 0 || GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER)
1722 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1723 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1724 return;
1727 /* If this register is being initialized using itself, and the
1728 register is uninitialized in this basic block, and there are
1729 no LOG_LINKS which set the register, then part of the
1730 register is uninitialized. In that case we can't assume
1731 anything about the number of nonzero bits.
1733 ??? We could do better if we checked this in
1734 reg_{nonzero_bits,num_sign_bit_copies}_for_combine. Then we
1735 could avoid making assumptions about the insn which initially
1736 sets the register, while still using the information in other
1737 insns. We would have to be careful to check every insn
1738 involved in the combination. */
1740 if (insn
1741 && reg_referenced_p (x, PATTERN (insn))
1742 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P (DF_LR_IN (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn)),
1743 REGNO (x)))
1745 struct insn_link *link;
1747 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, insn)
1748 if (dead_or_set_p (link->insn, x))
1749 break;
1750 if (!link)
1752 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1753 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1754 return;
1758 /* If this is a complex assignment, see if we can convert it into a
1759 simple assignment. */
1760 set = expand_field_assignment (set);
1762 /* If this is a simple assignment, or we have a paradoxical SUBREG,
1763 set what we know about X. */
1765 if (SET_DEST (set) == x
1766 || (paradoxical_subreg_p (SET_DEST (set))
1767 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set)) == x))
1768 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (rsp, insn, set, x);
1769 else
1771 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1772 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1777 /* See if INSN can be combined into I3. PRED, PRED2, SUCC and SUCC2 are
1778 optionally insns that were previously combined into I3 or that will be
1779 combined into the merger of INSN and I3. The order is PRED, PRED2,
1780 INSN, SUCC, SUCC2, I3.
1782 Return 0 if the combination is not allowed for any reason.
1784 If the combination is allowed, *PDEST will be set to the single
1785 destination of INSN and *PSRC to the single source, and this function
1786 will return 1. */
1788 static int
1789 can_combine_p (rtx_insn *insn, rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *pred ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
1790 rtx_insn *pred2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx_insn *succ, rtx_insn *succ2,
1791 rtx *pdest, rtx *psrc)
1793 int i;
1794 const_rtx set = 0;
1795 rtx src, dest;
1796 rtx_insn *p;
1797 rtx link;
1798 bool all_adjacent = true;
1799 int (*is_volatile_p) (const_rtx);
1801 if (succ)
1803 if (succ2)
1805 if (next_active_insn (succ2) != i3)
1806 all_adjacent = false;
1807 if (next_active_insn (succ) != succ2)
1808 all_adjacent = false;
1810 else if (next_active_insn (succ) != i3)
1811 all_adjacent = false;
1812 if (next_active_insn (insn) != succ)
1813 all_adjacent = false;
1815 else if (next_active_insn (insn) != i3)
1816 all_adjacent = false;
1818 /* Can combine only if previous insn is a SET of a REG, a SUBREG or CC0.
1819 or a PARALLEL consisting of such a SET and CLOBBERs.
1821 If INSN has CLOBBER parallel parts, ignore them for our processing.
1822 By definition, these happen during the execution of the insn. When it
1823 is merged with another insn, all bets are off. If they are, in fact,
1824 needed and aren't also supplied in I3, they may be added by
1825 recog_for_combine. Otherwise, it won't match.
1827 We can also ignore a SET whose SET_DEST is mentioned in a REG_UNUSED
1828 note.
1830 Get the source and destination of INSN. If more than one, can't
1831 combine. */
1833 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
1834 set = PATTERN (insn);
1835 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL
1836 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, 0)) == SET)
1838 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0); i++)
1840 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
1842 switch (GET_CODE (elt))
1844 /* This is important to combine floating point insns
1845 for the SH4 port. */
1846 case USE:
1847 /* Combining an isolated USE doesn't make sense.
1848 We depend here on combinable_i3pat to reject them. */
1849 /* The code below this loop only verifies that the inputs of
1850 the SET in INSN do not change. We call reg_set_between_p
1851 to verify that the REG in the USE does not change between
1852 I3 and INSN.
1853 If the USE in INSN was for a pseudo register, the matching
1854 insn pattern will likely match any register; combining this
1855 with any other USE would only be safe if we knew that the
1856 used registers have identical values, or if there was
1857 something to tell them apart, e.g. different modes. For
1858 now, we forgo such complicated tests and simply disallow
1859 combining of USES of pseudo registers with any other USE. */
1860 if (REG_P (XEXP (elt, 0))
1861 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL)
1863 rtx i3pat = PATTERN (i3);
1864 int i = XVECLEN (i3pat, 0) - 1;
1865 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (elt, 0));
1869 rtx i3elt = XVECEXP (i3pat, 0, i);
1871 if (GET_CODE (i3elt) == USE
1872 && REG_P (XEXP (i3elt, 0))
1873 && (REGNO (XEXP (i3elt, 0)) == regno
1874 ? reg_set_between_p (XEXP (elt, 0),
1875 PREV_INSN (insn), i3)
1876 : regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
1877 return 0;
1879 while (--i >= 0);
1881 break;
1883 /* We can ignore CLOBBERs. */
1884 case CLOBBER:
1885 break;
1887 case SET:
1888 /* Ignore SETs whose result isn't used but not those that
1889 have side-effects. */
1890 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (elt))
1891 && insn_nothrow_p (insn)
1892 && !side_effects_p (elt))
1893 break;
1895 /* If we have already found a SET, this is a second one and
1896 so we cannot combine with this insn. */
1897 if (set)
1898 return 0;
1900 set = elt;
1901 break;
1903 default:
1904 /* Anything else means we can't combine. */
1905 return 0;
1909 if (set == 0
1910 /* If SET_SRC is an ASM_OPERANDS we can't throw away these CLOBBERs,
1911 so don't do anything with it. */
1912 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == ASM_OPERANDS)
1913 return 0;
1915 else
1916 return 0;
1918 if (set == 0)
1919 return 0;
1921 /* The simplification in expand_field_assignment may call back to
1922 get_last_value, so set safe guard here. */
1923 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
1925 set = expand_field_assignment (set);
1926 src = SET_SRC (set), dest = SET_DEST (set);
1928 /* Do not eliminate user-specified register if it is in an
1929 asm input because we may break the register asm usage defined
1930 in GCC manual if allow to do so.
1931 Be aware that this may cover more cases than we expect but this
1932 should be harmless. */
1933 if (REG_P (dest) && REG_USERVAR_P (dest) && HARD_REGISTER_P (dest)
1934 && extract_asm_operands (PATTERN (i3)))
1935 return 0;
1937 /* Don't eliminate a store in the stack pointer. */
1938 if (dest == stack_pointer_rtx
1939 /* Don't combine with an insn that sets a register to itself if it has
1940 a REG_EQUAL note. This may be part of a LIBCALL sequence. */
1941 || (rtx_equal_p (src, dest) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
1942 /* Can't merge an ASM_OPERANDS. */
1943 || GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
1944 /* Can't merge a function call. */
1945 || GET_CODE (src) == CALL
1946 /* Don't eliminate a function call argument. */
1947 || (CALL_P (i3)
1948 && (find_reg_fusage (i3, USE, dest)
1949 || (REG_P (dest)
1950 && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1951 && global_regs[REGNO (dest)])))
1952 /* Don't substitute into an incremented register. */
1953 || FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i3, dest)
1954 || (succ && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ, dest))
1955 || (succ2 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ2, dest))
1956 /* Don't substitute into a non-local goto, this confuses CFG. */
1957 || (JUMP_P (i3) && find_reg_note (i3, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, NULL_RTX))
1958 /* Make sure that DEST is not used after INSN but before SUCC, or
1959 after SUCC and before SUCC2, or after SUCC2 but before I3. */
1960 || (!all_adjacent
1961 && ((succ2
1962 && (reg_used_between_p (dest, succ2, i3)
1963 || reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, succ2)))
1964 || (!succ2 && succ && reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, i3))
1965 || (succ
1966 /* SUCC and SUCC2 can be split halves from a PARALLEL; in
1967 that case SUCC is not in the insn stream, so use SUCC2
1968 instead for this test. */
1969 && reg_used_between_p (dest, insn,
1970 succ2
1971 && INSN_UID (succ) == INSN_UID (succ2)
1972 ? succ2 : succ))))
1973 /* Make sure that the value that is to be substituted for the register
1974 does not use any registers whose values alter in between. However,
1975 If the insns are adjacent, a use can't cross a set even though we
1976 think it might (this can happen for a sequence of insns each setting
1977 the same destination; last_set of that register might point to
1978 a NOTE). If INSN has a REG_EQUIV note, the register is always
1979 equivalent to the memory so the substitution is valid even if there
1980 are intervening stores. Also, don't move a volatile asm or
1981 UNSPEC_VOLATILE across any other insns. */
1982 || (! all_adjacent
1983 && (((!MEM_P (src)
1984 || ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, src))
1985 && use_crosses_set_p (src, DF_INSN_LUID (insn)))
1986 || (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS && MEM_VOLATILE_P (src))
1987 || GET_CODE (src) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE))
1988 /* Don't combine across a CALL_INSN, because that would possibly
1989 change whether the life span of some REGs crosses calls or not,
1990 and it is a pain to update that information.
1991 Exception: if source is a constant, moving it later can't hurt.
1992 Accept that as a special case. */
1993 || (DF_INSN_LUID (insn) < last_call_luid && ! CONSTANT_P (src)))
1994 return 0;
1996 /* DEST must either be a REG or CC0. */
1997 if (REG_P (dest))
1999 /* If register alignment is being enforced for multi-word items in all
2000 cases except for parameters, it is possible to have a register copy
2001 insn referencing a hard register that is not allowed to contain the
2002 mode being copied and which would not be valid as an operand of most
2003 insns. Eliminate this problem by not combining with such an insn.
2005 Also, on some machines we don't want to extend the life of a hard
2006 register. */
2008 if (REG_P (src)
2009 && ((REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2010 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (dest), GET_MODE (dest)))
2011 /* Don't extend the life of a hard register unless it is
2012 user variable (if we have few registers) or it can't
2013 fit into the desired register (meaning something special
2014 is going on).
2015 Also avoid substituting a return register into I3, because
2016 reload can't handle a conflict with constraints of other
2017 inputs. */
2018 || (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2019 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (src), GET_MODE (src)))))
2020 return 0;
2022 else if (GET_CODE (dest) != CC0)
2023 return 0;
2026 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL)
2027 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (i3), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2028 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
2030 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i), 0);
2032 /* If the clobber represents an earlyclobber operand, we must not
2033 substitute an expression containing the clobbered register.
2034 As we do not analyze the constraint strings here, we have to
2035 make the conservative assumption. However, if the register is
2036 a fixed hard reg, the clobber cannot represent any operand;
2037 we leave it up to the machine description to either accept or
2038 reject use-and-clobber patterns. */
2039 if (!REG_P (reg)
2040 || REGNO (reg) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2041 || !fixed_regs[REGNO (reg)])
2042 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, src))
2043 return 0;
2046 /* If INSN contains anything volatile, or is an `asm' (whether volatile
2047 or not), reject, unless nothing volatile comes between it and I3 */
2049 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS || volatile_refs_p (src))
2051 /* Make sure neither succ nor succ2 contains a volatile reference. */
2052 if (succ2 != 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ2)))
2053 return 0;
2054 if (succ != 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ)))
2055 return 0;
2056 /* We'll check insns between INSN and I3 below. */
2059 /* If INSN is an asm, and DEST is a hard register, reject, since it has
2060 to be an explicit register variable, and was chosen for a reason. */
2062 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
2063 && REG_P (dest) && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2064 return 0;
2066 /* If INSN contains volatile references (specifically volatile MEMs),
2067 we cannot combine across any other volatile references.
2068 Even if INSN doesn't contain volatile references, any intervening
2069 volatile insn might affect machine state. */
2071 is_volatile_p = volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (insn))
2072 ? volatile_refs_p
2073 : volatile_insn_p;
2075 for (p = NEXT_INSN (insn); p != i3; p = NEXT_INSN (p))
2076 if (INSN_P (p) && p != succ && p != succ2 && is_volatile_p (PATTERN (p)))
2077 return 0;
2079 /* If INSN contains an autoincrement or autodecrement, make sure that
2080 register is not used between there and I3, and not already used in
2081 I3 either. Neither must it be used in PRED or SUCC, if they exist.
2082 Also insist that I3 not be a jump; if it were one
2083 and the incremented register were spilled, we would lose. */
2085 if (AUTO_INC_DEC)
2086 for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
2087 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
2088 && (JUMP_P (i3)
2089 || reg_used_between_p (XEXP (link, 0), insn, i3)
2090 || (pred != NULL_RTX
2091 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (pred)))
2092 || (pred2 != NULL_RTX
2093 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (pred2)))
2094 || (succ != NULL_RTX
2095 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (succ)))
2096 || (succ2 != NULL_RTX
2097 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (succ2)))
2098 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i3))))
2099 return 0;
2101 /* Don't combine an insn that follows a CC0-setting insn.
2102 An insn that uses CC0 must not be separated from the one that sets it.
2103 We do, however, allow I2 to follow a CC0-setting insn if that insn
2104 is passed as I1; in that case it will be deleted also.
2105 We also allow combining in this case if all the insns are adjacent
2106 because that would leave the two CC0 insns adjacent as well.
2107 It would be more logical to test whether CC0 occurs inside I1 or I2,
2108 but that would be much slower, and this ought to be equivalent. */
2110 if (HAVE_cc0)
2112 p = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
2113 if (p && p != pred && NONJUMP_INSN_P (p) && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (p))
2114 && ! all_adjacent)
2115 return 0;
2118 /* If we get here, we have passed all the tests and the combination is
2119 to be allowed. */
2121 *pdest = dest;
2122 *psrc = src;
2124 return 1;
2127 /* LOC is the location within I3 that contains its pattern or the component
2128 of a PARALLEL of the pattern. We validate that it is valid for combining.
2130 One problem is if I3 modifies its output, as opposed to replacing it
2131 entirely, we can't allow the output to contain I2DEST, I1DEST or I0DEST as
2132 doing so would produce an insn that is not equivalent to the original insns.
2134 Consider:
2136 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))
2137 (set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 101) 0) <foo>)
2139 This is NOT equivalent to:
2141 (parallel [(set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 100) 0) <foo>)
2142 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))])
2144 Not only does this modify 100 (in which case it might still be valid
2145 if 100 were dead in I2), it sets 101 to the ORIGINAL value of 100.
2147 We can also run into a problem if I2 sets a register that I1
2148 uses and I1 gets directly substituted into I3 (not via I2). In that
2149 case, we would be getting the wrong value of I2DEST into I3, so we
2150 must reject the combination. This case occurs when I2 and I1 both
2151 feed into I3, rather than when I1 feeds into I2, which feeds into I3.
2152 If I1_NOT_IN_SRC is nonzero, it means that finding I1 in the source
2153 of a SET must prevent combination from occurring. The same situation
2154 can occur for I0, in which case I0_NOT_IN_SRC is set.
2156 Before doing the above check, we first try to expand a field assignment
2157 into a set of logical operations.
2159 If PI3_DEST_KILLED is nonzero, it is a pointer to a location in which
2160 we place a register that is both set and used within I3. If more than one
2161 such register is detected, we fail.
2163 Return 1 if the combination is valid, zero otherwise. */
2165 static int
2166 combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn *i3, rtx *loc, rtx i2dest, rtx i1dest, rtx i0dest,
2167 int i1_not_in_src, int i0_not_in_src, rtx *pi3dest_killed)
2169 rtx x = *loc;
2171 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
2173 rtx set = x ;
2174 rtx dest = SET_DEST (set);
2175 rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
2176 rtx inner_dest = dest;
2177 rtx subdest;
2179 while (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2180 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG
2181 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2182 inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0);
2184 /* Check for the case where I3 modifies its output, as discussed
2185 above. We don't want to prevent pseudos from being combined
2186 into the address of a MEM, so only prevent the combination if
2187 i1 or i2 set the same MEM. */
2188 if ((inner_dest != dest &&
2189 (!MEM_P (inner_dest)
2190 || rtx_equal_p (i2dest, inner_dest)
2191 || (i1dest && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, inner_dest))
2192 || (i0dest && rtx_equal_p (i0dest, inner_dest)))
2193 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, inner_dest)
2194 || (i1dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, inner_dest))
2195 || (i0dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, inner_dest))))
2197 /* This is the same test done in can_combine_p except we can't test
2198 all_adjacent; we don't have to, since this instruction will stay
2199 in place, thus we are not considering increasing the lifetime of
2200 INNER_DEST.
2202 Also, if this insn sets a function argument, combining it with
2203 something that might need a spill could clobber a previous
2204 function argument; the all_adjacent test in can_combine_p also
2205 checks this; here, we do a more specific test for this case. */
2207 || (REG_P (inner_dest)
2208 && REGNO (inner_dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2209 && (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (inner_dest),
2210 GET_MODE (inner_dest))))
2211 || (i1_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, src))
2212 || (i0_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, src)))
2213 return 0;
2215 /* If DEST is used in I3, it is being killed in this insn, so
2216 record that for later. We have to consider paradoxical
2217 subregs here, since they kill the whole register, but we
2218 ignore partial subregs, STRICT_LOW_PART, etc.
2219 Never add REG_DEAD notes for the FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM or the
2220 STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, since these are always considered to be
2221 live. Similarly for ARG_POINTER_REGNUM if it is fixed. */
2222 subdest = dest;
2223 if (GET_CODE (subdest) == SUBREG
2224 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (subdest))
2225 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subdest)))))
2226 subdest = SUBREG_REG (subdest);
2227 if (pi3dest_killed
2228 && REG_P (subdest)
2229 && reg_referenced_p (subdest, PATTERN (i3))
2230 && REGNO (subdest) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2231 && (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2232 || REGNO (subdest) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
2233 && (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2234 || (REGNO (subdest) != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2235 || ! fixed_regs [REGNO (subdest)]))
2236 && REGNO (subdest) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
2238 if (*pi3dest_killed)
2239 return 0;
2241 *pi3dest_killed = subdest;
2245 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
2247 int i;
2249 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (x, 0); i++)
2250 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &XVECEXP (x, 0, i), i2dest, i1dest, i0dest,
2251 i1_not_in_src, i0_not_in_src, pi3dest_killed))
2252 return 0;
2255 return 1;
2258 /* Return 1 if X is an arithmetic expression that contains a multiplication
2259 and division. We don't count multiplications by powers of two here. */
2261 static int
2262 contains_muldiv (rtx x)
2264 switch (GET_CODE (x))
2266 case MOD: case DIV: case UMOD: case UDIV:
2267 return 1;
2269 case MULT:
2270 return ! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
2271 && pow2p_hwi (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))));
2272 default:
2273 if (BINARY_P (x))
2274 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 0))
2275 || contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 1));
2277 if (UNARY_P (x))
2278 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 0));
2280 return 0;
2284 /* Determine whether INSN can be used in a combination. Return nonzero if
2285 not. This is used in try_combine to detect early some cases where we
2286 can't perform combinations. */
2288 static int
2289 cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn *insn)
2291 rtx set;
2292 rtx src, dest;
2294 /* If this isn't really an insn, we can't do anything.
2295 This can occur when flow deletes an insn that it has merged into an
2296 auto-increment address. */
2297 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
2298 return 1;
2300 /* Never combine loads and stores involving hard regs that are likely
2301 to be spilled. The register allocator can usually handle such
2302 reg-reg moves by tying. If we allow the combiner to make
2303 substitutions of likely-spilled regs, reload might die.
2304 As an exception, we allow combinations involving fixed regs; these are
2305 not available to the register allocator so there's no risk involved. */
2307 set = single_set (insn);
2308 if (! set)
2309 return 0;
2310 src = SET_SRC (set);
2311 dest = SET_DEST (set);
2312 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG)
2313 src = SUBREG_REG (src);
2314 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
2315 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
2316 if (REG_P (src) && REG_P (dest)
2317 && ((HARD_REGISTER_P (src)
2318 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set, REGNO (src))
2319 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (src))))
2320 || (HARD_REGISTER_P (dest)
2321 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set, REGNO (dest))
2322 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (dest))))))
2323 return 1;
2325 return 0;
2328 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
2330 unsigned regno, nregs;
2331 unsigned mask;
2334 /* Called via note_stores by likely_spilled_retval_p. Remove from info->mask
2335 hard registers that are known to be written to / clobbered in full. */
2336 static void
2337 likely_spilled_retval_1 (rtx x, const_rtx set, void *data)
2339 struct likely_spilled_retval_info *const info =
2340 (struct likely_spilled_retval_info *) data;
2341 unsigned regno, nregs;
2342 unsigned new_mask;
2344 if (!REG_P (XEXP (set, 0)))
2345 return;
2346 regno = REGNO (x);
2347 if (regno >= info->regno + info->nregs)
2348 return;
2349 nregs = REG_NREGS (x);
2350 if (regno + nregs <= info->regno)
2351 return;
2352 new_mask = (2U << (nregs - 1)) - 1;
2353 if (regno < info->regno)
2354 new_mask >>= info->regno - regno;
2355 else
2356 new_mask <<= regno - info->regno;
2357 info->mask &= ~new_mask;
2360 /* Return nonzero iff part of the return value is live during INSN, and
2361 it is likely spilled. This can happen when more than one insn is needed
2362 to copy the return value, e.g. when we consider to combine into the
2363 second copy insn for a complex value. */
2365 static int
2366 likely_spilled_retval_p (rtx_insn *insn)
2368 rtx_insn *use = BB_END (this_basic_block);
2369 rtx reg;
2370 rtx_insn *p;
2371 unsigned regno, nregs;
2372 /* We assume here that no machine mode needs more than
2373 32 hard registers when the value overlaps with a register
2374 for which TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P is true. */
2375 unsigned mask;
2376 struct likely_spilled_retval_info info;
2378 if (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (use) || GET_CODE (PATTERN (use)) != USE || insn == use)
2379 return 0;
2380 reg = XEXP (PATTERN (use), 0);
2381 if (!REG_P (reg) || !targetm.calls.function_value_regno_p (REGNO (reg)))
2382 return 0;
2383 regno = REGNO (reg);
2384 nregs = REG_NREGS (reg);
2385 if (nregs == 1)
2386 return 0;
2387 mask = (2U << (nregs - 1)) - 1;
2389 /* Disregard parts of the return value that are set later. */
2390 info.regno = regno;
2391 info.nregs = nregs;
2392 info.mask = mask;
2393 for (p = PREV_INSN (use); info.mask && p != insn; p = PREV_INSN (p))
2394 if (INSN_P (p))
2395 note_stores (PATTERN (p), likely_spilled_retval_1, &info);
2396 mask = info.mask;
2398 /* Check if any of the (probably) live return value registers is
2399 likely spilled. */
2400 nregs --;
2403 if ((mask & 1 << nregs)
2404 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno + nregs)))
2405 return 1;
2406 } while (nregs--);
2407 return 0;
2410 /* Adjust INSN after we made a change to its destination.
2412 Changing the destination can invalidate notes that say something about
2413 the results of the insn and a LOG_LINK pointing to the insn. */
2415 static void
2416 adjust_for_new_dest (rtx_insn *insn)
2418 /* For notes, be conservative and simply remove them. */
2419 remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes (insn);
2421 /* The new insn will have a destination that was previously the destination
2422 of an insn just above it. Call distribute_links to make a LOG_LINK from
2423 the next use of that destination. */
2425 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2426 gcc_assert (set);
2428 rtx reg = SET_DEST (set);
2430 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
2431 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2432 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
2433 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
2434 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg));
2436 distribute_links (alloc_insn_link (insn, REGNO (reg), NULL));
2438 df_insn_rescan (insn);
2441 /* Return TRUE if combine can reuse reg X in mode MODE.
2442 ADDED_SETS is nonzero if the original set is still required. */
2443 static bool
2444 can_change_dest_mode (rtx x, int added_sets, machine_mode mode)
2446 unsigned int regno;
2448 if (!REG_P (x))
2449 return false;
2451 regno = REGNO (x);
2452 /* Allow hard registers if the new mode is legal, and occupies no more
2453 registers than the old mode. */
2454 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2455 return (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode)
2456 && REG_NREGS (x) >= hard_regno_nregs[regno][mode]);
2458 /* Or a pseudo that is only used once. */
2459 return (regno < reg_n_sets_max
2460 && REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1
2461 && !added_sets
2462 && !REG_USERVAR_P (x));
2466 /* Check whether X, the destination of a set, refers to part of
2467 the register specified by REG. */
2469 static bool
2470 reg_subword_p (rtx x, rtx reg)
2472 /* Check that reg is an integer mode register. */
2473 if (!REG_P (reg) || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (reg)) != MODE_INT)
2474 return false;
2476 if (GET_CODE (x) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2477 || GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2478 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2480 return GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
2481 && SUBREG_REG (x) == reg
2482 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT;
2485 /* Delete the unconditional jump INSN and adjust the CFG correspondingly.
2486 Note that the INSN should be deleted *after* removing dead edges, so
2487 that the kept edge is the fallthrough edge for a (set (pc) (pc))
2488 but not for a (set (pc) (label_ref FOO)). */
2490 static void
2491 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (rtx_insn *insn)
2493 basic_block bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
2494 gcc_assert (BB_END (bb) == insn);
2496 purge_dead_edges (bb);
2498 delete_insn (insn);
2499 if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 1)
2501 rtx_insn *insn;
2503 single_succ_edge (bb)->flags |= EDGE_FALLTHRU;
2505 /* Remove barriers from the footer if there are any. */
2506 for (insn = BB_FOOTER (bb); insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
2507 if (BARRIER_P (insn))
2509 if (PREV_INSN (insn))
2510 SET_NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) = NEXT_INSN (insn);
2511 else
2512 BB_FOOTER (bb) = NEXT_INSN (insn);
2513 if (NEXT_INSN (insn))
2514 SET_PREV_INSN (NEXT_INSN (insn)) = PREV_INSN (insn);
2516 else if (LABEL_P (insn))
2517 break;
2521 /* Return whether PAT is a PARALLEL of exactly N register SETs followed
2522 by an arbitrary number of CLOBBERs. */
2523 static bool
2524 is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx pat, int n)
2526 if (GET_CODE (pat) != PARALLEL)
2527 return false;
2529 int len = XVECLEN (pat, 0);
2530 if (len < n)
2531 return false;
2533 int i;
2534 for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
2535 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != SET
2536 || !REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
2537 return false;
2538 for ( ; i < len; i++)
2539 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER
2540 || XEXP (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i), 0) == const0_rtx)
2541 return false;
2543 return true;
2546 /* Return whether INSN, a PARALLEL of N register SETs (and maybe some
2547 CLOBBERs), can be split into individual SETs in that order, without
2548 changing semantics. */
2549 static bool
2550 can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx_insn *insn, int n)
2552 if (!insn_nothrow_p (insn))
2553 return false;
2555 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
2557 int i, j;
2558 for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
2560 if (side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
2561 return false;
2563 rtx reg = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i));
2565 for (j = i + 1; j < n; j++)
2566 if (reg_referenced_p (reg, XVECEXP (pat, 0, j)))
2567 return false;
2570 return true;
2573 /* Try to combine the insns I0, I1 and I2 into I3.
2574 Here I0, I1 and I2 appear earlier than I3.
2575 I0 and I1 can be zero; then we combine just I2 into I3, or I1 and I2 into
2578 If we are combining more than two insns and the resulting insn is not
2579 recognized, try splitting it into two insns. If that happens, I2 and I3
2580 are retained and I1/I0 are pseudo-deleted by turning them into a NOTE.
2581 Otherwise, I0, I1 and I2 are pseudo-deleted.
2583 Return 0 if the combination does not work. Then nothing is changed.
2584 If we did the combination, return the insn at which combine should
2585 resume scanning.
2587 Set NEW_DIRECT_JUMP_P to a nonzero value if try_combine creates a
2588 new direct jump instruction.
2590 LAST_COMBINED_INSN is either I3, or some insn after I3 that has
2591 been I3 passed to an earlier try_combine within the same basic
2592 block. */
2594 static rtx_insn *
2595 try_combine (rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *i2, rtx_insn *i1, rtx_insn *i0,
2596 int *new_direct_jump_p, rtx_insn *last_combined_insn)
2598 /* New patterns for I3 and I2, respectively. */
2599 rtx newpat, newi2pat = 0;
2600 rtvec newpat_vec_with_clobbers = 0;
2601 int substed_i2 = 0, substed_i1 = 0, substed_i0 = 0;
2602 /* Indicates need to preserve SET in I0, I1 or I2 in I3 if it is not
2603 dead. */
2604 int added_sets_0, added_sets_1, added_sets_2;
2605 /* Total number of SETs to put into I3. */
2606 int total_sets;
2607 /* Nonzero if I2's or I1's body now appears in I3. */
2608 int i2_is_used = 0, i1_is_used = 0;
2609 /* INSN_CODEs for new I3, new I2, and user of condition code. */
2610 int insn_code_number, i2_code_number = 0, other_code_number = 0;
2611 /* Contains I3 if the destination of I3 is used in its source, which means
2612 that the old life of I3 is being killed. If that usage is placed into
2613 I2 and not in I3, a REG_DEAD note must be made. */
2614 rtx i3dest_killed = 0;
2615 /* SET_DEST and SET_SRC of I2, I1 and I0. */
2616 rtx i2dest = 0, i2src = 0, i1dest = 0, i1src = 0, i0dest = 0, i0src = 0;
2617 /* Copy of SET_SRC of I1 and I0, if needed. */
2618 rtx i1src_copy = 0, i0src_copy = 0, i0src_copy2 = 0;
2619 /* Set if I2DEST was reused as a scratch register. */
2620 bool i2scratch = false;
2621 /* The PATTERNs of I0, I1, and I2, or a copy of them in certain cases. */
2622 rtx i0pat = 0, i1pat = 0, i2pat = 0;
2623 /* Indicates if I2DEST or I1DEST is in I2SRC or I1_SRC. */
2624 int i2dest_in_i2src = 0, i1dest_in_i1src = 0, i2dest_in_i1src = 0;
2625 int i0dest_in_i0src = 0, i1dest_in_i0src = 0, i2dest_in_i0src = 0;
2626 int i2dest_killed = 0, i1dest_killed = 0, i0dest_killed = 0;
2627 int i1_feeds_i2_n = 0, i0_feeds_i2_n = 0, i0_feeds_i1_n = 0;
2628 /* Notes that must be added to REG_NOTES in I3 and I2. */
2629 rtx new_i3_notes, new_i2_notes;
2630 /* Notes that we substituted I3 into I2 instead of the normal case. */
2631 int i3_subst_into_i2 = 0;
2632 /* Notes that I1, I2 or I3 is a MULT operation. */
2633 int have_mult = 0;
2634 int swap_i2i3 = 0;
2635 int changed_i3_dest = 0;
2637 int maxreg;
2638 rtx_insn *temp_insn;
2639 rtx temp_expr;
2640 struct insn_link *link;
2641 rtx other_pat = 0;
2642 rtx new_other_notes;
2643 int i;
2645 /* Immediately return if any of I0,I1,I2 are the same insn (I3 can
2646 never be). */
2647 if (i1 == i2 || i0 == i2 || (i0 && i0 == i1))
2648 return 0;
2650 /* Only try four-insn combinations when there's high likelihood of
2651 success. Look for simple insns, such as loads of constants or
2652 binary operations involving a constant. */
2653 if (i0)
2655 int i;
2656 int ngood = 0;
2657 int nshift = 0;
2658 rtx set0, set3;
2660 if (!flag_expensive_optimizations)
2661 return 0;
2663 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
2665 rtx_insn *insn = i == 0 ? i0 : i == 1 ? i1 : i == 2 ? i2 : i3;
2666 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2667 rtx src;
2668 if (!set)
2669 continue;
2670 src = SET_SRC (set);
2671 if (CONSTANT_P (src))
2673 ngood += 2;
2674 break;
2676 else if (BINARY_P (src) && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (src, 1)))
2677 ngood++;
2678 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT || GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFTRT
2679 || GET_CODE (src) == LSHIFTRT)
2680 nshift++;
2683 /* If I0 loads a memory and I3 sets the same memory, then I1 and I2
2684 are likely manipulating its value. Ideally we'll be able to combine
2685 all four insns into a bitfield insertion of some kind.
2687 Note the source in I0 might be inside a sign/zero extension and the
2688 memory modes in I0 and I3 might be different. So extract the address
2689 from the destination of I3 and search for it in the source of I0.
2691 In the event that there's a match but the source/dest do not actually
2692 refer to the same memory, the worst that happens is we try some
2693 combinations that we wouldn't have otherwise. */
2694 if ((set0 = single_set (i0))
2695 /* Ensure the source of SET0 is a MEM, possibly buried inside
2696 an extension. */
2697 && (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == MEM
2698 || ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
2699 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
2700 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set0), 0)) == MEM))
2701 && (set3 = single_set (i3))
2702 /* Ensure the destination of SET3 is a MEM. */
2703 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set3)) == MEM
2704 /* Would it be better to extract the base address for the MEM
2705 in SET3 and look for that? I don't have cases where it matters
2706 but I could envision such cases. */
2707 && rtx_referenced_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (set3), 0), SET_SRC (set0)))
2708 ngood += 2;
2710 if (ngood < 2 && nshift < 2)
2711 return 0;
2714 /* Exit early if one of the insns involved can't be used for
2715 combinations. */
2716 if (CALL_P (i2)
2717 || (i1 && CALL_P (i1))
2718 || (i0 && CALL_P (i0))
2719 || cant_combine_insn_p (i3)
2720 || cant_combine_insn_p (i2)
2721 || (i1 && cant_combine_insn_p (i1))
2722 || (i0 && cant_combine_insn_p (i0))
2723 || likely_spilled_retval_p (i3))
2724 return 0;
2726 combine_attempts++;
2727 undobuf.other_insn = 0;
2729 /* Reset the hard register usage information. */
2730 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs);
2732 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
2734 if (i0)
2735 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d, %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2736 INSN_UID (i0), INSN_UID (i1), INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2737 else if (i1)
2738 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2739 INSN_UID (i1), INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2740 else
2741 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d -> %d:\n",
2742 INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2745 /* If multiple insns feed into one of I2 or I3, they can be in any
2746 order. To simplify the code below, reorder them in sequence. */
2747 if (i0 && DF_INSN_LUID (i0) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
2748 std::swap (i0, i2);
2749 if (i0 && DF_INSN_LUID (i0) > DF_INSN_LUID (i1))
2750 std::swap (i0, i1);
2751 if (i1 && DF_INSN_LUID (i1) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
2752 std::swap (i1, i2);
2754 added_links_insn = 0;
2756 /* First check for one important special case that the code below will
2757 not handle. Namely, the case where I1 is zero, I2 is a PARALLEL
2758 and I3 is a SET whose SET_SRC is a SET_DEST in I2. In that case,
2759 we may be able to replace that destination with the destination of I3.
2760 This occurs in the common code where we compute both a quotient and
2761 remainder into a structure, in which case we want to do the computation
2762 directly into the structure to avoid register-register copies.
2764 Note that this case handles both multiple sets in I2 and also cases
2765 where I2 has a number of CLOBBERs inside the PARALLEL.
2767 We make very conservative checks below and only try to handle the
2768 most common cases of this. For example, we only handle the case
2769 where I2 and I3 are adjacent to avoid making difficult register
2770 usage tests. */
2772 if (i1 == 0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (i3) && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
2773 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2774 && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2775 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2776 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL
2777 && ! side_effects_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
2778 /* If the dest of I3 is a ZERO_EXTRACT or STRICT_LOW_PART, the code
2779 below would need to check what is inside (and reg_overlap_mentioned_p
2780 doesn't support those codes anyway). Don't allow those destinations;
2781 the resulting insn isn't likely to be recognized anyway. */
2782 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
2783 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
2784 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)),
2785 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
2786 && next_active_insn (i2) == i3)
2788 rtx p2 = PATTERN (i2);
2790 /* Make sure that the destination of I3,
2791 which we are going to substitute into one output of I2,
2792 is not used within another output of I2. We must avoid making this:
2793 (parallel [(set (mem (reg 69)) ...)
2794 (set (reg 69) ...)])
2795 which is not well-defined as to order of actions.
2796 (Besides, reload can't handle output reloads for this.)
2798 The problem can also happen if the dest of I3 is a memory ref,
2799 if another dest in I2 is an indirect memory ref.
2801 Neither can this PARALLEL be an asm. We do not allow combining
2802 that usually (see can_combine_p), so do not here either. */
2803 bool ok = true;
2804 for (i = 0; ok && i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2806 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2807 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
2808 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)),
2809 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i))))
2810 ok = false;
2811 else if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2812 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i))) == ASM_OPERANDS)
2813 ok = false;
2816 if (ok)
2817 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2818 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2819 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2821 combine_merges++;
2823 subst_insn = i3;
2824 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
2826 added_sets_2 = added_sets_1 = added_sets_0 = 0;
2827 i2src = SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i));
2828 i2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i));
2829 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2831 /* Replace the dest in I2 with our dest and make the resulting
2832 insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we validate
2833 the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2834 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)), SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)));
2835 newpat = p2;
2836 i3_subst_into_i2 = 1;
2837 goto validate_replacement;
2841 /* If I2 is setting a pseudo to a constant and I3 is setting some
2842 sub-part of it to another constant, merge them by making a new
2843 constant. */
2844 if (i1 == 0
2845 && (temp_expr = single_set (i2)) != 0
2846 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (temp_expr))
2847 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
2848 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2849 && reg_subword_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), SET_DEST (temp_expr)))
2851 rtx dest = SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3));
2852 int offset = -1;
2853 int width = 0;
2855 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2857 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 1))
2858 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 2)))
2860 width = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 1));
2861 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 2));
2862 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
2863 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
2864 offset = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) - width - offset;
2867 else
2869 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
2870 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
2871 width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest));
2872 offset = 0;
2875 if (offset >= 0)
2877 /* If this is the low part, we're done. */
2878 if (subreg_lowpart_p (dest))
2880 /* Handle the case where inner is twice the size of outer. */
2881 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr)))
2882 == 2 * GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)))
2883 offset += GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest));
2884 /* Otherwise give up for now. */
2885 else
2886 offset = -1;
2889 if (offset >= 0)
2891 rtx inner = SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3));
2892 rtx outer = SET_SRC (temp_expr);
2894 wide_int o
2895 = wi::insert (rtx_mode_t (outer, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr))),
2896 rtx_mode_t (inner, GET_MODE (dest)),
2897 offset, width);
2899 combine_merges++;
2900 subst_insn = i3;
2901 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
2902 added_sets_2 = added_sets_1 = added_sets_0 = 0;
2903 i2dest = SET_DEST (temp_expr);
2904 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2906 /* Replace the source in I2 with the new constant and make the
2907 resulting insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we
2908 validate the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2909 SUBST (SET_SRC (temp_expr),
2910 immed_wide_int_const (o, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr))));
2912 newpat = PATTERN (i2);
2914 /* The dest of I3 has been replaced with the dest of I2. */
2915 changed_i3_dest = 1;
2916 goto validate_replacement;
2920 /* If we have no I1 and I2 looks like:
2921 (parallel [(set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC OP (const_int 0)))
2922 (set Y OP)])
2923 make up a dummy I1 that is
2924 (set Y OP)
2925 and change I2 to be
2926 (set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC Y (const_int 0)))
2928 (We can ignore any trailing CLOBBERs.)
2930 This undoes a previous combination and allows us to match a branch-and-
2931 decrement insn. */
2933 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i1 == 0
2934 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2), 2)
2935 && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))))
2936 == MODE_CC)
2937 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))) == COMPARE
2938 && XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 1) == const0_rtx
2939 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 0),
2940 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)))
2941 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), i2, i3)
2942 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)), i2, i3))
2944 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2945 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2946 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2947 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2949 i1 = gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode, NULL, i2, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2),
2950 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1), INSN_LOCATION (i2),
2951 -1, NULL_RTX);
2952 INSN_UID (i1) = INSN_UID (i2);
2954 SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0));
2955 SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i2)), 0),
2956 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1)));
2957 unsigned int regno = REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1)));
2958 SUBST_LINK (LOG_LINKS (i2),
2959 alloc_insn_link (i1, regno, LOG_LINKS (i2)));
2962 /* If I2 is a PARALLEL of two SETs of REGs (and perhaps some CLOBBERs),
2963 make those two SETs separate I1 and I2 insns, and make an I0 that is
2964 the original I1. */
2965 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i0 == 0
2966 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2), 2)
2967 && can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (i2, 2)
2968 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), i2, i3)
2969 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)), i2, i3))
2971 /* If there is no I1, there is no I0 either. */
2972 i0 = i1;
2974 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2975 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2976 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2977 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2979 i1 = gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode, NULL, i2, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2),
2980 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0), INSN_LOCATION (i2),
2981 -1, NULL_RTX);
2982 INSN_UID (i1) = INSN_UID (i2);
2984 SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1));
2987 /* Verify that I2 and I1 are valid for combining. */
2988 if (! can_combine_p (i2, i3, i0, i1, NULL, NULL, &i2dest, &i2src)
2989 || (i1 && ! can_combine_p (i1, i3, i0, NULL, i2, NULL,
2990 &i1dest, &i1src))
2991 || (i0 && ! can_combine_p (i0, i3, NULL, NULL, i1, i2,
2992 &i0dest, &i0src)))
2994 undo_all ();
2995 return 0;
2998 /* Record whether I2DEST is used in I2SRC and similarly for the other
2999 cases. Knowing this will help in register status updating below. */
3000 i2dest_in_i2src = reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i2src);
3001 i1dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i1src);
3002 i2dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i1src);
3003 i0dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, i0src);
3004 i1dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i0src);
3005 i2dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i0src);
3006 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
3007 i1dest_killed = i1 && dead_or_set_p (i1, i1dest);
3008 i0dest_killed = i0 && dead_or_set_p (i0, i0dest);
3010 /* For the earlier insns, determine which of the subsequent ones they
3011 feed. */
3012 i1_feeds_i2_n = i1 && insn_a_feeds_b (i1, i2);
3013 i0_feeds_i1_n = i0 && insn_a_feeds_b (i0, i1);
3014 i0_feeds_i2_n = (i0 && (!i0_feeds_i1_n ? insn_a_feeds_b (i0, i2)
3015 : (!reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i0dest)
3016 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, i2src))));
3018 /* Ensure that I3's pattern can be the destination of combines. */
3019 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i1dest, i0dest,
3020 i1 && i2dest_in_i1src && !i1_feeds_i2_n,
3021 i0 && ((i2dest_in_i0src && !i0_feeds_i2_n)
3022 || (i1dest_in_i0src && !i0_feeds_i1_n)),
3023 &i3dest_killed))
3025 undo_all ();
3026 return 0;
3029 /* See if any of the insns is a MULT operation. Unless one is, we will
3030 reject a combination that is, since it must be slower. Be conservative
3031 here. */
3032 if (GET_CODE (i2src) == MULT
3033 || (i1 != 0 && GET_CODE (i1src) == MULT)
3034 || (i0 != 0 && GET_CODE (i0src) == MULT)
3035 || (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3036 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == MULT))
3037 have_mult = 1;
3039 /* If I3 has an inc, then give up if I1 or I2 uses the reg that is inc'd.
3040 We used to do this EXCEPT in one case: I3 has a post-inc in an
3041 output operand. However, that exception can give rise to insns like
3042 mov r3,(r3)+
3043 which is a famous insn on the PDP-11 where the value of r3 used as the
3044 source was model-dependent. Avoid this sort of thing. */
3046 #if 0
3047 if (!(GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3048 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
3049 && MEM_P (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
3050 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_INC
3051 || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_DEC)))
3052 /* It's not the exception. */
3053 #endif
3054 if (AUTO_INC_DEC)
3056 rtx link;
3057 for (link = REG_NOTES (i3); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
3058 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
3059 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i2))
3060 || (i1 != 0
3061 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i1)))))
3063 undo_all ();
3064 return 0;
3068 /* See if the SETs in I1 or I2 need to be kept around in the merged
3069 instruction: whenever the value set there is still needed past I3.
3070 For the SET in I2, this is easy: we see if I2DEST dies or is set in I3.
3072 For the SET in I1, we have two cases: if I1 and I2 independently feed
3073 into I3, the set in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies
3074 or is set in I3. Otherwise (if I1 feeds I2 which feeds I3), the set
3075 in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies or is set in either
3076 I2 or I3. The same considerations apply to I0. */
3078 added_sets_2 = !dead_or_set_p (i3, i2dest);
3080 if (i1)
3081 added_sets_1 = !(dead_or_set_p (i3, i1dest)
3082 || (i1_feeds_i2_n && dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest)));
3083 else
3084 added_sets_1 = 0;
3086 if (i0)
3087 added_sets_0 = !(dead_or_set_p (i3, i0dest)
3088 || (i0_feeds_i1_n && dead_or_set_p (i1, i0dest))
3089 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n || (i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n))
3090 && dead_or_set_p (i2, i0dest)));
3091 else
3092 added_sets_0 = 0;
3094 /* We are about to copy insns for the case where they need to be kept
3095 around. Check that they can be copied in the merged instruction. */
3097 if (targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p
3098 && ((added_sets_2 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i2))
3099 || (i1 && added_sets_1 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i1))
3100 || (i0 && added_sets_0 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i0))))
3102 undo_all ();
3103 return 0;
3106 /* If the set in I2 needs to be kept around, we must make a copy of
3107 PATTERN (I2), so that when we substitute I1SRC for I1DEST in
3108 PATTERN (I2), we are only substituting for the original I1DEST, not into
3109 an already-substituted copy. This also prevents making self-referential
3110 rtx. If I2 is a PARALLEL, we just need the piece that assigns I2SRC to
3111 I2DEST. */
3113 if (added_sets_2)
3115 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL)
3116 i2pat = gen_rtx_SET (i2dest, copy_rtx (i2src));
3117 else
3118 i2pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i2));
3121 if (added_sets_1)
3123 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i1)) == PARALLEL)
3124 i1pat = gen_rtx_SET (i1dest, copy_rtx (i1src));
3125 else
3126 i1pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i1));
3129 if (added_sets_0)
3131 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i0)) == PARALLEL)
3132 i0pat = gen_rtx_SET (i0dest, copy_rtx (i0src));
3133 else
3134 i0pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i0));
3137 combine_merges++;
3139 /* Substitute in the latest insn for the regs set by the earlier ones. */
3141 maxreg = max_reg_num ();
3143 subst_insn = i3;
3145 /* Many machines that don't use CC0 have insns that can both perform an
3146 arithmetic operation and set the condition code. These operations will
3147 be represented as a PARALLEL with the first element of the vector
3148 being a COMPARE of an arithmetic operation with the constant zero.
3149 The second element of the vector will set some pseudo to the result
3150 of the same arithmetic operation. If we simplify the COMPARE, we won't
3151 match such a pattern and so will generate an extra insn. Here we test
3152 for this case, where both the comparison and the operation result are
3153 needed, and make the PARALLEL by just replacing I2DEST in I3SRC with
3154 I2SRC. Later we will make the PARALLEL that contains I2. */
3156 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i1 == 0 && added_sets_2 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3157 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == COMPARE
3158 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1))
3159 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 0), i2dest))
3161 rtx newpat_dest;
3162 rtx *cc_use_loc = NULL;
3163 rtx_insn *cc_use_insn = NULL;
3164 rtx op0 = i2src, op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1);
3165 machine_mode compare_mode, orig_compare_mode;
3166 enum rtx_code compare_code = UNKNOWN, orig_compare_code = UNKNOWN;
3168 newpat = PATTERN (i3);
3169 newpat_dest = SET_DEST (newpat);
3170 compare_mode = orig_compare_mode = GET_MODE (newpat_dest);
3172 if (undobuf.other_insn == 0
3173 && (cc_use_loc = find_single_use (SET_DEST (newpat), i3,
3174 &cc_use_insn)))
3176 compare_code = orig_compare_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use_loc);
3177 compare_code = simplify_compare_const (compare_code,
3178 GET_MODE (i2dest), op0, &op1);
3179 target_canonicalize_comparison (&compare_code, &op0, &op1, 1);
3182 /* Do the rest only if op1 is const0_rtx, which may be the
3183 result of simplification. */
3184 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3186 /* If a single use of the CC is found, prepare to modify it
3187 when SELECT_CC_MODE returns a new CC-class mode, or when
3188 the above simplify_compare_const() returned a new comparison
3189 operator. undobuf.other_insn is assigned the CC use insn
3190 when modifying it. */
3191 if (cc_use_loc)
3193 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
3194 machine_mode new_mode
3195 = SELECT_CC_MODE (compare_code, op0, op1);
3196 if (new_mode != orig_compare_mode
3197 && can_change_dest_mode (SET_DEST (newpat),
3198 added_sets_2, new_mode))
3200 unsigned int regno = REGNO (newpat_dest);
3201 compare_mode = new_mode;
3202 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3203 newpat_dest = gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode, regno);
3204 else
3206 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[regno], compare_mode);
3207 newpat_dest = regno_reg_rtx[regno];
3210 #endif
3211 /* Cases for modifying the CC-using comparison. */
3212 if (compare_code != orig_compare_code
3213 /* ??? Do we need to verify the zero rtx? */
3214 && XEXP (*cc_use_loc, 1) == const0_rtx)
3216 /* Replace cc_use_loc with entire new RTX. */
3217 SUBST (*cc_use_loc,
3218 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, compare_mode,
3219 newpat_dest, const0_rtx));
3220 undobuf.other_insn = cc_use_insn;
3222 else if (compare_mode != orig_compare_mode)
3224 /* Just replace the CC reg with a new mode. */
3225 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use_loc, 0), newpat_dest);
3226 undobuf.other_insn = cc_use_insn;
3230 /* Now we modify the current newpat:
3231 First, SET_DEST(newpat) is updated if the CC mode has been
3232 altered. For targets without SELECT_CC_MODE, this should be
3233 optimized away. */
3234 if (compare_mode != orig_compare_mode)
3235 SUBST (SET_DEST (newpat), newpat_dest);
3236 /* This is always done to propagate i2src into newpat. */
3237 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat),
3238 gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
3239 /* Create new version of i2pat if needed; the below PARALLEL
3240 creation needs this to work correctly. */
3241 if (! rtx_equal_p (i2src, op0))
3242 i2pat = gen_rtx_SET (i2dest, op0);
3243 i2_is_used = 1;
3247 if (i2_is_used == 0)
3249 /* It is possible that the source of I2 or I1 may be performing
3250 an unneeded operation, such as a ZERO_EXTEND of something
3251 that is known to have the high part zero. Handle that case
3252 by letting subst look at the inner insns.
3254 Another way to do this would be to have a function that tries
3255 to simplify a single insn instead of merging two or more
3256 insns. We don't do this because of the potential of infinite
3257 loops and because of the potential extra memory required.
3258 However, doing it the way we are is a bit of a kludge and
3259 doesn't catch all cases.
3261 But only do this if -fexpensive-optimizations since it slows
3262 things down and doesn't usually win.
3264 This is not done in the COMPARE case above because the
3265 unmodified I2PAT is used in the PARALLEL and so a pattern
3266 with a modified I2SRC would not match. */
3268 if (flag_expensive_optimizations)
3270 /* Pass pc_rtx so no substitutions are done, just
3271 simplifications. */
3272 if (i1)
3274 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
3275 i1src = subst (i1src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
3278 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
3279 i2src = subst (i2src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
3282 n_occurrences = 0; /* `subst' counts here */
3283 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
3285 /* If I1 feeds into I2 and I1DEST is in I1SRC, we need to make a unique
3286 copy of I2SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3287 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I1SRC for I1DEST
3288 later. Likewise if I0 feeds into I2, either directly or indirectly
3289 through I1, and I0DEST is in I0SRC. */
3290 newpat = subst (PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i2src, 0, 0,
3291 (i1_feeds_i2_n && i1dest_in_i1src)
3292 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n || (i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n))
3293 && i0dest_in_i0src));
3294 substed_i2 = 1;
3296 /* Record whether I2's body now appears within I3's body. */
3297 i2_is_used = n_occurrences;
3300 /* If we already got a failure, don't try to do more. Otherwise, try to
3301 substitute I1 if we have it. */
3303 if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER)
3305 /* Check that an autoincrement side-effect on I1 has not been lost.
3306 This happens if I1DEST is mentioned in I2 and dies there, and
3307 has disappeared from the new pattern. */
3308 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0
3309 && i1_feeds_i2_n
3310 && dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest)
3311 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, newpat))
3312 /* Before we can do this substitution, we must redo the test done
3313 above (see detailed comments there) that ensures I1DEST isn't
3314 mentioned in any SETs in NEWPAT that are field assignments. */
3315 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL, &newpat, i1dest, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
3316 0, 0, 0))
3318 undo_all ();
3319 return 0;
3322 n_occurrences = 0;
3323 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
3325 /* If the following substitution will modify I1SRC, make a copy of it
3326 for the case where it is substituted for I1DEST in I2PAT later. */
3327 if (added_sets_2 && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3328 i1src_copy = copy_rtx (i1src);
3330 /* If I0 feeds into I1 and I0DEST is in I0SRC, we need to make a unique
3331 copy of I1SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3332 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I0SRC for I0DEST
3333 later. */
3334 newpat = subst (newpat, i1dest, i1src, 0, 0,
3335 i0_feeds_i1_n && i0dest_in_i0src);
3336 substed_i1 = 1;
3338 /* Record whether I1's body now appears within I3's body. */
3339 i1_is_used = n_occurrences;
3342 /* Likewise for I0 if we have it. */
3344 if (i0 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER)
3346 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0, NULL_RTX) != 0
3347 && ((i0_feeds_i2_n && dead_or_set_p (i2, i0dest))
3348 || (i0_feeds_i1_n && dead_or_set_p (i1, i0dest)))
3349 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, newpat))
3350 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL, &newpat, i0dest, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
3351 0, 0, 0))
3353 undo_all ();
3354 return 0;
3357 /* If the following substitution will modify I0SRC, make a copy of it
3358 for the case where it is substituted for I0DEST in I1PAT later. */
3359 if (added_sets_1 && i0_feeds_i1_n)
3360 i0src_copy = copy_rtx (i0src);
3361 /* And a copy for I0DEST in I2PAT substitution. */
3362 if (added_sets_2 && ((i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3363 || (i0_feeds_i2_n)))
3364 i0src_copy2 = copy_rtx (i0src);
3366 n_occurrences = 0;
3367 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i0);
3368 newpat = subst (newpat, i0dest, i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3369 substed_i0 = 1;
3372 /* Fail if an autoincrement side-effect has been duplicated. Be careful
3373 to count all the ways that I2SRC and I1SRC can be used. */
3374 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i2, NULL_RTX) != 0
3375 && i2_is_used + added_sets_2 > 1)
3376 || (i1 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0
3377 && (i1_is_used + added_sets_1 + (added_sets_2 && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3378 > 1))
3379 || (i0 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0, NULL_RTX) != 0
3380 && (n_occurrences + added_sets_0
3381 + (added_sets_1 && i0_feeds_i1_n)
3382 + (added_sets_2 && i0_feeds_i2_n)
3383 > 1))
3384 /* Fail if we tried to make a new register. */
3385 || max_reg_num () != maxreg
3386 /* Fail if we couldn't do something and have a CLOBBER. */
3387 || GET_CODE (newpat) == CLOBBER
3388 /* Fail if this new pattern is a MULT and we didn't have one before
3389 at the outer level. */
3390 || (GET_CODE (newpat) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (newpat)) == MULT
3391 && ! have_mult))
3393 undo_all ();
3394 return 0;
3397 /* If the actions of the earlier insns must be kept
3398 in addition to substituting them into the latest one,
3399 we must make a new PARALLEL for the latest insn
3400 to hold additional the SETs. */
3402 if (added_sets_0 || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2)
3404 int extra_sets = added_sets_0 + added_sets_1 + added_sets_2;
3405 combine_extras++;
3407 if (GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL)
3409 rtvec old = XVEC (newpat, 0);
3410 total_sets = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) + extra_sets;
3411 newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets));
3412 memcpy (XVEC (newpat, 0)->elem, &old->elem[0],
3413 sizeof (old->elem[0]) * old->num_elem);
3415 else
3417 rtx old = newpat;
3418 total_sets = 1 + extra_sets;
3419 newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets));
3420 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = old;
3423 if (added_sets_0)
3424 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = i0pat;
3426 if (added_sets_1)
3428 rtx t = i1pat;
3429 if (i0_feeds_i1_n)
3430 t = subst (t, i0dest, i0src_copy ? i0src_copy : i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3432 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = t;
3434 if (added_sets_2)
3436 rtx t = i2pat;
3437 if (i1_feeds_i2_n)
3438 t = subst (t, i1dest, i1src_copy ? i1src_copy : i1src, 0, 0,
3439 i0_feeds_i1_n && i0dest_in_i0src);
3440 if ((i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n) || i0_feeds_i2_n)
3441 t = subst (t, i0dest, i0src_copy2 ? i0src_copy2 : i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3443 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = t;
3447 validate_replacement:
3449 /* Note which hard regs this insn has as inputs. */
3450 mark_used_regs_combine (newpat);
3452 /* If recog_for_combine fails, it strips existing clobbers. If we'll
3453 consider splitting this pattern, we might need these clobbers. */
3454 if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3455 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - 1)) == CLOBBER)
3457 int len = XVECLEN (newpat, 0);
3459 newpat_vec_with_clobbers = rtvec_alloc (len);
3460 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
3461 RTVEC_ELT (newpat_vec_with_clobbers, i) = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i);
3464 /* We have recognized nothing yet. */
3465 insn_code_number = -1;
3467 /* See if this is a PARALLEL of two SETs where one SET's destination is
3468 a register that is unused and this isn't marked as an instruction that
3469 might trap in an EH region. In that case, we just need the other SET.
3470 We prefer this over the PARALLEL.
3472 This can occur when simplifying a divmod insn. We *must* test for this
3473 case here because the code below that splits two independent SETs doesn't
3474 handle this case correctly when it updates the register status.
3476 It's pointless doing this if we originally had two sets, one from
3477 i3, and one from i2. Combining then splitting the parallel results
3478 in the original i2 again plus an invalid insn (which we delete).
3479 The net effect is only to move instructions around, which makes
3480 debug info less accurate. */
3482 if (!(added_sets_2 && i1 == 0)
3483 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (newpat, 2)
3484 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0)
3486 rtx set0 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3487 rtx set1 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3488 rtx oldpat = newpat;
3490 if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set1))
3491 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set1)))
3492 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1)) == SUBREG
3493 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1)))))
3494 && insn_nothrow_p (i3)
3495 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set1)))
3497 newpat = set0;
3498 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3501 else if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set0))
3502 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set0)))
3503 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0)) == SUBREG
3504 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED,
3505 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0)))))
3506 && insn_nothrow_p (i3)
3507 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set0)))
3509 newpat = set1;
3510 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3512 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3513 changed_i3_dest = 1;
3516 if (insn_code_number < 0)
3517 newpat = oldpat;
3520 /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */
3521 if (insn_code_number < 0)
3522 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3524 /* If we were combining three insns and the result is a simple SET
3525 with no ASM_OPERANDS that wasn't recognized, try to split it into two
3526 insns. There are two ways to do this. It can be split using a
3527 machine-specific method (like when you have an addition of a large
3528 constant) or by combine in the function find_split_point. */
3530 if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET
3531 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0)
3533 rtx parallel, *split;
3534 rtx_insn *m_split_insn;
3536 /* See if the MD file can split NEWPAT. If it can't, see if letting it
3537 use I2DEST as a scratch register will help. In the latter case,
3538 convert I2DEST to the mode of the source of NEWPAT if we can. */
3540 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (newpat, i3);
3542 /* We can only use I2DEST as a scratch reg if it doesn't overlap any
3543 inputs of NEWPAT. */
3545 /* ??? If I2DEST is not safe, and I1DEST exists, then it would be
3546 possible to try that as a scratch reg. This would require adding
3547 more code to make it work though. */
3549 if (m_split_insn == 0 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, newpat))
3551 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat));
3553 /* ??? Reusing i2dest without resetting the reg_stat entry for it
3554 (temporarily, until we are committed to this instruction
3555 combination) does not work: for example, any call to nonzero_bits
3556 on the register (from a splitter in the MD file, for example)
3557 will get the old information, which is invalid.
3559 Since nowadays we can create registers during combine just fine,
3560 we should just create a new one here, not reuse i2dest. */
3562 /* First try to split using the original register as a
3563 scratch register. */
3564 parallel = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
3565 gen_rtvec (2, newpat,
3566 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode,
3567 i2dest)));
3568 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3570 /* If that didn't work, try changing the mode of I2DEST if
3571 we can. */
3572 if (m_split_insn == 0
3573 && new_mode != GET_MODE (i2dest)
3574 && new_mode != VOIDmode
3575 && can_change_dest_mode (i2dest, added_sets_2, new_mode))
3577 machine_mode old_mode = GET_MODE (i2dest);
3578 rtx ni2dest;
3580 if (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3581 ni2dest = gen_rtx_REG (new_mode, REGNO (i2dest));
3582 else
3584 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], new_mode);
3585 ni2dest = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)];
3588 parallel = (gen_rtx_PARALLEL
3589 (VOIDmode,
3590 gen_rtvec (2, newpat,
3591 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode,
3592 ni2dest))));
3593 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3595 if (m_split_insn == 0
3596 && REGNO (i2dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3598 struct undo *buf;
3600 adjust_reg_mode (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], old_mode);
3601 buf = undobuf.undos;
3602 undobuf.undos = buf->next;
3603 buf->next = undobuf.frees;
3604 undobuf.frees = buf;
3608 i2scratch = m_split_insn != 0;
3611 /* If recog_for_combine has discarded clobbers, try to use them
3612 again for the split. */
3613 if (m_split_insn == 0 && newpat_vec_with_clobbers)
3615 parallel = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, newpat_vec_with_clobbers);
3616 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3619 if (m_split_insn && NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn) == NULL_RTX)
3621 rtx m_split_pat = PATTERN (m_split_insn);
3622 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&m_split_pat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3623 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3624 newpat = m_split_pat;
3626 else if (m_split_insn && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn)) == NULL_RTX
3627 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3628 || ! use_crosses_set_p (PATTERN (m_split_insn), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))))
3630 rtx i2set, i3set;
3631 rtx newi3pat = PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn));
3632 newi2pat = PATTERN (m_split_insn);
3634 i3set = single_set (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn));
3635 i2set = single_set (m_split_insn);
3637 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3639 /* If I2 or I3 has multiple SETs, we won't know how to track
3640 register status, so don't use these insns. If I2's destination
3641 is used between I2 and I3, we also can't use these insns. */
3643 if (i2_code_number >= 0 && i2set && i3set
3644 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3645 || ! reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (i2set), i2, i3)))
3646 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi3pat, i3,
3647 &new_i3_notes);
3648 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3649 newpat = newi3pat;
3651 /* It is possible that both insns now set the destination of I3.
3652 If so, we must show an extra use of it. */
3654 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3656 rtx new_i3_dest = SET_DEST (i3set);
3657 rtx new_i2_dest = SET_DEST (i2set);
3659 while (GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3660 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3661 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == SUBREG)
3662 new_i3_dest = XEXP (new_i3_dest, 0);
3664 while (GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3665 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3666 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == SUBREG)
3667 new_i2_dest = XEXP (new_i2_dest, 0);
3669 if (REG_P (new_i3_dest)
3670 && REG_P (new_i2_dest)
3671 && REGNO (new_i3_dest) == REGNO (new_i2_dest)
3672 && REGNO (new_i2_dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
3673 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (new_i2_dest), 1);
3677 /* If we can split it and use I2DEST, go ahead and see if that
3678 helps things be recognized. Verify that none of the registers
3679 are set between I2 and I3. */
3680 if (insn_code_number < 0
3681 && (split = find_split_point (&newpat, i3, false)) != 0
3682 && (!HAVE_cc0 || REG_P (i2dest))
3683 /* We need I2DEST in the proper mode. If it is a hard register
3684 or the only use of a pseudo, we can change its mode.
3685 Make sure we don't change a hard register to have a mode that
3686 isn't valid for it, or change the number of registers. */
3687 && (GET_MODE (*split) == GET_MODE (i2dest)
3688 || GET_MODE (*split) == VOIDmode
3689 || can_change_dest_mode (i2dest, added_sets_2,
3690 GET_MODE (*split)))
3691 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3692 || ! use_crosses_set_p (*split, DF_INSN_LUID (i2)))
3693 /* We can't overwrite I2DEST if its value is still used by
3694 NEWPAT. */
3695 && ! reg_referenced_p (i2dest, newpat))
3697 rtx newdest = i2dest;
3698 enum rtx_code split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3699 machine_mode split_mode = GET_MODE (*split);
3700 bool subst_done = false;
3701 newi2pat = NULL_RTX;
3703 i2scratch = true;
3705 /* *SPLIT may be part of I2SRC, so make sure we have the
3706 original expression around for later debug processing.
3707 We should not need I2SRC any more in other cases. */
3708 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
3709 i2src = copy_rtx (i2src);
3710 else
3711 i2src = NULL;
3713 /* Get NEWDEST as a register in the proper mode. We have already
3714 validated that we can do this. */
3715 if (GET_MODE (i2dest) != split_mode && split_mode != VOIDmode)
3717 if (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3718 newdest = gen_rtx_REG (split_mode, REGNO (i2dest));
3719 else
3721 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], split_mode);
3722 newdest = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)];
3726 /* If *SPLIT is a (mult FOO (const_int pow2)), convert it to
3727 an ASHIFT. This can occur if it was inside a PLUS and hence
3728 appeared to be a memory address. This is a kludge. */
3729 if (split_code == MULT
3730 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*split, 1))
3731 && INTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)) > 0
3732 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)))) >= 0)
3734 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_ASHIFT (split_mode,
3735 XEXP (*split, 0), GEN_INT (i)));
3736 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3737 anymore. */
3738 split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3741 /* Similarly for (plus (mult FOO (const_int pow2))). */
3742 if (split_code == PLUS
3743 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*split, 0)) == MULT
3744 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (*split, 0), 1))
3745 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split, 0), 1)) > 0
3746 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split, 0), 1)))) >= 0)
3748 rtx nsplit = XEXP (*split, 0);
3749 SUBST (XEXP (*split, 0), gen_rtx_ASHIFT (GET_MODE (nsplit),
3750 XEXP (nsplit, 0), GEN_INT (i)));
3751 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3752 anymore. */
3753 split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3756 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
3757 /* If *SPLIT is a paradoxical SUBREG, when we split it, it should
3758 be written as a ZERO_EXTEND. */
3759 if (split_code == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (*split)))
3761 /* Or as a SIGN_EXTEND if LOAD_EXTEND_OP says that that's
3762 what it really is. */
3763 if (load_extend_op (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*split)))
3764 == SIGN_EXTEND)
3765 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (split_mode,
3766 SUBREG_REG (*split)));
3767 else
3768 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (split_mode,
3769 SUBREG_REG (*split)));
3771 #endif
3773 /* Attempt to split binary operators using arithmetic identities. */
3774 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (newpat))
3775 && split_mode == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat))
3776 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (newpat)))
3778 rtx setsrc = SET_SRC (newpat);
3779 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (setsrc);
3780 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (setsrc);
3781 rtx src_op0 = XEXP (setsrc, 0);
3782 rtx src_op1 = XEXP (setsrc, 1);
3784 /* Split "X = Y op Y" as "Z = Y; X = Z op Z". */
3785 if (rtx_equal_p (src_op0, src_op1))
3787 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, src_op0);
3788 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3789 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3790 subst_done = true;
3792 /* Split "((P op Q) op R) op S" where op is PLUS or MULT. */
3793 else if ((code == PLUS || code == MULT)
3794 && GET_CODE (src_op0) == code
3795 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_op0, 0)) == code
3796 && (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
3797 || (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode)
3798 && flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)))
3800 rtx p = XEXP (XEXP (src_op0, 0), 0);
3801 rtx q = XEXP (XEXP (src_op0, 0), 1);
3802 rtx r = XEXP (src_op0, 1);
3803 rtx s = src_op1;
3805 /* Split both "((X op Y) op X) op Y" and
3806 "((X op Y) op Y) op X" as "T op T" where T is
3807 "X op Y". */
3808 if ((rtx_equal_p (p,r) && rtx_equal_p (q,s))
3809 || (rtx_equal_p (p,s) && rtx_equal_p (q,r)))
3811 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, XEXP (src_op0, 0));
3812 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3813 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3814 subst_done = true;
3816 /* Split "((X op X) op Y) op Y)" as "T op T" where
3817 T is "X op Y". */
3818 else if (rtx_equal_p (p,q) && rtx_equal_p (r,s))
3820 rtx tmp = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, p, r);
3821 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, tmp);
3822 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3823 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3824 subst_done = true;
3829 if (!subst_done)
3831 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, *split);
3832 SUBST (*split, newdest);
3835 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3837 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3838 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3839 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
3840 for (i = XVECLEN (newi2pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3841 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
3843 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i), 0);
3844 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, newpat))
3846 undo_all ();
3847 return 0;
3851 /* If the split point was a MULT and we didn't have one before,
3852 don't use one now. */
3853 if (i2_code_number >= 0 && ! (split_code == MULT && ! have_mult))
3854 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3858 /* Check for a case where we loaded from memory in a narrow mode and
3859 then sign extended it, but we need both registers. In that case,
3860 we have a PARALLEL with both loads from the same memory location.
3861 We can split this into a load from memory followed by a register-register
3862 copy. This saves at least one insn, more if register allocation can
3863 eliminate the copy.
3865 We cannot do this if the destination of the first assignment is a
3866 condition code register or cc0. We eliminate this case by making sure
3867 the SET_DEST and SET_SRC have the same mode.
3869 We cannot do this if the destination of the second assignment is
3870 a register that we have already assumed is zero-extended. Similarly
3871 for a SUBREG of such a register. */
3873 else if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0
3874 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3875 && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2
3876 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET
3877 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) == SIGN_EXTEND
3878 && (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))
3879 == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))))
3880 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET
3881 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3882 XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)), 0))
3883 && ! use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3884 DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3885 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3886 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3887 && ! (temp_expr = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3888 (REG_P (temp_expr)
3889 && reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits != 0
3890 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3891 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3892 && (reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits
3893 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode))))
3894 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) == SUBREG
3895 && (temp_expr = SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))),
3896 (REG_P (temp_expr)
3897 && reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits != 0
3898 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3899 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3900 && (reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits
3901 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode)))))
3902 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3903 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))
3904 && ! find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED,
3905 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))))
3907 rtx ni2dest;
3909 newi2pat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3910 ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0));
3911 newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3912 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat),
3913 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)), ni2dest));
3914 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3916 if (i2_code_number >= 0)
3917 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3919 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3920 swap_i2i3 = 1;
3923 /* Similarly, check for a case where we have a PARALLEL of two independent
3924 SETs but we started with three insns. In this case, we can do the sets
3925 as two separate insns. This case occurs when some SET allows two
3926 other insns to combine, but the destination of that SET is still live.
3928 Also do this if we started with two insns and (at least) one of the
3929 resulting sets is a noop; this noop will be deleted later. */
3931 else if (insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0
3932 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3933 && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2
3934 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET
3935 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET
3936 && (i1 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))
3937 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))
3938 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3939 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3940 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3941 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3942 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3943 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))
3944 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)),
3945 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))
3946 && ! (contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))
3947 && contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))))
3949 rtx set0 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3950 rtx set1 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3952 /* Normally, it doesn't matter which of the two is done first,
3953 but the one that references cc0 can't be the second, and
3954 one which uses any regs/memory set in between i2 and i3 can't
3955 be first. The PARALLEL might also have been pre-existing in i3,
3956 so we need to make sure that we won't wrongly hoist a SET to i2
3957 that would conflict with a death note present in there. */
3958 if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set1), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3959 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set1))
3960 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD, SET_DEST (set1)))
3961 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1)) == SUBREG
3962 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD,
3963 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1))))
3964 && (!HAVE_cc0 || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, set0))
3965 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set0 is a jump so that
3966 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3967 && (!JUMP_P (i3) || SET_DEST (set0) == pc_rtx)
3970 newi2pat = set1;
3971 newpat = set0;
3973 else if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set0), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3974 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set0))
3975 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD, SET_DEST (set0)))
3976 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0)) == SUBREG
3977 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD,
3978 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0))))
3979 && (!HAVE_cc0 || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, set1))
3980 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set1 is a jump so that
3981 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3982 && (!JUMP_P (i3) || SET_DEST (set1) == pc_rtx)
3985 newi2pat = set0;
3986 newpat = set1;
3988 else
3990 undo_all ();
3991 return 0;
3994 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3996 if (i2_code_number >= 0)
3998 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3999 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
4000 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
4002 for (i = XVECLEN (newi2pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4003 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
4005 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i), 0);
4006 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, newpat))
4008 undo_all ();
4009 return 0;
4014 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
4018 /* If it still isn't recognized, fail and change things back the way they
4019 were. */
4020 if ((insn_code_number < 0
4021 /* Is the result a reasonable ASM_OPERANDS? */
4022 && (! check_asm_operands (newpat) || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2)))
4024 undo_all ();
4025 return 0;
4028 /* If we had to change another insn, make sure it is valid also. */
4029 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4031 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs);
4033 other_pat = PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn);
4034 other_code_number = recog_for_combine (&other_pat, undobuf.other_insn,
4035 &new_other_notes);
4037 if (other_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (other_pat))
4039 undo_all ();
4040 return 0;
4044 /* If I2 is the CC0 setter and I3 is the CC0 user then check whether
4045 they are adjacent to each other or not. */
4046 if (HAVE_cc0)
4048 rtx_insn *p = prev_nonnote_insn (i3);
4049 if (p && p != i2 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (p) && newi2pat
4050 && sets_cc0_p (newi2pat))
4052 undo_all ();
4053 return 0;
4057 /* Only allow this combination if insn_rtx_costs reports that the
4058 replacement instructions are cheaper than the originals. */
4059 if (!combine_validate_cost (i0, i1, i2, i3, newpat, newi2pat, other_pat))
4061 undo_all ();
4062 return 0;
4065 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4067 struct undo *undo;
4069 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = undo->next)
4070 if (undo->kind == UNDO_MODE)
4072 rtx reg = *undo->where.r;
4073 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (reg);
4074 machine_mode old_mode = undo->old_contents.m;
4076 /* Temporarily revert mode back. */
4077 adjust_reg_mode (reg, old_mode);
4079 if (reg == i2dest && i2scratch)
4081 /* If we used i2dest as a scratch register with a
4082 different mode, substitute it for the original
4083 i2src while its original mode is temporarily
4084 restored, and then clear i2scratch so that we don't
4085 do it again later. */
4086 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, reg, i2src,
4087 this_basic_block);
4088 i2scratch = false;
4089 /* Put back the new mode. */
4090 adjust_reg_mode (reg, new_mode);
4092 else
4094 rtx tempreg = gen_raw_REG (old_mode, REGNO (reg));
4095 rtx_insn *first, *last;
4097 if (reg == i2dest)
4099 first = i2;
4100 last = last_combined_insn;
4102 else
4104 first = i3;
4105 last = undobuf.other_insn;
4106 gcc_assert (last);
4107 if (DF_INSN_LUID (last)
4108 < DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn))
4109 last = last_combined_insn;
4112 /* We're dealing with a reg that changed mode but not
4113 meaning, so we want to turn it into a subreg for
4114 the new mode. However, because of REG sharing and
4115 because its mode had already changed, we have to do
4116 it in two steps. First, replace any debug uses of
4117 reg, with its original mode temporarily restored,
4118 with this copy we have created; then, replace the
4119 copy with the SUBREG of the original shared reg,
4120 once again changed to the new mode. */
4121 propagate_for_debug (first, last, reg, tempreg,
4122 this_basic_block);
4123 adjust_reg_mode (reg, new_mode);
4124 propagate_for_debug (first, last, tempreg,
4125 lowpart_subreg (old_mode, reg, new_mode),
4126 this_basic_block);
4131 /* If we will be able to accept this, we have made a
4132 change to the destination of I3. This requires us to
4133 do a few adjustments. */
4135 if (changed_i3_dest)
4137 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4138 adjust_for_new_dest (i3);
4141 /* We now know that we can do this combination. Merge the insns and
4142 update the status of registers and LOG_LINKS. */
4144 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4146 rtx note, next;
4148 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn) = other_pat;
4150 /* If any of the notes in OTHER_INSN were REG_DEAD or REG_UNUSED,
4151 ensure that they are still valid. Then add any non-duplicate
4152 notes added by recog_for_combine. */
4153 for (note = REG_NOTES (undobuf.other_insn); note; note = next)
4155 next = XEXP (note, 1);
4157 if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
4158 && !reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0),
4159 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)))
4160 ||(REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_UNUSED
4161 && !reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0),
4162 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)))
4163 /* Simply drop equal note since it may be no longer valid
4164 for other_insn. It may be possible to record that CC
4165 register is changed and only discard those notes, but
4166 in practice it's unnecessary complication and doesn't
4167 give any meaningful improvement.
4169 See PR78559. */
4170 || REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_EQUAL
4171 || REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_EQUIV)
4172 remove_note (undobuf.other_insn, note);
4175 distribute_notes (new_other_notes, undobuf.other_insn,
4176 undobuf.other_insn, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4177 NULL_RTX);
4180 if (swap_i2i3)
4182 rtx_insn *insn;
4183 struct insn_link *link;
4184 rtx ni2dest;
4186 /* I3 now uses what used to be its destination and which is now
4187 I2's destination. This requires us to do a few adjustments. */
4188 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4189 adjust_for_new_dest (i3);
4191 /* We need a LOG_LINK from I3 to I2. But we used to have one,
4192 so we still will.
4194 However, some later insn might be using I2's dest and have
4195 a LOG_LINK pointing at I3. We must remove this link.
4196 The simplest way to remove the link is to point it at I1,
4197 which we know will be a NOTE. */
4199 /* newi2pat is usually a SET here; however, recog_for_combine might
4200 have added some clobbers. */
4201 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
4202 ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, 0));
4203 else
4204 ni2dest = SET_DEST (newi2pat);
4206 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (i3);
4207 insn && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
4208 || insn != BB_HEAD (this_basic_block->next_bb));
4209 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
4211 if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn)
4212 && reg_referenced_p (ni2dest, PATTERN (insn)))
4214 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, insn)
4215 if (link->insn == i3)
4216 link->insn = i1;
4218 break;
4224 rtx i3notes, i2notes, i1notes = 0, i0notes = 0;
4225 struct insn_link *i3links, *i2links, *i1links = 0, *i0links = 0;
4226 rtx midnotes = 0;
4227 int from_luid;
4228 /* Compute which registers we expect to eliminate. newi2pat may be setting
4229 either i3dest or i2dest, so we must check it. */
4230 rtx elim_i2 = ((newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4231 || i2dest_in_i2src || i2dest_in_i1src || i2dest_in_i0src
4232 || !i2dest_killed
4233 ? 0 : i2dest);
4234 /* For i1, we need to compute both local elimination and global
4235 elimination information with respect to newi2pat because i1dest
4236 may be the same as i3dest, in which case newi2pat may be setting
4237 i1dest. Global information is used when distributing REG_DEAD
4238 note for i2 and i3, in which case it does matter if newi2pat sets
4239 i1dest or not.
4241 Local information is used when distributing REG_DEAD note for i1,
4242 in which case it doesn't matter if newi2pat sets i1dest or not.
4243 See PR62151, if we have four insns combination:
4244 i0: r0 <- i0src
4245 i1: r1 <- i1src (using r0)
4246 REG_DEAD (r0)
4247 i2: r0 <- i2src (using r1)
4248 i3: r3 <- i3src (using r0)
4249 ix: using r0
4250 From i1's point of view, r0 is eliminated, no matter if it is set
4251 by newi2pat or not. In other words, REG_DEAD info for r0 in i1
4252 should be discarded.
4254 Note local information only affects cases in forms like "I1->I2->I3",
4255 "I0->I1->I2->I3" or "I0&I1->I2, I2->I3". For other cases like
4256 "I0->I1, I1&I2->I3" or "I1&I2->I3", newi2pat won't set i1dest or
4257 i0dest anyway. */
4258 rtx local_elim_i1 = (i1 == 0 || i1dest_in_i1src || i1dest_in_i0src
4259 || !i1dest_killed
4260 ? 0 : i1dest);
4261 rtx elim_i1 = (local_elim_i1 == 0
4262 || (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat))
4263 ? 0 : i1dest);
4264 /* Same case as i1. */
4265 rtx local_elim_i0 = (i0 == 0 || i0dest_in_i0src || !i0dest_killed
4266 ? 0 : i0dest);
4267 rtx elim_i0 = (local_elim_i0 == 0
4268 || (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i0dest, newi2pat))
4269 ? 0 : i0dest);
4271 /* Get the old REG_NOTES and LOG_LINKS from all our insns and
4272 clear them. */
4273 i3notes = REG_NOTES (i3), i3links = LOG_LINKS (i3);
4274 i2notes = REG_NOTES (i2), i2links = LOG_LINKS (i2);
4275 if (i1)
4276 i1notes = REG_NOTES (i1), i1links = LOG_LINKS (i1);
4277 if (i0)
4278 i0notes = REG_NOTES (i0), i0links = LOG_LINKS (i0);
4280 /* Ensure that we do not have something that should not be shared but
4281 occurs multiple times in the new insns. Check this by first
4282 resetting all the `used' flags and then copying anything is shared. */
4284 reset_used_flags (i3notes);
4285 reset_used_flags (i2notes);
4286 reset_used_flags (i1notes);
4287 reset_used_flags (i0notes);
4288 reset_used_flags (newpat);
4289 reset_used_flags (newi2pat);
4290 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4291 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn));
4293 i3notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i3notes);
4294 i2notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i2notes);
4295 i1notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i1notes);
4296 i0notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i0notes);
4297 newpat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newpat);
4298 newi2pat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newi2pat);
4299 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4300 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn));
4302 INSN_CODE (i3) = insn_code_number;
4303 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4305 if (CALL_P (i3) && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3))
4307 for (rtx link = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3); link;
4308 link = XEXP (link, 1))
4310 if (substed_i2)
4312 /* I2SRC must still be meaningful at this point. Some
4313 splitting operations can invalidate I2SRC, but those
4314 operations do not apply to calls. */
4315 gcc_assert (i2src);
4316 XEXP (link, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link, 0),
4317 i2dest, i2src);
4319 if (substed_i1)
4320 XEXP (link, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link, 0),
4321 i1dest, i1src);
4322 if (substed_i0)
4323 XEXP (link, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link, 0),
4324 i0dest, i0src);
4328 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4329 INSN_CODE (undobuf.other_insn) = other_code_number;
4331 /* We had one special case above where I2 had more than one set and
4332 we replaced a destination of one of those sets with the destination
4333 of I3. In that case, we have to update LOG_LINKS of insns later
4334 in this basic block. Note that this (expensive) case is rare.
4336 Also, in this case, we must pretend that all REG_NOTEs for I2
4337 actually came from I3, so that REG_UNUSED notes from I2 will be
4338 properly handled. */
4340 if (i3_subst_into_i2)
4342 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2), 0); i++)
4343 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) == SET
4344 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
4345 && REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)))
4346 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) != i2dest
4347 && ! find_reg_note (i2, REG_UNUSED,
4348 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i))))
4349 for (temp_insn = NEXT_INSN (i2);
4350 temp_insn
4351 && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
4352 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block) != temp_insn);
4353 temp_insn = NEXT_INSN (temp_insn))
4354 if (temp_insn != i3 && NONDEBUG_INSN_P (temp_insn))
4355 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, temp_insn)
4356 if (link->insn == i2)
4357 link->insn = i3;
4359 if (i3notes)
4361 rtx link = i3notes;
4362 while (XEXP (link, 1))
4363 link = XEXP (link, 1);
4364 XEXP (link, 1) = i2notes;
4366 else
4367 i3notes = i2notes;
4368 i2notes = 0;
4371 LOG_LINKS (i3) = NULL;
4372 REG_NOTES (i3) = 0;
4373 LOG_LINKS (i2) = NULL;
4374 REG_NOTES (i2) = 0;
4376 if (newi2pat)
4378 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS && i2scratch)
4379 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, i2dest, i2src,
4380 this_basic_block);
4381 INSN_CODE (i2) = i2_code_number;
4382 PATTERN (i2) = newi2pat;
4384 else
4386 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS && i2src)
4387 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, i2dest, i2src,
4388 this_basic_block);
4389 SET_INSN_DELETED (i2);
4392 if (i1)
4394 LOG_LINKS (i1) = NULL;
4395 REG_NOTES (i1) = 0;
4396 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4397 propagate_for_debug (i1, last_combined_insn, i1dest, i1src,
4398 this_basic_block);
4399 SET_INSN_DELETED (i1);
4402 if (i0)
4404 LOG_LINKS (i0) = NULL;
4405 REG_NOTES (i0) = 0;
4406 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4407 propagate_for_debug (i0, last_combined_insn, i0dest, i0src,
4408 this_basic_block);
4409 SET_INSN_DELETED (i0);
4412 /* Get death notes for everything that is now used in either I3 or
4413 I2 and used to die in a previous insn. If we built two new
4414 patterns, move from I1 to I2 then I2 to I3 so that we get the
4415 proper movement on registers that I2 modifies. */
4417 if (i0)
4418 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i0);
4419 else if (i1)
4420 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
4421 else
4422 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
4423 if (newi2pat)
4424 move_deaths (newi2pat, NULL_RTX, from_luid, i2, &midnotes);
4425 move_deaths (newpat, newi2pat, from_luid, i3, &midnotes);
4427 /* Distribute all the LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES from I1, I2, and I3. */
4428 if (i3notes)
4429 distribute_notes (i3notes, i3, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4430 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4431 if (i2notes)
4432 distribute_notes (i2notes, i2, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4433 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4434 if (i1notes)
4435 distribute_notes (i1notes, i1, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4436 elim_i2, local_elim_i1, local_elim_i0);
4437 if (i0notes)
4438 distribute_notes (i0notes, i0, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4439 elim_i2, elim_i1, local_elim_i0);
4440 if (midnotes)
4441 distribute_notes (midnotes, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4442 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4444 /* Distribute any notes added to I2 or I3 by recog_for_combine. We
4445 know these are REG_UNUSED and want them to go to the desired insn,
4446 so we always pass it as i3. */
4448 if (newi2pat && new_i2_notes)
4449 distribute_notes (new_i2_notes, i2, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4450 NULL_RTX);
4452 if (new_i3_notes)
4453 distribute_notes (new_i3_notes, i3, i3, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4454 NULL_RTX);
4456 /* If I3DEST was used in I3SRC, it really died in I3. We may need to
4457 put a REG_DEAD note for it somewhere. If NEWI2PAT exists and sets
4458 I3DEST, the death must be somewhere before I2, not I3. If we passed I3
4459 in that case, it might delete I2. Similarly for I2 and I1.
4460 Show an additional death due to the REG_DEAD note we make here. If
4461 we discard it in distribute_notes, we will decrement it again. */
4463 if (i3dest_killed)
4465 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i3dest_killed, NULL_RTX);
4466 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i3dest_killed, newi2pat))
4467 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, elim_i2,
4468 elim_i1, elim_i0);
4469 else
4470 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4471 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4474 if (i2dest_in_i2src)
4476 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i2dest, NULL_RTX);
4477 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4478 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4479 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4480 else
4481 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4482 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4485 if (i1dest_in_i1src)
4487 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i1dest, NULL_RTX);
4488 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat))
4489 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4490 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4491 else
4492 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4493 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4496 if (i0dest_in_i0src)
4498 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i0dest, NULL_RTX);
4499 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i0dest, newi2pat))
4500 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4501 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4502 else
4503 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4504 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4507 distribute_links (i3links);
4508 distribute_links (i2links);
4509 distribute_links (i1links);
4510 distribute_links (i0links);
4512 if (REG_P (i2dest))
4514 struct insn_link *link;
4515 rtx_insn *i2_insn = 0;
4516 rtx i2_val = 0, set;
4518 /* The insn that used to set this register doesn't exist, and
4519 this life of the register may not exist either. See if one of
4520 I3's links points to an insn that sets I2DEST. If it does,
4521 that is now the last known value for I2DEST. If we don't update
4522 this and I2 set the register to a value that depended on its old
4523 contents, we will get confused. If this insn is used, thing
4524 will be set correctly in combine_instructions. */
4525 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4526 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4527 && rtx_equal_p (i2dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4528 i2_insn = link->insn, i2_val = SET_SRC (set);
4530 record_value_for_reg (i2dest, i2_insn, i2_val);
4532 /* If the reg formerly set in I2 died only once and that was in I3,
4533 zero its use count so it won't make `reload' do any work. */
4534 if (! added_sets_2
4535 && (newi2pat == 0 || ! reg_mentioned_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4536 && ! i2dest_in_i2src
4537 && REGNO (i2dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4538 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i2dest), -1);
4541 if (i1 && REG_P (i1dest))
4543 struct insn_link *link;
4544 rtx_insn *i1_insn = 0;
4545 rtx i1_val = 0, set;
4547 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4548 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4549 && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4550 i1_insn = link->insn, i1_val = SET_SRC (set);
4552 record_value_for_reg (i1dest, i1_insn, i1_val);
4554 if (! added_sets_1
4555 && ! i1dest_in_i1src
4556 && REGNO (i1dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4557 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i1dest), -1);
4560 if (i0 && REG_P (i0dest))
4562 struct insn_link *link;
4563 rtx_insn *i0_insn = 0;
4564 rtx i0_val = 0, set;
4566 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4567 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4568 && rtx_equal_p (i0dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4569 i0_insn = link->insn, i0_val = SET_SRC (set);
4571 record_value_for_reg (i0dest, i0_insn, i0_val);
4573 if (! added_sets_0
4574 && ! i0dest_in_i0src
4575 && REGNO (i0dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4576 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i0dest), -1);
4579 /* Update reg_stat[].nonzero_bits et al for any changes that may have
4580 been made to this insn. The order is important, because newi2pat
4581 can affect nonzero_bits of newpat. */
4582 if (newi2pat)
4583 note_stores (newi2pat, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies, NULL);
4584 note_stores (newpat, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies, NULL);
4587 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX)
4589 if (dump_file)
4591 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying other_insn ");
4592 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, undobuf.other_insn);
4594 df_insn_rescan (undobuf.other_insn);
4597 if (i0 && !(NOTE_P (i0) && (NOTE_KIND (i0) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4599 if (dump_file)
4601 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i0 ");
4602 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i0);
4604 df_insn_rescan (i0);
4607 if (i1 && !(NOTE_P (i1) && (NOTE_KIND (i1) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4609 if (dump_file)
4611 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i1 ");
4612 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i1);
4614 df_insn_rescan (i1);
4617 if (i2 && !(NOTE_P (i2) && (NOTE_KIND (i2) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4619 if (dump_file)
4621 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i2 ");
4622 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i2);
4624 df_insn_rescan (i2);
4627 if (i3 && !(NOTE_P (i3) && (NOTE_KIND (i3) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4629 if (dump_file)
4631 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i3 ");
4632 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i3);
4634 df_insn_rescan (i3);
4637 /* Set new_direct_jump_p if a new return or simple jump instruction
4638 has been created. Adjust the CFG accordingly. */
4639 if (returnjump_p (i3) || any_uncondjump_p (i3))
4641 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4642 mark_jump_label (PATTERN (i3), i3, 0);
4643 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3);
4646 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX
4647 && (returnjump_p (undobuf.other_insn)
4648 || any_uncondjump_p (undobuf.other_insn)))
4650 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4651 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf.other_insn);
4654 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == TRAP_IF
4655 && XEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0) == const1_rtx)
4657 basic_block bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i3);
4658 gcc_assert (bb);
4659 remove_edge (split_block (bb, i3));
4660 emit_barrier_after_bb (bb);
4661 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4664 if (undobuf.other_insn
4665 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == TRAP_IF
4666 && XEXP (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn), 0) == const1_rtx)
4668 basic_block bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (undobuf.other_insn);
4669 gcc_assert (bb);
4670 remove_edge (split_block (bb, undobuf.other_insn));
4671 emit_barrier_after_bb (bb);
4672 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4675 /* A noop might also need cleaning up of CFG, if it comes from the
4676 simplification of a jump. */
4677 if (JUMP_P (i3)
4678 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET
4679 && SET_SRC (newpat) == pc_rtx
4680 && SET_DEST (newpat) == pc_rtx)
4682 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4683 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3);
4686 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX
4687 && JUMP_P (undobuf.other_insn)
4688 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == SET
4689 && SET_SRC (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == pc_rtx
4690 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == pc_rtx)
4692 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4693 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf.other_insn);
4696 combine_successes++;
4697 undo_commit ();
4699 if (added_links_insn
4700 && (newi2pat == 0 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) < DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
4701 && DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) < DF_INSN_LUID (i3))
4702 return added_links_insn;
4703 else
4704 return newi2pat ? i2 : i3;
4707 /* Get a marker for undoing to the current state. */
4709 static void *
4710 get_undo_marker (void)
4712 return undobuf.undos;
4715 /* Undo the modifications up to the marker. */
4717 static void
4718 undo_to_marker (void *marker)
4720 struct undo *undo, *next;
4722 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo != marker; undo = next)
4724 gcc_assert (undo);
4726 next = undo->next;
4727 switch (undo->kind)
4729 case UNDO_RTX:
4730 *undo->where.r = undo->old_contents.r;
4731 break;
4732 case UNDO_INT:
4733 *undo->where.i = undo->old_contents.i;
4734 break;
4735 case UNDO_MODE:
4736 adjust_reg_mode (*undo->where.r, undo->old_contents.m);
4737 break;
4738 case UNDO_LINKS:
4739 *undo->where.l = undo->old_contents.l;
4740 break;
4741 default:
4742 gcc_unreachable ();
4745 undo->next = undobuf.frees;
4746 undobuf.frees = undo;
4749 undobuf.undos = (struct undo *) marker;
4752 /* Undo all the modifications recorded in undobuf. */
4754 static void
4755 undo_all (void)
4757 undo_to_marker (0);
4760 /* We've committed to accepting the changes we made. Move all
4761 of the undos to the free list. */
4763 static void
4764 undo_commit (void)
4766 struct undo *undo, *next;
4768 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = next)
4770 next = undo->next;
4771 undo->next = undobuf.frees;
4772 undobuf.frees = undo;
4774 undobuf.undos = 0;
4777 /* Find the innermost point within the rtx at LOC, possibly LOC itself,
4778 where we have an arithmetic expression and return that point. LOC will
4779 be inside INSN.
4781 try_combine will call this function to see if an insn can be split into
4782 two insns. */
4784 static rtx *
4785 find_split_point (rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, bool set_src)
4787 rtx x = *loc;
4788 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
4789 rtx *split;
4790 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len = 0;
4791 HOST_WIDE_INT pos = 0;
4792 int unsignedp = 0;
4793 rtx inner = NULL_RTX;
4795 /* First special-case some codes. */
4796 switch (code)
4798 case SUBREG:
4799 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
4800 /* If we are making a paradoxical SUBREG invalid, it becomes a split
4801 point. */
4802 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
4803 return loc;
4804 #endif
4805 return find_split_point (&SUBREG_REG (x), insn, false);
4807 case MEM:
4808 /* If we have (mem (const ..)) or (mem (symbol_ref ...)), split it
4809 using LO_SUM and HIGH. */
4810 if (HAVE_lo_sum && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST
4811 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF))
4813 machine_mode address_mode = get_address_mode (x);
4815 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
4816 gen_rtx_LO_SUM (address_mode,
4817 gen_rtx_HIGH (address_mode, XEXP (x, 0)),
4818 XEXP (x, 0)));
4819 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4822 /* If we have a PLUS whose second operand is a constant and the
4823 address is not valid, perhaps will can split it up using
4824 the machine-specific way to split large constants. We use
4825 the first pseudo-reg (one of the virtual regs) as a placeholder;
4826 it will not remain in the result. */
4827 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
4828 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
4829 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
4830 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
4832 rtx reg = regno_reg_rtx[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];
4833 rtx_insn *seq = combine_split_insns (gen_rtx_SET (reg, XEXP (x, 0)),
4834 subst_insn);
4836 /* This should have produced two insns, each of which sets our
4837 placeholder. If the source of the second is a valid address,
4838 we can make put both sources together and make a split point
4839 in the middle. */
4841 if (seq
4842 && NEXT_INSN (seq) != NULL_RTX
4843 && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (seq)) == NULL_RTX
4844 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (seq)
4845 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SET
4846 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (seq)) == reg
4847 && ! reg_mentioned_p (reg,
4848 SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq)))
4849 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (NEXT_INSN (seq))
4850 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))) == SET
4851 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))) == reg
4852 && memory_address_addr_space_p
4853 (GET_MODE (x), SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))),
4854 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
4856 rtx src1 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq));
4857 rtx src2 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq)));
4859 /* Replace the placeholder in SRC2 with SRC1. If we can
4860 find where in SRC2 it was placed, that can become our
4861 split point and we can replace this address with SRC2.
4862 Just try two obvious places. */
4864 src2 = replace_rtx (src2, reg, src1);
4865 split = 0;
4866 if (XEXP (src2, 0) == src1)
4867 split = &XEXP (src2, 0);
4868 else if (GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (XEXP (src2, 0)))[0] == 'e'
4869 && XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0) == src1)
4870 split = &XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0);
4872 if (split)
4874 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), src2);
4875 return split;
4879 /* If that didn't work, perhaps the first operand is complex and
4880 needs to be computed separately, so make a split point there.
4881 This will occur on machines that just support REG + CONST
4882 and have a constant moved through some previous computation. */
4884 else if (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
4885 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4886 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))))
4887 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4890 /* If we have a PLUS whose first operand is complex, try computing it
4891 separately by making a split there. */
4892 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
4893 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
4894 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x))
4895 && ! OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
4896 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4897 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))))
4898 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4899 break;
4901 case SET:
4902 /* If SET_DEST is CC0 and SET_SRC is not an operand, a COMPARE, or a
4903 ZERO_EXTRACT, the most likely reason why this doesn't match is that
4904 we need to put the operand into a register. So split at that
4905 point. */
4907 if (SET_DEST (x) == cc0_rtx
4908 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != COMPARE
4909 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
4910 && !OBJECT_P (SET_SRC (x))
4911 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == SUBREG
4912 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x)))))
4913 return &SET_SRC (x);
4915 /* See if we can split SET_SRC as it stands. */
4916 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4917 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4918 return split;
4920 /* See if we can split SET_DEST as it stands. */
4921 split = find_split_point (&SET_DEST (x), insn, false);
4922 if (split && split != &SET_DEST (x))
4923 return split;
4925 /* See if this is a bitfield assignment with everything constant. If
4926 so, this is an IOR of an AND, so split it into that. */
4927 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4928 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))
4929 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1))
4930 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2))
4931 && CONST_INT_P (SET_SRC (x))
4932 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1))
4933 + INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2)))
4934 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0))))
4935 && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))
4937 HOST_WIDE_INT pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2));
4938 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1));
4939 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT src = INTVAL (SET_SRC (x));
4940 rtx dest = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0);
4941 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (dest);
4942 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
4943 = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1;
4944 rtx or_mask;
4946 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4947 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - len - pos;
4949 or_mask = gen_int_mode (src << pos, mode);
4950 if (src == mask)
4951 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4952 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode, dest, or_mask));
4953 else
4955 rtx negmask = gen_int_mode (~(mask << pos), mode);
4956 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4957 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode,
4958 simplify_gen_binary (AND, mode,
4959 dest, negmask),
4960 or_mask));
4963 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), dest);
4965 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4966 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4967 return split;
4970 /* Otherwise, see if this is an operation that we can split into two.
4971 If so, try to split that. */
4972 code = GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x));
4974 switch (code)
4976 case AND:
4977 /* If we are AND'ing with a large constant that is only a single
4978 bit and the result is only being used in a context where we
4979 need to know if it is zero or nonzero, replace it with a bit
4980 extraction. This will avoid the large constant, which might
4981 have taken more than one insn to make. If the constant were
4982 not a valid argument to the AND but took only one insn to make,
4983 this is no worse, but if it took more than one insn, it will
4984 be better. */
4986 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
4987 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
4988 && (pos = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)))) >= 7
4989 && REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
4990 && (split = find_single_use (SET_DEST (x), insn, NULL)) != 0
4991 && (GET_CODE (*split) == EQ || GET_CODE (*split) == NE)
4992 && XEXP (*split, 0) == SET_DEST (x)
4993 && XEXP (*split, 1) == const0_rtx)
4995 rtx extraction = make_extraction (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)),
4996 XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4997 pos, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 0);
4998 if (extraction != 0)
5000 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), extraction);
5001 return find_split_point (loc, insn, false);
5004 break;
5006 case NE:
5007 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, this is (NE X 0) and only one bit of X
5008 is known to be on, this can be converted into a NEG of a shift. */
5009 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1 && XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1) == const0_rtx
5010 && GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)) == GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
5011 && 1 <= (pos = exact_log2
5012 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
5013 GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))))))
5015 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0));
5017 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
5018 gen_rtx_NEG (mode,
5019 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode,
5020 XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
5021 GEN_INT (pos))));
5023 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5024 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5025 return split;
5027 break;
5029 case SIGN_EXTEND:
5030 inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
5032 /* We can't optimize if either mode is a partial integer
5033 mode as we don't know how many bits are significant
5034 in those modes. */
5035 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner)) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
5036 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
5037 break;
5039 pos = 0;
5040 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner));
5041 unsignedp = 0;
5042 break;
5044 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
5045 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
5046 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
5047 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2)))
5049 inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
5050 len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1));
5051 pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2));
5053 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
5054 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len - pos;
5055 unsignedp = (code == ZERO_EXTRACT);
5057 break;
5059 default:
5060 break;
5063 if (len && pos >= 0
5064 && pos + len <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
5066 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x));
5068 /* For unsigned, we have a choice of a shift followed by an
5069 AND or two shifts. Use two shifts for field sizes where the
5070 constant might be too large. We assume here that we can
5071 always at least get 8-bit constants in an AND insn, which is
5072 true for every current RISC. */
5074 if (unsignedp && len <= 8)
5076 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
5077 = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1;
5078 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
5079 gen_rtx_AND (mode,
5080 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT
5081 (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, inner),
5082 GEN_INT (pos)),
5083 gen_int_mode (mask, mode)));
5085 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5086 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5087 return split;
5089 else
5091 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
5092 gen_rtx_fmt_ee
5093 (unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT, mode,
5094 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode,
5095 gen_lowpart (mode, inner),
5096 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
5097 - len - pos)),
5098 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - len)));
5100 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5101 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5102 return split;
5106 /* See if this is a simple operation with a constant as the second
5107 operand. It might be that this constant is out of range and hence
5108 could be used as a split point. */
5109 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x))
5110 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
5111 && (OBJECT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
5112 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == SUBREG
5113 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))))))
5114 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1);
5116 /* Finally, see if this is a simple operation with its first operand
5117 not in a register. The operation might require this operand in a
5118 register, so return it as a split point. We can always do this
5119 because if the first operand were another operation, we would have
5120 already found it as a split point. */
5121 if ((BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x)) || UNARY_P (SET_SRC (x)))
5122 && ! register_operand (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), VOIDmode))
5123 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
5125 return 0;
5127 case AND:
5128 case IOR:
5129 /* We write NOR as (and (not A) (not B)), but if we don't have a NOR,
5130 it is better to write this as (not (ior A B)) so we can split it.
5131 Similarly for IOR. */
5132 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT)
5134 SUBST (*loc,
5135 gen_rtx_NOT (GET_MODE (x),
5136 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code == IOR ? AND : IOR,
5137 GET_MODE (x),
5138 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5139 XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0))));
5140 return find_split_point (loc, insn, set_src);
5143 /* Many RISC machines have a large set of logical insns. If the
5144 second operand is a NOT, put it first so we will try to split the
5145 other operand first. */
5146 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT)
5148 rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
5149 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5150 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), tem);
5152 break;
5154 case PLUS:
5155 case MINUS:
5156 /* Canonicalization can produce (minus A (mult B C)), where C is a
5157 constant. It may be better to try splitting (plus (mult B -C) A)
5158 instead if this isn't a multiply by a power of two. */
5159 if (set_src && code == MINUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT
5160 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT
5161 && !pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))))
5163 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5164 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_int = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1));
5165 HOST_WIDE_INT other_int = trunc_int_for_mode (-this_int, mode);
5166 SUBST (*loc, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode,
5167 gen_rtx_MULT (mode,
5168 XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0),
5169 gen_int_mode (other_int,
5170 mode)),
5171 XEXP (x, 0)));
5172 return find_split_point (loc, insn, set_src);
5175 /* Split at a multiply-accumulate instruction. However if this is
5176 the SET_SRC, we likely do not have such an instruction and it's
5177 worthless to try this split. */
5178 if (!set_src
5179 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT
5180 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
5181 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)))
5182 return loc;
5184 default:
5185 break;
5188 /* Otherwise, select our actions depending on our rtx class. */
5189 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5191 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS: /* This is ZERO_EXTRACT and SIGN_EXTRACT. */
5192 case RTX_TERNARY:
5193 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 2), insn, false);
5194 if (split)
5195 return split;
5196 /* fall through */
5197 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
5198 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
5199 case RTX_COMPARE:
5200 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
5201 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 1), insn, false);
5202 if (split)
5203 return split;
5204 /* fall through */
5205 case RTX_UNARY:
5206 /* Some machines have (and (shift ...) ...) insns. If X is not
5207 an AND, but XEXP (X, 0) is, use it as our split point. */
5208 if (GET_CODE (x) != AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND)
5209 return &XEXP (x, 0);
5211 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 0), insn, false);
5212 if (split)
5213 return split;
5214 return loc;
5216 default:
5217 /* Otherwise, we don't have a split point. */
5218 return 0;
5222 /* Throughout X, replace FROM with TO, and return the result.
5223 The result is TO if X is FROM;
5224 otherwise the result is X, but its contents may have been modified.
5225 If they were modified, a record was made in undobuf so that
5226 undo_all will (among other things) return X to its original state.
5228 If the number of changes necessary is too much to record to undo,
5229 the excess changes are not made, so the result is invalid.
5230 The changes already made can still be undone.
5231 undobuf.num_undo is incremented for such changes, so by testing that
5232 the caller can tell whether the result is valid.
5234 `n_occurrences' is incremented each time FROM is replaced.
5236 IN_DEST is nonzero if we are processing the SET_DEST of a SET.
5238 IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level of a condition.
5240 UNIQUE_COPY is nonzero if each substitution must be unique. We do this
5241 by copying if `n_occurrences' is nonzero. */
5243 static rtx
5244 subst (rtx x, rtx from, rtx to, int in_dest, int in_cond, int unique_copy)
5246 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
5247 machine_mode op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5248 const char *fmt;
5249 int len, i;
5250 rtx new_rtx;
5252 /* Two expressions are equal if they are identical copies of a shared
5253 RTX or if they are both registers with the same register number
5254 and mode. */
5256 #define COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P(X,Y) \
5257 ((X) == (Y) \
5258 || (REG_P (X) && REG_P (Y) \
5259 && REGNO (X) == REGNO (Y) && GET_MODE (X) == GET_MODE (Y)))
5261 /* Do not substitute into clobbers of regs -- this will never result in
5262 valid RTL. */
5263 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER && REG_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5264 return x;
5266 if (! in_dest && COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, from))
5268 n_occurrences++;
5269 return (unique_copy && n_occurrences > 1 ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5272 /* If X and FROM are the same register but different modes, they
5273 will not have been seen as equal above. However, the log links code
5274 will make a LOG_LINKS entry for that case. If we do nothing, we
5275 will try to rerecognize our original insn and, when it succeeds,
5276 we will delete the feeding insn, which is incorrect.
5278 So force this insn not to match in this (rare) case. */
5279 if (! in_dest && code == REG && REG_P (from)
5280 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, from))
5281 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
5283 /* If this is an object, we are done unless it is a MEM or LO_SUM, both
5284 of which may contain things that can be combined. */
5285 if (code != MEM && code != LO_SUM && OBJECT_P (x))
5286 return x;
5288 /* It is possible to have a subexpression appear twice in the insn.
5289 Suppose that FROM is a register that appears within TO.
5290 Then, after that subexpression has been scanned once by `subst',
5291 the second time it is scanned, TO may be found. If we were
5292 to scan TO here, we would find FROM within it and create a
5293 self-referent rtl structure which is completely wrong. */
5294 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, to))
5295 return to;
5297 /* Parallel asm_operands need special attention because all of the
5298 inputs are shared across the arms. Furthermore, unsharing the
5299 rtl results in recognition failures. Failure to handle this case
5300 specially can result in circular rtl.
5302 Solve this by doing a normal pass across the first entry of the
5303 parallel, and only processing the SET_DESTs of the subsequent
5304 entries. Ug. */
5306 if (code == PARALLEL
5307 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0)) == SET
5308 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0))) == ASM_OPERANDS)
5310 new_rtx = subst (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0), from, to, 0, 0, unique_copy);
5312 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5313 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5314 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5315 return new_rtx;
5317 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0), new_rtx);
5319 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 1; i--)
5321 rtx dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x, 0, i));
5323 if (!REG_P (dest)
5324 && GET_CODE (dest) != CC0
5325 && GET_CODE (dest) != PC)
5327 new_rtx = subst (dest, from, to, 0, 0, unique_copy);
5329 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5330 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5331 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5332 return new_rtx;
5334 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x, 0, i)), new_rtx);
5338 else
5340 len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
5341 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5343 /* We don't need to process a SET_DEST that is a register, CC0,
5344 or PC, so set up to skip this common case. All other cases
5345 where we want to suppress replacing something inside a
5346 SET_SRC are handled via the IN_DEST operand. */
5347 if (code == SET
5348 && (REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
5349 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == CC0
5350 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == PC))
5351 fmt = "ie";
5353 /* Trying to simplify the operands of a widening MULT is not likely
5354 to create RTL matching a machine insn. */
5355 if (code == MULT
5356 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5357 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
5358 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5359 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
5360 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
5361 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0))
5362 && from == to)
5363 return x;
5366 /* Get the mode of operand 0 in case X is now a SIGN_EXTEND of a
5367 constant. */
5368 if (fmt[0] == 'e')
5369 op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5371 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
5373 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
5375 int j;
5376 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
5378 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from))
5380 new_rtx = (unique_copy && n_occurrences
5381 ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5382 n_occurrences++;
5384 else
5386 new_rtx = subst (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from, to, 0, 0,
5387 unique_copy);
5389 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing
5390 fails. */
5391 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5392 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5393 return new_rtx;
5396 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new_rtx);
5399 else if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5401 /* If this is a register being set, ignore it. */
5402 new_rtx = XEXP (x, i);
5403 if (in_dest
5404 && i == 0
5405 && (((code == SUBREG || code == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5406 && REG_P (new_rtx))
5407 || code == STRICT_LOW_PART))
5410 else if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XEXP (x, i), from))
5412 /* In general, don't install a subreg involving two
5413 modes not tieable. It can worsen register
5414 allocation, and can even make invalid reload
5415 insns, since the reg inside may need to be copied
5416 from in the outside mode, and that may be invalid
5417 if it is an fp reg copied in integer mode.
5419 We allow two exceptions to this: It is valid if
5420 it is inside another SUBREG and the mode of that
5421 SUBREG and the mode of the inside of TO is
5422 tieable and it is valid if X is a SET that copies
5423 FROM to CC0. */
5425 if (GET_CODE (to) == SUBREG
5426 && ! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (to),
5427 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to)))
5428 && ! (code == SUBREG
5429 && MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x),
5430 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to))))
5431 && (!HAVE_cc0
5432 || (! (code == SET
5433 && i == 1
5434 && XEXP (x, 0) == cc0_rtx))))
5435 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
5437 if (code == SUBREG
5438 && REG_P (to)
5439 && REGNO (to) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5440 && simplify_subreg_regno (REGNO (to), GET_MODE (to),
5441 SUBREG_BYTE (x),
5442 GET_MODE (x)) < 0)
5443 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
5445 new_rtx = (unique_copy && n_occurrences ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5446 n_occurrences++;
5448 else
5449 /* If we are in a SET_DEST, suppress most cases unless we
5450 have gone inside a MEM, in which case we want to
5451 simplify the address. We assume here that things that
5452 are actually part of the destination have their inner
5453 parts in the first expression. This is true for SUBREG,
5454 STRICT_LOW_PART, and ZERO_EXTRACT, which are the only
5455 things aside from REG and MEM that should appear in a
5456 SET_DEST. */
5457 new_rtx = subst (XEXP (x, i), from, to,
5458 (((in_dest
5459 && (code == SUBREG || code == STRICT_LOW_PART
5460 || code == ZERO_EXTRACT))
5461 || code == SET)
5462 && i == 0),
5463 code == IF_THEN_ELSE && i == 0,
5464 unique_copy);
5466 /* If we found that we will have to reject this combination,
5467 indicate that by returning the CLOBBER ourselves, rather than
5468 an expression containing it. This will speed things up as
5469 well as prevent accidents where two CLOBBERs are considered
5470 to be equal, thus producing an incorrect simplification. */
5472 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5473 return new_rtx;
5475 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx))
5477 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5479 x = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), new_rtx,
5480 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
5481 SUBREG_BYTE (x));
5482 if (! x)
5483 x = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode, const0_rtx);
5485 else if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx)
5486 && GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
5488 x = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
5489 new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
5490 gcc_assert (x);
5492 else
5493 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new_rtx);
5498 /* Check if we are loading something from the constant pool via float
5499 extension; in this case we would undo compress_float_constant
5500 optimization and degenerate constant load to an immediate value. */
5501 if (GET_CODE (x) == FLOAT_EXTEND
5502 && MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5503 && MEM_READONLY_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5505 rtx tmp = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
5506 if (x != tmp)
5507 return x;
5510 /* Try to simplify X. If the simplification changed the code, it is likely
5511 that further simplification will help, so loop, but limit the number
5512 of repetitions that will be performed. */
5514 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
5516 /* If X is sufficiently simple, don't bother trying to do anything
5517 with it. */
5518 if (code != CONST_INT && code != REG && code != CLOBBER)
5519 x = combine_simplify_rtx (x, op0_mode, in_dest, in_cond);
5521 if (GET_CODE (x) == code)
5522 break;
5524 code = GET_CODE (x);
5526 /* We no longer know the original mode of operand 0 since we
5527 have changed the form of X) */
5528 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5531 return x;
5534 /* If X is a commutative operation whose operands are not in the canonical
5535 order, use substitutions to swap them. */
5537 static void
5538 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (rtx x)
5540 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x)
5541 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
5543 rtx temp = XEXP (x, 0);
5544 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5545 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), temp);
5549 /* Simplify X, a piece of RTL. We just operate on the expression at the
5550 outer level; call `subst' to simplify recursively. Return the new
5551 expression.
5553 OP0_MODE is the original mode of XEXP (x, 0). IN_DEST is nonzero
5554 if we are inside a SET_DEST. IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level
5555 of a condition. */
5557 static rtx
5558 combine_simplify_rtx (rtx x, machine_mode op0_mode, int in_dest,
5559 int in_cond)
5561 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
5562 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5563 rtx temp;
5564 int i;
5566 /* If this is a commutative operation, put a constant last and a complex
5567 expression first. We don't need to do this for comparisons here. */
5568 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x);
5570 /* Try to fold this expression in case we have constants that weren't
5571 present before. */
5572 temp = 0;
5573 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5575 case RTX_UNARY:
5576 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
5577 op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5578 temp = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), op0_mode);
5579 break;
5580 case RTX_COMPARE:
5581 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
5583 machine_mode cmp_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5584 if (cmp_mode == VOIDmode)
5586 cmp_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1));
5587 if (cmp_mode == VOIDmode)
5588 cmp_mode = op0_mode;
5590 temp = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, cmp_mode,
5591 XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5593 break;
5594 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
5595 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
5596 temp = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5597 break;
5598 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
5599 case RTX_TERNARY:
5600 temp = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, XEXP (x, 0),
5601 XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2));
5602 break;
5603 default:
5604 break;
5607 if (temp)
5609 x = temp;
5610 code = GET_CODE (temp);
5611 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5612 mode = GET_MODE (temp);
5615 /* If this is a simple operation applied to an IF_THEN_ELSE, try
5616 applying it to the arms of the IF_THEN_ELSE. This often simplifies
5617 things. Check for cases where both arms are testing the same
5618 condition.
5620 Don't do anything if all operands are very simple. */
5622 if ((BINARY_P (x)
5623 && ((!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5624 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5625 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))))
5626 || (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5627 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SUBREG
5628 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 1)))))))
5629 || (UNARY_P (x)
5630 && (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5631 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5632 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))))))
5634 rtx cond, true_rtx, false_rtx;
5636 cond = if_then_else_cond (x, &true_rtx, &false_rtx);
5637 if (cond != 0
5638 /* If everything is a comparison, what we have is highly unlikely
5639 to be simpler, so don't use it. */
5640 && ! (COMPARISON_P (x)
5641 && (COMPARISON_P (true_rtx) || COMPARISON_P (false_rtx))))
5643 rtx cop1 = const0_rtx;
5644 enum rtx_code cond_code = simplify_comparison (NE, &cond, &cop1);
5646 if (cond_code == NE && COMPARISON_P (cond))
5647 return x;
5649 /* Simplify the alternative arms; this may collapse the true and
5650 false arms to store-flag values. Be careful to use copy_rtx
5651 here since true_rtx or false_rtx might share RTL with x as a
5652 result of the if_then_else_cond call above. */
5653 true_rtx = subst (copy_rtx (true_rtx), pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
5654 false_rtx = subst (copy_rtx (false_rtx), pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
5656 /* If true_rtx and false_rtx are not general_operands, an if_then_else
5657 is unlikely to be simpler. */
5658 if (general_operand (true_rtx, VOIDmode)
5659 && general_operand (false_rtx, VOIDmode))
5661 enum rtx_code reversed;
5663 /* Restarting if we generate a store-flag expression will cause
5664 us to loop. Just drop through in this case. */
5666 /* If the result values are STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero, we can
5667 just make the comparison operation. */
5668 if (true_rtx == const_true_rtx && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
5669 x = simplify_gen_relational (cond_code, mode, VOIDmode,
5670 cond, cop1);
5671 else if (true_rtx == const0_rtx && false_rtx == const_true_rtx
5672 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts
5673 (cond_code, cond, cop1, NULL))
5674 != UNKNOWN))
5675 x = simplify_gen_relational (reversed, mode, VOIDmode,
5676 cond, cop1);
5678 /* Likewise, we can make the negate of a comparison operation
5679 if the result values are - STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero. */
5680 else if (CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
5681 && INTVAL (true_rtx) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5682 && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
5683 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5684 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code,
5685 mode, VOIDmode,
5686 cond, cop1),
5687 mode);
5688 else if (CONST_INT_P (false_rtx)
5689 && INTVAL (false_rtx) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5690 && true_rtx == const0_rtx
5691 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts
5692 (cond_code, cond, cop1, NULL))
5693 != UNKNOWN))
5694 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5695 simplify_gen_relational (reversed,
5696 mode, VOIDmode,
5697 cond, cop1),
5698 mode);
5699 else
5700 return gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (mode,
5701 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code,
5702 mode,
5703 VOIDmode,
5704 cond,
5705 cop1),
5706 true_rtx, false_rtx);
5708 code = GET_CODE (x);
5709 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5714 /* First see if we can apply the inverse distributive law. */
5715 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS
5716 || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR)
5718 x = apply_distributive_law (x);
5719 code = GET_CODE (x);
5720 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5723 /* If CODE is an associative operation not otherwise handled, see if we
5724 can associate some operands. This can win if they are constants or
5725 if they are logically related (i.e. (a & b) & a). */
5726 if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS || code == MULT || code == DIV
5727 || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR
5728 || code == SMAX || code == SMIN || code == UMAX || code == UMIN)
5729 && ((INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode) && code != DIV)
5730 || (flag_associative_math && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))))
5732 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == code)
5734 rtx other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5735 rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
5736 rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5737 rtx inner;
5739 /* Make sure we pass the constant operand if any as the second
5740 one if this is a commutative operation. */
5741 if (CONSTANT_P (inner_op0) && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
5742 std::swap (inner_op0, inner_op1);
5743 inner = simplify_binary_operation (code == MINUS ? PLUS
5744 : code == DIV ? MULT
5745 : code,
5746 mode, inner_op0, inner_op1);
5748 /* For commutative operations, try the other pair if that one
5749 didn't simplify. */
5750 if (inner == 0 && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
5752 other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
5753 inner = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5754 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5755 XEXP (x, 1));
5758 if (inner)
5759 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, other, inner);
5763 /* A little bit of algebraic simplification here. */
5764 switch (code)
5766 case MEM:
5767 /* Ensure that our address has any ASHIFTs converted to MULT in case
5768 address-recognizing predicates are called later. */
5769 temp = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), MEM);
5770 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), temp);
5771 break;
5773 case SUBREG:
5774 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
5775 op0_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
5777 /* See if this can be moved to simplify_subreg. */
5778 if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5779 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, op0_mode) == SUBREG_BYTE (x)
5780 /* Don't call gen_lowpart if the inner mode
5781 is VOIDmode and we cannot simplify it, as SUBREG without
5782 inner mode is invalid. */
5783 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode
5784 || gen_lowpart_common (mode, SUBREG_REG (x))))
5785 return gen_lowpart (mode, SUBREG_REG (x));
5787 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) == MODE_CC)
5788 break;
5790 rtx temp;
5791 temp = simplify_subreg (mode, SUBREG_REG (x), op0_mode,
5792 SUBREG_BYTE (x));
5793 if (temp)
5794 return temp;
5796 /* If op is known to have all lower bits zero, the result is zero. */
5797 if (!in_dest
5798 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode)
5799 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (op0_mode)
5800 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op0_mode)
5801 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, op0_mode) == SUBREG_BYTE (x)
5802 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op0_mode)
5803 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), op0_mode)
5804 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0)
5805 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
5808 /* Don't change the mode of the MEM if that would change the meaning
5809 of the address. */
5810 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5811 && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5812 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (x), 0),
5813 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))
5814 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode, const0_rtx);
5816 /* Note that we cannot do any narrowing for non-constants since
5817 we might have been counting on using the fact that some bits were
5818 zero. We now do this in the SET. */
5820 break;
5822 case NEG:
5823 temp = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0));
5825 /* For C equal to the width of MODE minus 1, (neg (ashiftrt X C)) can be
5826 replaced by (lshiftrt X C). This will convert
5827 (neg (sign_extract X 1 Y)) to (zero_extract X 1 Y). */
5829 if (GET_CODE (temp) == ASHIFTRT
5830 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (temp, 1))
5831 && INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1)
5832 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (temp, 0),
5833 INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)));
5835 /* If X has only a single bit that might be nonzero, say, bit I, convert
5836 (neg X) to (ashiftrt (ashift X C-I) C-I) where C is the bitsize of
5837 MODE minus 1. This will convert (neg (zero_extract X 1 Y)) to
5838 (sign_extract X 1 Y). But only do this if TEMP isn't a register
5839 or a SUBREG of one since we'd be making the expression more
5840 complex if it was just a register. */
5842 if (!REG_P (temp)
5843 && ! (GET_CODE (temp) == SUBREG
5844 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (temp)))
5845 && (i = exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (temp, mode))) >= 0)
5847 rtx temp1 = simplify_shift_const
5848 (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5849 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, temp,
5850 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i),
5851 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i);
5853 /* If all we did was surround TEMP with the two shifts, we
5854 haven't improved anything, so don't use it. Otherwise,
5855 we are better off with TEMP1. */
5856 if (GET_CODE (temp1) != ASHIFTRT
5857 || GET_CODE (XEXP (temp1, 0)) != ASHIFT
5858 || XEXP (XEXP (temp1, 0), 0) != temp)
5859 return temp1;
5861 break;
5863 case TRUNCATE:
5864 /* We can't handle truncation to a partial integer mode here
5865 because we don't know the real bitsize of the partial
5866 integer mode. */
5867 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
5868 break;
5870 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
5871 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
5872 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)),
5873 GET_MODE_MASK (mode), 0));
5875 /* We can truncate a constant value and return it. */
5876 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5877 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)), mode);
5879 /* Similarly to what we do in simplify-rtx.c, a truncate of a register
5880 whose value is a comparison can be replaced with a subreg if
5881 STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. */
5882 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5883 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0
5884 && (temp = get_last_value (XEXP (x, 0)))
5885 && COMPARISON_P (temp))
5886 return gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
5887 break;
5889 case CONST:
5890 /* (const (const X)) can become (const X). Do it this way rather than
5891 returning the inner CONST since CONST can be shared with a
5892 REG_EQUAL note. */
5893 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST)
5894 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0));
5895 break;
5897 case LO_SUM:
5898 /* Convert (lo_sum (high FOO) FOO) to FOO. This is necessary so we
5899 can add in an offset. find_split_point will split this address up
5900 again if it doesn't match. */
5901 if (HAVE_lo_sum && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == HIGH
5902 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
5903 return XEXP (x, 1);
5904 break;
5906 case PLUS:
5907 /* (plus (xor (and <foo> (const_int pow2 - 1)) <c>) <-c>)
5908 when c is (const_int (pow2 + 1) / 2) is a sign extension of a
5909 bit-field and can be replaced by either a sign_extend or a
5910 sign_extract. The `and' may be a zero_extend and the two
5911 <c>, -<c> constants may be reversed. */
5912 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR
5913 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5914 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
5915 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
5916 && ((i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))) >= 0
5917 || (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0)
5918 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5919 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == AND
5920 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))
5921 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))
5922 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (i + 1)) - 1))
5923 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5924 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0)))
5925 == (unsigned int) i + 1))))
5926 return simplify_shift_const
5927 (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5928 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
5929 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0),
5930 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - (i + 1)),
5931 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - (i + 1));
5933 /* If only the low-order bit of X is possibly nonzero, (plus x -1)
5934 can become (ashiftrt (ashift (xor x 1) C) C) where C is
5935 the bitsize of the mode - 1. This allows simplification of
5936 "a = (b & 8) == 0;" */
5937 if (XEXP (x, 1) == constm1_rtx
5938 && !REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5939 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5940 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))))
5941 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) == 1)
5942 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5943 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
5944 gen_rtx_XOR (mode, XEXP (x, 0), const1_rtx),
5945 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1),
5946 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1);
5948 /* If we are adding two things that have no bits in common, convert
5949 the addition into an IOR. This will often be further simplified,
5950 for example in cases like ((a & 1) + (a & 2)), which can
5951 become a & 3. */
5953 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5954 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
5955 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)) == 0)
5957 /* Try to simplify the expression further. */
5958 rtx tor = simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5959 temp = combine_simplify_rtx (tor, VOIDmode, in_dest, 0);
5961 /* If we could, great. If not, do not go ahead with the IOR
5962 replacement, since PLUS appears in many special purpose
5963 address arithmetic instructions. */
5964 if (GET_CODE (temp) != CLOBBER
5965 && (GET_CODE (temp) != IOR
5966 || ((XEXP (temp, 0) != XEXP (x, 0)
5967 || XEXP (temp, 1) != XEXP (x, 1))
5968 && (XEXP (temp, 0) != XEXP (x, 1)
5969 || XEXP (temp, 1) != XEXP (x, 0)))))
5970 return temp;
5973 /* Canonicalize x + x into x << 1. */
5974 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5975 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1))
5976 && !side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 0)))
5977 return simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), const1_rtx);
5979 break;
5981 case MINUS:
5982 /* (minus <foo> (and <foo> (const_int -pow2))) becomes
5983 (and <foo> (const_int pow2-1)) */
5984 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == AND
5985 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))
5986 && pow2p_hwi (-UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)))
5987 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), XEXP (x, 0)))
5988 return simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
5989 -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) - 1);
5990 break;
5992 case MULT:
5993 /* If we have (mult (plus A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
5994 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. This
5995 occurs mostly in addresses, often when unrolling loops. */
5997 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS)
5999 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6000 if (result)
6001 return result;
6004 /* Try simplify a*(b/c) as (a*b)/c. */
6005 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && flag_associative_math
6006 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == DIV)
6008 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MULT, mode,
6009 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
6010 XEXP (x, 1));
6011 if (tem)
6012 return simplify_gen_binary (DIV, mode, tem, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
6014 break;
6016 case UDIV:
6017 /* If this is a divide by a power of two, treat it as a shift if
6018 its first operand is a shift. */
6019 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
6020 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0
6021 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
6022 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6023 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
6024 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE
6025 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATERT))
6026 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), i);
6027 break;
6029 case EQ: case NE:
6030 case GT: case GTU: case GE: case GEU:
6031 case LT: case LTU: case LE: case LEU:
6032 case UNEQ: case LTGT:
6033 case UNGT: case UNGE:
6034 case UNLT: case UNLE:
6035 case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
6036 /* If the first operand is a condition code, we can't do anything
6037 with it. */
6038 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == COMPARE
6039 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) != MODE_CC
6040 && ! CC0_P (XEXP (x, 0))))
6042 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6043 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6044 enum rtx_code new_code;
6046 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE)
6047 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
6049 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6050 new_code = simplify_comparison (code, &op0, &op1);
6052 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1, we can convert (ne x 0) to simply X
6053 if only the low-order bit is possibly nonzero in X (such as when
6054 X is a ZERO_EXTRACT of one bit). Similarly, we can convert EQ to
6055 (xor X 1) or (minus 1 X); we use the former. Finally, if X is
6056 known to be either 0 or -1, NE becomes a NEG and EQ becomes
6057 (plus X 1).
6059 Remove any ZERO_EXTRACT we made when thinking this was a
6060 comparison. It may now be simpler to use, e.g., an AND. If a
6061 ZERO_EXTRACT is indeed appropriate, it will be placed back by
6062 the call to make_compound_operation in the SET case.
6064 Don't apply these optimizations if the caller would
6065 prefer a comparison rather than a value.
6066 E.g., for the condition in an IF_THEN_ELSE most targets need
6067 an explicit comparison. */
6069 if (in_cond)
6072 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6073 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6074 && op1 == const0_rtx
6075 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6076 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6077 return gen_lowpart (mode,
6078 expand_compound_operation (op0));
6080 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6081 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6082 && op1 == const0_rtx
6083 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6084 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6085 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6087 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6088 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6089 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6090 mode);
6093 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6094 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6095 && op1 == const0_rtx
6096 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6097 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6099 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6100 return simplify_gen_binary (XOR, mode,
6101 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6102 const1_rtx);
6105 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6106 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6107 && op1 == const0_rtx
6108 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6109 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6110 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6112 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6113 return plus_constant (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, op0), 1);
6116 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, we have cases similar to
6117 those above. */
6118 if (in_cond)
6121 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6122 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6123 && op1 == const0_rtx
6124 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6125 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6126 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6127 return gen_lowpart (mode,
6128 expand_compound_operation (op0));
6130 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6131 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6132 && op1 == const0_rtx
6133 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6134 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6136 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6137 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6138 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6139 mode);
6142 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6143 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6144 && op1 == const0_rtx
6145 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6146 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6147 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6149 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6150 return simplify_gen_unary (NOT, mode,
6151 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6152 mode);
6155 /* If X is 0/1, (eq X 0) is X-1. */
6156 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6157 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6158 && op1 == const0_rtx
6159 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6160 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6162 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6163 return plus_constant (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, op0), -1);
6166 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE says to just test the sign bit and X has just
6167 one bit that might be nonzero, we can convert (ne x 0) to
6168 (ashift x c) where C puts the bit in the sign bit. Remove any
6169 AND with STORE_FLAG_VALUE when we are done, since we are only
6170 going to test the sign bit. */
6171 if (new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6172 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6173 && val_signbit_p (mode, STORE_FLAG_VALUE)
6174 && op1 == const0_rtx
6175 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6176 && (i = exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (op0, mode))) >= 0)
6178 x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
6179 expand_compound_operation (op0),
6180 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i);
6181 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && XEXP (x, 1) == const_true_rtx)
6182 return XEXP (x, 0);
6183 else
6184 return x;
6187 /* If the code changed, return a whole new comparison.
6188 We also need to avoid using SUBST in cases where
6189 simplify_comparison has widened a comparison with a CONST_INT,
6190 since in that case the wider CONST_INT may fail the sanity
6191 checks in do_SUBST. */
6192 if (new_code != code
6193 || (CONST_INT_P (op1)
6194 && GET_MODE (op0) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))
6195 && GET_MODE (op0) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1))))
6196 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code, mode, op0, op1);
6198 /* Otherwise, keep this operation, but maybe change its operands.
6199 This also converts (ne (compare FOO BAR) 0) to (ne FOO BAR). */
6200 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), op0);
6201 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), op1);
6203 break;
6205 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
6206 return simplify_if_then_else (x);
6208 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
6209 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
6210 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6211 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6212 /* If we are processing SET_DEST, we are done. */
6213 if (in_dest)
6214 return x;
6216 return expand_compound_operation (x);
6218 case SET:
6219 return simplify_set (x);
6221 case AND:
6222 case IOR:
6223 return simplify_logical (x);
6225 case ASHIFT:
6226 case LSHIFTRT:
6227 case ASHIFTRT:
6228 case ROTATE:
6229 case ROTATERT:
6230 /* If this is a shift by a constant amount, simplify it. */
6231 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
6232 return simplify_shift_const (x, code, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
6233 INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
6235 else if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED && !REG_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
6236 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1),
6237 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)),
6238 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
6239 << exact_log2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))))
6240 - 1,
6241 0));
6242 break;
6244 default:
6245 break;
6248 return x;
6251 /* Simplify X, an IF_THEN_ELSE expression. Return the new expression. */
6253 static rtx
6254 simplify_if_then_else (rtx x)
6256 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
6257 rtx cond = XEXP (x, 0);
6258 rtx true_rtx = XEXP (x, 1);
6259 rtx false_rtx = XEXP (x, 2);
6260 enum rtx_code true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6261 int comparison_p = COMPARISON_P (cond);
6262 rtx temp;
6263 int i;
6264 enum rtx_code false_code;
6265 rtx reversed;
6267 /* Simplify storing of the truth value. */
6268 if (comparison_p && true_rtx == const_true_rtx && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
6269 return simplify_gen_relational (true_code, mode, VOIDmode,
6270 XEXP (cond, 0), XEXP (cond, 1));
6272 /* Also when the truth value has to be reversed. */
6273 if (comparison_p
6274 && true_rtx == const0_rtx && false_rtx == const_true_rtx
6275 && (reversed = reversed_comparison (cond, mode)))
6276 return reversed;
6278 /* Sometimes we can simplify the arm of an IF_THEN_ELSE if a register used
6279 in it is being compared against certain values. Get the true and false
6280 comparisons and see if that says anything about the value of each arm. */
6282 if (comparison_p
6283 && ((false_code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL))
6284 != UNKNOWN)
6285 && REG_P (XEXP (cond, 0)))
6287 HOST_WIDE_INT nzb;
6288 rtx from = XEXP (cond, 0);
6289 rtx true_val = XEXP (cond, 1);
6290 rtx false_val = true_val;
6291 int swapped = 0;
6293 /* If FALSE_CODE is EQ, swap the codes and arms. */
6295 if (false_code == EQ)
6297 swapped = 1, true_code = EQ, false_code = NE;
6298 std::swap (true_rtx, false_rtx);
6301 /* If we are comparing against zero and the expression being tested has
6302 only a single bit that might be nonzero, that is its value when it is
6303 not equal to zero. Similarly if it is known to be -1 or 0. */
6305 if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx
6306 && pow2p_hwi (nzb = nonzero_bits (from, GET_MODE (from))))
6308 false_code = EQ;
6309 false_val = gen_int_mode (nzb, GET_MODE (from));
6311 else if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx
6312 && (num_sign_bit_copies (from, GET_MODE (from))
6313 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (from))))
6315 false_code = EQ;
6316 false_val = constm1_rtx;
6319 /* Now simplify an arm if we know the value of the register in the
6320 branch and it is used in the arm. Be careful due to the potential
6321 of locally-shared RTL. */
6323 if (reg_mentioned_p (from, true_rtx))
6324 true_rtx = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (true_rtx), true_code,
6325 from, true_val),
6326 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6327 if (reg_mentioned_p (from, false_rtx))
6328 false_rtx = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (false_rtx), false_code,
6329 from, false_val),
6330 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6332 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), swapped ? false_rtx : true_rtx);
6333 SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), swapped ? true_rtx : false_rtx);
6335 true_rtx = XEXP (x, 1);
6336 false_rtx = XEXP (x, 2);
6337 true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6340 /* If we have (if_then_else FOO (pc) (label_ref BAR)) and FOO can be
6341 reversed, do so to avoid needing two sets of patterns for
6342 subtract-and-branch insns. Similarly if we have a constant in the true
6343 arm, the false arm is the same as the first operand of the comparison, or
6344 the false arm is more complicated than the true arm. */
6346 if (comparison_p
6347 && reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL) != UNKNOWN
6348 && (true_rtx == pc_rtx
6349 || (CONSTANT_P (true_rtx)
6350 && !CONST_INT_P (false_rtx) && false_rtx != pc_rtx)
6351 || true_rtx == const0_rtx
6352 || (OBJECT_P (true_rtx) && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx))
6353 || (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == SUBREG && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (true_rtx))
6354 && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx))
6355 || reg_mentioned_p (true_rtx, false_rtx)
6356 || rtx_equal_p (false_rtx, XEXP (cond, 0))))
6358 true_code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL);
6359 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), reversed_comparison (cond, GET_MODE (cond)));
6360 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), false_rtx);
6361 SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), true_rtx);
6363 std::swap (true_rtx, false_rtx);
6364 cond = XEXP (x, 0);
6366 /* It is possible that the conditional has been simplified out. */
6367 true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6368 comparison_p = COMPARISON_P (cond);
6371 /* If the two arms are identical, we don't need the comparison. */
6373 if (rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, false_rtx) && ! side_effects_p (cond))
6374 return true_rtx;
6376 /* Convert a == b ? b : a to "a". */
6377 if (true_code == EQ && ! side_effects_p (cond)
6378 && !HONOR_NANS (mode)
6379 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), false_rtx)
6380 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), true_rtx))
6381 return false_rtx;
6382 else if (true_code == NE && ! side_effects_p (cond)
6383 && !HONOR_NANS (mode)
6384 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), true_rtx)
6385 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), false_rtx))
6386 return true_rtx;
6388 /* Look for cases where we have (abs x) or (neg (abs X)). */
6390 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6391 && comparison_p
6392 && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6393 && GET_CODE (false_rtx) == NEG
6394 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, XEXP (false_rtx, 0))
6395 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, XEXP (cond, 0))
6396 && ! side_effects_p (true_rtx))
6397 switch (true_code)
6399 case GT:
6400 case GE:
6401 return simplify_gen_unary (ABS, mode, true_rtx, mode);
6402 case LT:
6403 case LE:
6404 return
6405 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6406 simplify_gen_unary (ABS, mode, true_rtx, mode),
6407 mode);
6408 default:
6409 break;
6412 /* Look for MIN or MAX. */
6414 if ((! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
6415 && comparison_p
6416 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), true_rtx)
6417 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), false_rtx)
6418 && ! side_effects_p (cond))
6419 switch (true_code)
6421 case GE:
6422 case GT:
6423 return simplify_gen_binary (SMAX, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6424 case LE:
6425 case LT:
6426 return simplify_gen_binary (SMIN, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6427 case GEU:
6428 case GTU:
6429 return simplify_gen_binary (UMAX, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6430 case LEU:
6431 case LTU:
6432 return simplify_gen_binary (UMIN, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6433 default:
6434 break;
6437 /* If we have (if_then_else COND (OP Z C1) Z) and OP is an identity when its
6438 second operand is zero, this can be done as (OP Z (mult COND C2)) where
6439 C2 = C1 * STORE_FLAG_VALUE. Similarly if OP has an outer ZERO_EXTEND or
6440 SIGN_EXTEND as long as Z is already extended (so we don't destroy it).
6441 We can do this kind of thing in some cases when STORE_FLAG_VALUE is
6442 neither 1 or -1, but it isn't worth checking for. */
6444 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
6445 && comparison_p
6446 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6447 && ! side_effects_p (x))
6449 rtx t = make_compound_operation (true_rtx, SET);
6450 rtx f = make_compound_operation (false_rtx, SET);
6451 rtx cond_op0 = XEXP (cond, 0);
6452 rtx cond_op1 = XEXP (cond, 1);
6453 enum rtx_code op = UNKNOWN, extend_op = UNKNOWN;
6454 machine_mode m = mode;
6455 rtx z = 0, c1 = NULL_RTX;
6457 if ((GET_CODE (t) == PLUS || GET_CODE (t) == MINUS
6458 || GET_CODE (t) == IOR || GET_CODE (t) == XOR
6459 || GET_CODE (t) == ASHIFT
6460 || GET_CODE (t) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (t) == ASHIFTRT)
6461 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t, 0), f))
6462 c1 = XEXP (t, 1), op = GET_CODE (t), z = f;
6464 /* If an identity-zero op is commutative, check whether there
6465 would be a match if we swapped the operands. */
6466 else if ((GET_CODE (t) == PLUS || GET_CODE (t) == IOR
6467 || GET_CODE (t) == XOR)
6468 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t, 1), f))
6469 c1 = XEXP (t, 0), op = GET_CODE (t), z = f;
6470 else if (GET_CODE (t) == SIGN_EXTEND
6471 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6472 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == MINUS
6473 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6474 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR
6475 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFT
6476 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6477 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFTRT)
6478 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6479 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))
6480 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)), f)
6481 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f, GET_MODE (f))
6482 > (unsigned int)
6483 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
6484 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))))))
6486 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6487 extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND;
6488 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6490 else if (GET_CODE (t) == SIGN_EXTEND
6491 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6492 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6493 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR)
6494 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6495 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))
6496 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)), f)
6497 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f, GET_MODE (f))
6498 > (unsigned int)
6499 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
6500 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))))))
6502 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6503 extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND;
6504 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6506 else if (GET_CODE (t) == ZERO_EXTEND
6507 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6508 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == MINUS
6509 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6510 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR
6511 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFT
6512 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6513 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFTRT)
6514 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6515 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6516 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))
6517 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)), f)
6518 && ((nonzero_bits (f, GET_MODE (f))
6519 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))))
6520 == 0))
6522 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6523 extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND;
6524 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6526 else if (GET_CODE (t) == ZERO_EXTEND
6527 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6528 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6529 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR)
6530 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6531 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6532 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))
6533 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)), f)
6534 && ((nonzero_bits (f, GET_MODE (f))
6535 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))))
6536 == 0))
6538 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6539 extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND;
6540 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6543 if (z)
6545 temp = subst (simplify_gen_relational (true_code, m, VOIDmode,
6546 cond_op0, cond_op1),
6547 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6548 temp = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, m, temp,
6549 simplify_gen_binary (MULT, m, c1,
6550 const_true_rtx));
6551 temp = subst (temp, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6552 temp = simplify_gen_binary (op, m, gen_lowpart (m, z), temp);
6554 if (extend_op != UNKNOWN)
6555 temp = simplify_gen_unary (extend_op, mode, temp, m);
6557 return temp;
6561 /* If we have (if_then_else (ne A 0) C1 0) and either A is known to be 0 or
6562 1 and C1 is a single bit or A is known to be 0 or -1 and C1 is the
6563 negation of a single bit, we can convert this operation to a shift. We
6564 can actually do this more generally, but it doesn't seem worth it. */
6566 if (true_code == NE && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6567 && false_rtx == const0_rtx && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
6568 && ((1 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6569 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx))) >= 0)
6570 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6571 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
6572 && (i = exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (true_rtx))) >= 0)))
6573 return
6574 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
6575 gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (cond, 0)), i);
6577 /* (IF_THEN_ELSE (NE A 0) C1 0) is A or a zero-extend of A if the only
6578 non-zero bit in A is C1. */
6579 if (true_code == NE && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6580 && false_rtx == const0_rtx && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
6581 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (cond, 0)))
6582 && (UINTVAL (true_rtx) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
6583 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (cond, 0)))
6584 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))) >= 0)
6586 rtx val = XEXP (cond, 0);
6587 machine_mode val_mode = GET_MODE (val);
6588 if (val_mode == mode)
6589 return val;
6590 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (val_mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
6591 return simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, mode, val, val_mode);
6594 return x;
6597 /* Simplify X, a SET expression. Return the new expression. */
6599 static rtx
6600 simplify_set (rtx x)
6602 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
6603 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
6604 machine_mode mode
6605 = GET_MODE (src) != VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (src) : GET_MODE (dest);
6606 rtx_insn *other_insn;
6607 rtx *cc_use;
6609 /* (set (pc) (return)) gets written as (return). */
6610 if (GET_CODE (dest) == PC && ANY_RETURN_P (src))
6611 return src;
6613 /* Now that we know for sure which bits of SRC we are using, see if we can
6614 simplify the expression for the object knowing that we only need the
6615 low-order bits. */
6617 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
6619 src = force_to_mode (src, mode, HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U, 0);
6620 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), src);
6623 /* If we are setting CC0 or if the source is a COMPARE, look for the use of
6624 the comparison result and try to simplify it unless we already have used
6625 undobuf.other_insn. */
6626 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC
6627 || GET_CODE (src) == COMPARE
6628 || CC0_P (dest))
6629 && (cc_use = find_single_use (dest, subst_insn, &other_insn)) != 0
6630 && (undobuf.other_insn == 0 || other_insn == undobuf.other_insn)
6631 && COMPARISON_P (*cc_use)
6632 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), dest))
6634 enum rtx_code old_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use);
6635 enum rtx_code new_code;
6636 rtx op0, op1, tmp;
6637 int other_changed = 0;
6638 rtx inner_compare = NULL_RTX;
6639 machine_mode compare_mode = GET_MODE (dest);
6641 if (GET_CODE (src) == COMPARE)
6643 op0 = XEXP (src, 0), op1 = XEXP (src, 1);
6644 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
6646 inner_compare = op0;
6647 op0 = XEXP (inner_compare, 0), op1 = XEXP (inner_compare, 1);
6650 else
6651 op0 = src, op1 = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (src));
6653 tmp = simplify_relational_operation (old_code, compare_mode, VOIDmode,
6654 op0, op1);
6655 if (!tmp)
6656 new_code = old_code;
6657 else if (!CONSTANT_P (tmp))
6659 new_code = GET_CODE (tmp);
6660 op0 = XEXP (tmp, 0);
6661 op1 = XEXP (tmp, 1);
6663 else
6665 rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn);
6666 undobuf.other_insn = other_insn;
6667 SUBST (*cc_use, tmp);
6669 /* Attempt to simplify CC user. */
6670 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
6672 rtx new_rtx = simplify_rtx (SET_SRC (pat));
6673 if (new_rtx != NULL_RTX)
6674 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat), new_rtx);
6677 /* Convert X into a no-op move. */
6678 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), pc_rtx);
6679 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), pc_rtx);
6680 return x;
6683 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6684 new_code = simplify_comparison (new_code, &op0, &op1);
6686 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
6687 /* If this machine has CC modes other than CCmode, check to see if we
6688 need to use a different CC mode here. */
6689 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC)
6690 compare_mode = GET_MODE (op0);
6691 else if (inner_compare
6692 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner_compare)) == MODE_CC
6693 && new_code == old_code
6694 && op0 == XEXP (inner_compare, 0)
6695 && op1 == XEXP (inner_compare, 1))
6696 compare_mode = GET_MODE (inner_compare);
6697 else
6698 compare_mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (new_code, op0, op1);
6700 /* If the mode changed, we have to change SET_DEST, the mode in the
6701 compare, and the mode in the place SET_DEST is used. If SET_DEST is
6702 a hard register, just build new versions with the proper mode. If it
6703 is a pseudo, we lose unless it is only time we set the pseudo, in
6704 which case we can safely change its mode. */
6705 if (!HAVE_cc0 && compare_mode != GET_MODE (dest))
6707 if (can_change_dest_mode (dest, 0, compare_mode))
6709 unsigned int regno = REGNO (dest);
6710 rtx new_dest;
6712 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6713 new_dest = gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode, regno);
6714 else
6716 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[regno], compare_mode);
6717 new_dest = regno_reg_rtx[regno];
6720 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), new_dest);
6721 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), new_dest);
6722 other_changed = 1;
6724 dest = new_dest;
6727 #endif /* SELECT_CC_MODE */
6729 /* If the code changed, we have to build a new comparison in
6730 undobuf.other_insn. */
6731 if (new_code != old_code)
6733 int other_changed_previously = other_changed;
6734 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
6735 rtx old_cc_use = *cc_use;
6737 SUBST (*cc_use, gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code, GET_MODE (*cc_use),
6738 dest, const0_rtx));
6739 other_changed = 1;
6741 /* If the only change we made was to change an EQ into an NE or
6742 vice versa, OP0 has only one bit that might be nonzero, and OP1
6743 is zero, check if changing the user of the condition code will
6744 produce a valid insn. If it won't, we can keep the original code
6745 in that insn by surrounding our operation with an XOR. */
6747 if (((old_code == NE && new_code == EQ)
6748 || (old_code == EQ && new_code == NE))
6749 && ! other_changed_previously && op1 == const0_rtx
6750 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
6751 && pow2p_hwi (mask = nonzero_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0))))
6753 rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn), note = 0;
6755 if ((recog_for_combine (&pat, other_insn, &note) < 0
6756 && ! check_asm_operands (pat)))
6758 *cc_use = old_cc_use;
6759 other_changed = 0;
6761 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
6762 gen_int_mode (mask,
6763 GET_MODE (op0)));
6768 if (other_changed)
6769 undobuf.other_insn = other_insn;
6771 /* Don't generate a compare of a CC with 0, just use that CC. */
6772 if (GET_MODE (op0) == compare_mode && op1 == const0_rtx)
6774 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), op0);
6775 src = SET_SRC (x);
6777 /* Otherwise, if we didn't previously have the same COMPARE we
6778 want, create it from scratch. */
6779 else if (GET_CODE (src) != COMPARE || GET_MODE (src) != compare_mode
6780 || XEXP (src, 0) != op0 || XEXP (src, 1) != op1)
6782 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
6783 src = SET_SRC (x);
6786 else
6788 /* Get SET_SRC in a form where we have placed back any
6789 compound expressions. Then do the checks below. */
6790 src = make_compound_operation (src, SET);
6791 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), src);
6794 /* If we have (set x (subreg:m1 (op:m2 ...) 0)) with OP being some operation,
6795 and X being a REG or (subreg (reg)), we may be able to convert this to
6796 (set (subreg:m2 x) (op)).
6798 We can always do this if M1 is narrower than M2 because that means that
6799 we only care about the low bits of the result.
6801 However, on machines without WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS defined, we cannot
6802 perform a narrower operation than requested since the high-order bits will
6803 be undefined. On machine where it is defined, this transformation is safe
6804 as long as M1 and M2 have the same number of words. */
6806 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6807 && !OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (src))
6808 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1))
6809 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
6810 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6811 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))
6812 && (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
6813 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
6814 <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6815 #ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
6816 && ! (REG_P (dest) && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6817 && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (dest),
6818 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
6819 GET_MODE (src)))
6820 #endif
6821 && (REG_P (dest)
6822 || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6823 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (dest)))))
6825 SUBST (SET_DEST (x),
6826 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
6827 dest));
6828 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), SUBREG_REG (src));
6830 src = SET_SRC (x), dest = SET_DEST (x);
6833 /* If we have (set (cc0) (subreg ...)), we try to remove the subreg
6834 in SRC. */
6835 if (dest == cc0_rtx
6836 && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
6837 && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6838 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (src))
6839 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6841 rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (src);
6842 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
6844 /* Here we make sure that we don't have a sign bit on. */
6845 if (val_signbit_known_clear_p (GET_MODE (src),
6846 nonzero_bits (inner, inner_mode)))
6848 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), inner);
6849 src = SET_SRC (x);
6853 /* If we have (set FOO (subreg:M (mem:N BAR) 0)) with M wider than N, this
6854 would require a paradoxical subreg. Replace the subreg with a
6855 zero_extend to avoid the reload that would otherwise be required. */
6857 enum rtx_code extend_op;
6858 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (src)
6859 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (src))
6860 && (extend_op = load_extend_op (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))) != UNKNOWN)
6862 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
6863 gen_rtx_fmt_e (extend_op, GET_MODE (src), SUBREG_REG (src)));
6865 src = SET_SRC (x);
6868 /* If we don't have a conditional move, SET_SRC is an IF_THEN_ELSE, and we
6869 are comparing an item known to be 0 or -1 against 0, use a logical
6870 operation instead. Check for one of the arms being an IOR of the other
6871 arm with some value. We compute three terms to be IOR'ed together. In
6872 practice, at most two will be nonzero. Then we do the IOR's. */
6874 if (GET_CODE (dest) != PC
6875 && GET_CODE (src) == IF_THEN_ELSE
6876 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) == MODE_INT
6877 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == EQ || GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE)
6878 && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1) == const0_rtx
6879 && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))
6880 && (!HAVE_conditional_move
6881 || ! can_conditionally_move_p (GET_MODE (src)))
6882 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0),
6883 GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)))
6884 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))))
6885 && ! side_effects_p (src))
6887 rtx true_rtx = (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE
6888 ? XEXP (src, 1) : XEXP (src, 2));
6889 rtx false_rtx = (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE
6890 ? XEXP (src, 2) : XEXP (src, 1));
6891 rtx term1 = const0_rtx, term2, term3;
6893 if (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == IOR
6894 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx, 0), false_rtx))
6895 term1 = false_rtx, true_rtx = XEXP (true_rtx, 1), false_rtx = const0_rtx;
6896 else if (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == IOR
6897 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx, 1), false_rtx))
6898 term1 = false_rtx, true_rtx = XEXP (true_rtx, 0), false_rtx = const0_rtx;
6899 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx) == IOR
6900 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx, 0), true_rtx))
6901 term1 = true_rtx, false_rtx = XEXP (false_rtx, 1), true_rtx = const0_rtx;
6902 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx) == IOR
6903 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx, 1), true_rtx))
6904 term1 = true_rtx, false_rtx = XEXP (false_rtx, 0), true_rtx = const0_rtx;
6906 term2 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (src),
6907 XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0), true_rtx);
6908 term3 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (src),
6909 simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (src),
6910 XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0),
6911 GET_MODE (src)),
6912 false_rtx);
6914 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
6915 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (src),
6916 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (src),
6917 term1, term2),
6918 term3));
6920 src = SET_SRC (x);
6923 /* If either SRC or DEST is a CLOBBER of (const_int 0), make this
6924 whole thing fail. */
6925 if (GET_CODE (src) == CLOBBER && XEXP (src, 0) == const0_rtx)
6926 return src;
6927 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == CLOBBER && XEXP (dest, 0) == const0_rtx)
6928 return dest;
6929 else
6930 /* Convert this into a field assignment operation, if possible. */
6931 return make_field_assignment (x);
6934 /* Simplify, X, and AND, IOR, or XOR operation, and return the simplified
6935 result. */
6937 static rtx
6938 simplify_logical (rtx x)
6940 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
6941 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6942 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6944 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6946 case AND:
6947 /* We can call simplify_and_const_int only if we don't lose
6948 any (sign) bits when converting INTVAL (op1) to
6949 "unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT". */
6950 if (CONST_INT_P (op1)
6951 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6952 || INTVAL (op1) > 0))
6954 x = simplify_and_const_int (x, mode, op0, INTVAL (op1));
6955 if (GET_CODE (x) != AND)
6956 return x;
6958 op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6959 op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6962 /* If we have any of (and (ior A B) C) or (and (xor A B) C),
6963 apply the distributive law and then the inverse distributive
6964 law to see if things simplify. */
6965 if (GET_CODE (op0) == IOR || GET_CODE (op0) == XOR)
6967 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6968 if (result)
6969 return result;
6971 if (GET_CODE (op1) == IOR || GET_CODE (op1) == XOR)
6973 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 1);
6974 if (result)
6975 return result;
6977 break;
6979 case IOR:
6980 /* If we have (ior (and A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
6981 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */
6983 if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND)
6985 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6986 if (result)
6987 return result;
6990 if (GET_CODE (op1) == AND)
6992 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 1);
6993 if (result)
6994 return result;
6996 break;
6998 default:
6999 gcc_unreachable ();
7002 return x;
7005 /* We consider ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, and SIGN_EXTEND as "compound
7006 operations" because they can be replaced with two more basic operations.
7007 ZERO_EXTEND is also considered "compound" because it can be replaced with
7008 an AND operation, which is simpler, though only one operation.
7010 The function expand_compound_operation is called with an rtx expression
7011 and will convert it to the appropriate shifts and AND operations,
7012 simplifying at each stage.
7014 The function make_compound_operation is called to convert an expression
7015 consisting of shifts and ANDs into the equivalent compound expression.
7016 It is the inverse of this function, loosely speaking. */
7018 static rtx
7019 expand_compound_operation (rtx x)
7021 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT pos = 0, len;
7022 int unsignedp = 0;
7023 unsigned int modewidth;
7024 rtx tem;
7026 switch (GET_CODE (x))
7028 case ZERO_EXTEND:
7029 unsignedp = 1;
7030 /* FALLTHRU */
7031 case SIGN_EXTEND:
7032 /* We can't necessarily use a const_int for a multiword mode;
7033 it depends on implicitly extending the value.
7034 Since we don't know the right way to extend it,
7035 we can't tell whether the implicit way is right.
7037 Even for a mode that is no wider than a const_int,
7038 we can't win, because we need to sign extend one of its bits through
7039 the rest of it, and we don't know which bit. */
7040 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
7041 return x;
7043 /* Return if (subreg:MODE FROM 0) is not a safe replacement for
7044 (zero_extend:MODE FROM) or (sign_extend:MODE FROM). It is for any MEM
7045 because (SUBREG (MEM...)) is guaranteed to cause the MEM to be
7046 reloaded. If not for that, MEM's would very rarely be safe.
7048 Reject MODEs bigger than a word, because we might not be able
7049 to reference a two-register group starting with an arbitrary register
7050 (and currently gen_lowpart might crash for a SUBREG). */
7052 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
7053 return x;
7055 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7056 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7058 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7059 return x;
7061 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
7062 /* If the inner object has VOIDmode (the only way this can happen
7063 is if it is an ASM_OPERANDS), we can't do anything since we don't
7064 know how much masking to do. */
7065 if (len == 0)
7066 return x;
7068 break;
7070 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
7071 unsignedp = 1;
7073 /* fall through */
7075 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
7076 /* If the operand is a CLOBBER, just return it. */
7077 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
7078 return XEXP (x, 0);
7080 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7081 || !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 2))
7082 || GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == VOIDmode)
7083 return x;
7085 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7086 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7088 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7089 return x;
7091 len = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
7092 pos = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 2));
7094 /* This should stay within the object being extracted, fail otherwise. */
7095 if (len + pos > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7096 return x;
7098 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7099 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) - len - pos;
7101 break;
7103 default:
7104 return x;
7106 /* Convert sign extension to zero extension, if we know that the high
7107 bit is not set, as this is easier to optimize. It will be converted
7108 back to cheaper alternative in make_extraction. */
7109 if (GET_CODE (x) == SIGN_EXTEND
7110 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7111 && ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7112 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
7113 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7114 >> 1))
7115 == 0)))
7117 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7118 rtx temp = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
7119 rtx temp2 = expand_compound_operation (temp);
7121 /* Make sure this is a profitable operation. */
7122 if (set_src_cost (x, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7123 > set_src_cost (temp2, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7124 return temp2;
7125 else if (set_src_cost (x, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7126 > set_src_cost (temp, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7127 return temp;
7128 else
7129 return x;
7132 /* We can optimize some special cases of ZERO_EXTEND. */
7133 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
7135 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI if we
7136 know that the last value didn't have any inappropriate bits
7137 set. */
7138 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7139 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x)
7140 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7141 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), GET_MODE (x))
7142 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7143 return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7145 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7146 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7147 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == GET_MODE (x)
7148 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7149 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7150 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), GET_MODE (x))
7151 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7152 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7154 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI when foo
7155 is a comparison and STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. This is like
7156 the first case, but it works even when GET_MODE (x) is larger
7157 than HOST_WIDE_INT. */
7158 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7159 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x)
7160 && COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
7161 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7162 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7163 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7164 return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7166 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7167 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7168 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == GET_MODE (x)
7169 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7170 && COMPARISON_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))
7171 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7172 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7173 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7174 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7178 /* If we reach here, we want to return a pair of shifts. The inner
7179 shift is a left shift of BITSIZE - POS - LEN bits. The outer
7180 shift is a right shift of BITSIZE - LEN bits. It is arithmetic or
7181 logical depending on the value of UNSIGNEDP.
7183 If this was a ZERO_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTRACT, this pair of shifts will be
7184 converted into an AND of a shift.
7186 We must check for the case where the left shift would have a negative
7187 count. This can happen in a case like (x >> 31) & 255 on machines
7188 that can't shift by a constant. On those machines, we would first
7189 combine the shift with the AND to produce a variable-position
7190 extraction. Then the constant of 31 would be substituted in
7191 to produce such a position. */
7193 modewidth = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x));
7194 if (modewidth >= pos + len)
7196 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7197 tem = gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
7198 if (!tem || GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
7199 return x;
7200 tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
7201 tem, modewidth - pos - len);
7202 tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT,
7203 mode, tem, modewidth - len);
7205 else if (unsignedp && len < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7206 tem = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (x),
7207 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT,
7208 GET_MODE (x),
7209 XEXP (x, 0), pos),
7210 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1);
7211 else
7212 /* Any other cases we can't handle. */
7213 return x;
7215 /* If we couldn't do this for some reason, return the original
7216 expression. */
7217 if (GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
7218 return x;
7220 return tem;
7223 /* X is a SET which contains an assignment of one object into
7224 a part of another (such as a bit-field assignment, STRICT_LOW_PART,
7225 or certain SUBREGS). If possible, convert it into a series of
7226 logical operations.
7228 We half-heartedly support variable positions, but do not at all
7229 support variable lengths. */
7231 static const_rtx
7232 expand_field_assignment (const_rtx x)
7234 rtx inner;
7235 rtx pos; /* Always counts from low bit. */
7236 int len;
7237 rtx mask, cleared, masked;
7238 machine_mode compute_mode;
7240 /* Loop until we find something we can't simplify. */
7241 while (1)
7243 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7244 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)) == SUBREG)
7246 inner = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0));
7247 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)));
7248 pos = GEN_INT (subreg_lsb (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)));
7250 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
7251 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)))
7253 inner = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0);
7254 len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1));
7255 pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2);
7257 /* A constant position should stay within the width of INNER. */
7258 if (CONST_INT_P (pos)
7259 && INTVAL (pos) + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
7260 break;
7262 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7264 if (CONST_INT_P (pos))
7265 pos = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len
7266 - INTVAL (pos));
7267 else if (GET_CODE (pos) == MINUS
7268 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (pos, 1))
7269 && (INTVAL (XEXP (pos, 1))
7270 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len))
7271 /* If position is ADJUST - X, new position is X. */
7272 pos = XEXP (pos, 0);
7273 else
7275 HOST_WIDE_INT prec = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner));
7276 pos = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, GET_MODE (pos),
7277 gen_int_mode (prec - len,
7278 GET_MODE (pos)),
7279 pos);
7284 /* A SUBREG between two modes that occupy the same numbers of words
7285 can be done by moving the SUBREG to the source. */
7286 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7287 /* We need SUBREGs to compute nonzero_bits properly. */
7288 && nonzero_sign_valid
7289 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)))
7290 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7291 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))))
7292 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
7294 x = gen_rtx_SET (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)),
7295 gen_lowpart
7296 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))),
7297 SET_SRC (x)));
7298 continue;
7300 else
7301 break;
7303 while (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner))
7304 inner = SUBREG_REG (inner);
7306 compute_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7308 /* Don't attempt bitwise arithmetic on non scalar integer modes. */
7309 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (compute_mode))
7311 machine_mode imode;
7313 /* Don't do anything for vector or complex integral types. */
7314 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (compute_mode))
7315 break;
7317 /* Try to find an integral mode to pun with. */
7318 imode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (compute_mode), MODE_INT, 0);
7319 if (imode == BLKmode)
7320 break;
7322 compute_mode = imode;
7323 inner = gen_lowpart (imode, inner);
7326 /* Compute a mask of LEN bits, if we can do this on the host machine. */
7327 if (len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7328 break;
7330 /* Don't try to compute in too wide unsupported modes. */
7331 if (!targetm.scalar_mode_supported_p (compute_mode))
7332 break;
7334 /* Now compute the equivalent expression. Make a copy of INNER
7335 for the SET_DEST in case it is a MEM into which we will substitute;
7336 we don't want shared RTL in that case. */
7337 mask = gen_int_mode ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1,
7338 compute_mode);
7339 cleared = simplify_gen_binary (AND, compute_mode,
7340 simplify_gen_unary (NOT, compute_mode,
7341 simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT,
7342 compute_mode,
7343 mask, pos),
7344 compute_mode),
7345 inner);
7346 masked = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, compute_mode,
7347 simplify_gen_binary (
7348 AND, compute_mode,
7349 gen_lowpart (compute_mode, SET_SRC (x)),
7350 mask),
7351 pos);
7353 x = gen_rtx_SET (copy_rtx (inner),
7354 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, compute_mode,
7355 cleared, masked));
7358 return x;
7361 /* Return an RTX for a reference to LEN bits of INNER. If POS_RTX is nonzero,
7362 it is an RTX that represents the (variable) starting position; otherwise,
7363 POS is the (constant) starting bit position. Both are counted from the LSB.
7365 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero for an unsigned reference and zero for a signed one.
7367 IN_DEST is nonzero if this is a reference in the destination of a SET.
7368 This is used when a ZERO_ or SIGN_EXTRACT isn't needed. If nonzero,
7369 a STRICT_LOW_PART will be used, if zero, ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND will
7370 be used.
7372 IN_COMPARE is nonzero if we are in a COMPARE. This means that a
7373 ZERO_EXTRACT should be built even for bits starting at bit 0.
7375 MODE is the desired mode of the result (if IN_DEST == 0).
7377 The result is an RTX for the extraction or NULL_RTX if the target
7378 can't handle it. */
7380 static rtx
7381 make_extraction (machine_mode mode, rtx inner, HOST_WIDE_INT pos,
7382 rtx pos_rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, int unsignedp,
7383 int in_dest, int in_compare)
7385 /* This mode describes the size of the storage area
7386 to fetch the overall value from. Within that, we
7387 ignore the POS lowest bits, etc. */
7388 machine_mode is_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7389 machine_mode inner_mode;
7390 machine_mode wanted_inner_mode;
7391 machine_mode wanted_inner_reg_mode = word_mode;
7392 machine_mode pos_mode = word_mode;
7393 machine_mode extraction_mode = word_mode;
7394 machine_mode tmode = mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT, 1);
7395 rtx new_rtx = 0;
7396 rtx orig_pos_rtx = pos_rtx;
7397 HOST_WIDE_INT orig_pos;
7399 if (pos_rtx && CONST_INT_P (pos_rtx))
7400 pos = INTVAL (pos_rtx), pos_rtx = 0;
7402 if (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner))
7404 /* If going from (subreg:SI (mem:QI ...)) to (mem:QI ...),
7405 consider just the QI as the memory to extract from.
7406 The subreg adds or removes high bits; its mode is
7407 irrelevant to the meaning of this extraction,
7408 since POS and LEN count from the lsb. */
7409 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (inner)))
7410 is_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner));
7411 inner = SUBREG_REG (inner);
7413 else if (GET_CODE (inner) == ASHIFT
7414 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
7415 && pos_rtx == 0 && pos == 0
7416 && len > UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)))
7418 /* We're extracting the least significant bits of an rtx
7419 (ashift X (const_int C)), where LEN > C. Extract the
7420 least significant (LEN - C) bits of X, giving an rtx
7421 whose mode is MODE, then shift it left C times. */
7422 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (inner, 0),
7423 0, 0, len - INTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)),
7424 unsignedp, in_dest, in_compare);
7425 if (new_rtx != 0)
7426 return gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode, new_rtx, XEXP (inner, 1));
7428 else if (GET_CODE (inner) == TRUNCATE)
7429 inner = XEXP (inner, 0);
7431 inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7433 /* See if this can be done without an extraction. We never can if the
7434 width of the field is not the same as that of some integer mode. For
7435 registers, we can only avoid the extraction if the position is at the
7436 low-order bit and this is either not in the destination or we have the
7437 appropriate STRICT_LOW_PART operation available.
7439 For MEM, we can avoid an extract if the field starts on an appropriate
7440 boundary and we can change the mode of the memory reference. */
7442 if (tmode != BLKmode
7443 && ((pos_rtx == 0 && (pos % BITS_PER_WORD) == 0
7444 && !MEM_P (inner)
7445 && (pos == 0 || REG_P (inner))
7446 && (inner_mode == tmode
7447 || !REG_P (inner)
7448 || TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (tmode, inner_mode)
7449 || reg_truncated_to_mode (tmode, inner))
7450 && (! in_dest
7451 || (REG_P (inner)
7452 && have_insn_for (STRICT_LOW_PART, tmode))))
7453 || (MEM_P (inner) && pos_rtx == 0
7454 && (pos
7455 % (STRICT_ALIGNMENT ? GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)
7456 : BITS_PER_UNIT)) == 0
7457 /* We can't do this if we are widening INNER_MODE (it
7458 may not be aligned, for one thing). */
7459 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode) >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
7460 && (inner_mode == tmode
7461 || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0),
7462 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner))
7463 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner))))))
7465 /* If INNER is a MEM, make a new MEM that encompasses just the desired
7466 field. If the original and current mode are the same, we need not
7467 adjust the offset. Otherwise, we do if bytes big endian.
7469 If INNER is not a MEM, get a piece consisting of just the field
7470 of interest (in this case POS % BITS_PER_WORD must be 0). */
7472 if (MEM_P (inner))
7474 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
7476 /* POS counts from lsb, but make OFFSET count in memory order. */
7477 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
7478 offset = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode) - len - pos) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
7479 else
7480 offset = pos / BITS_PER_UNIT;
7482 new_rtx = adjust_address_nv (inner, tmode, offset);
7484 else if (REG_P (inner))
7486 if (tmode != inner_mode)
7488 /* We can't call gen_lowpart in a DEST since we
7489 always want a SUBREG (see below) and it would sometimes
7490 return a new hard register. */
7491 if (pos || in_dest)
7493 HOST_WIDE_INT final_word = pos / BITS_PER_WORD;
7495 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
7496 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
7497 final_word = ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
7498 - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode))
7499 / UNITS_PER_WORD) - final_word;
7501 final_word *= UNITS_PER_WORD;
7502 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN &&
7503 GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode))
7504 final_word += (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
7505 - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode)) % UNITS_PER_WORD;
7507 /* Avoid creating invalid subregs, for example when
7508 simplifying (x>>32)&255. */
7509 if (!validate_subreg (tmode, inner_mode, inner, final_word))
7510 return NULL_RTX;
7512 new_rtx = gen_rtx_SUBREG (tmode, inner, final_word);
7514 else
7515 new_rtx = gen_lowpart (tmode, inner);
7517 else
7518 new_rtx = inner;
7520 else
7521 new_rtx = force_to_mode (inner, tmode,
7522 len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7523 ? HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
7524 : (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1, 0);
7526 /* If this extraction is going into the destination of a SET,
7527 make a STRICT_LOW_PART unless we made a MEM. */
7529 if (in_dest)
7530 return (MEM_P (new_rtx) ? new_rtx
7531 : (GET_CODE (new_rtx) != SUBREG
7532 ? gen_rtx_CLOBBER (tmode, const0_rtx)
7533 : gen_rtx_STRICT_LOW_PART (VOIDmode, new_rtx)));
7535 if (mode == tmode)
7536 return new_rtx;
7538 if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx))
7539 return simplify_unary_operation (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND,
7540 mode, new_rtx, tmode);
7542 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7543 bit is not set, convert the extraction to the cheaper of
7544 sign and zero extension, that are equivalent in these cases. */
7545 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7546 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode)
7547 && ((nonzero_bits (new_rtx, tmode)
7548 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)) >> 1))
7549 == 0)))
7551 rtx temp = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode, new_rtx);
7552 rtx temp1 = gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (mode, new_rtx);
7554 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7555 backends. */
7556 if (set_src_cost (temp, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7557 <= set_src_cost (temp1, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7558 return temp;
7559 return temp1;
7562 /* Otherwise, sign- or zero-extend unless we already are in the
7563 proper mode. */
7565 return (gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND,
7566 mode, new_rtx));
7569 /* Unless this is a COMPARE or we have a funny memory reference,
7570 don't do anything with zero-extending field extracts starting at
7571 the low-order bit since they are simple AND operations. */
7572 if (pos_rtx == 0 && pos == 0 && ! in_dest
7573 && ! in_compare && unsignedp)
7574 return 0;
7576 /* Unless INNER is not MEM, reject this if we would be spanning bytes or
7577 if the position is not a constant and the length is not 1. In all
7578 other cases, we would only be going outside our object in cases when
7579 an original shift would have been undefined. */
7580 if (MEM_P (inner)
7581 && ((pos_rtx == 0 && pos + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode))
7582 || (pos_rtx != 0 && len != 1)))
7583 return 0;
7585 enum extraction_pattern pattern = (in_dest ? EP_insv
7586 : unsignedp ? EP_extzv : EP_extv);
7588 /* If INNER is not from memory, we want it to have the mode of a register
7589 extraction pattern's structure operand, or word_mode if there is no
7590 such pattern. The same applies to extraction_mode and pos_mode
7591 and their respective operands.
7593 For memory, assume that the desired extraction_mode and pos_mode
7594 are the same as for a register operation, since at present we don't
7595 have named patterns for aligned memory structures. */
7596 struct extraction_insn insn;
7597 if (get_best_reg_extraction_insn (&insn, pattern,
7598 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode), mode))
7600 wanted_inner_reg_mode = insn.struct_mode;
7601 pos_mode = insn.pos_mode;
7602 extraction_mode = insn.field_mode;
7605 /* Never narrow an object, since that might not be safe. */
7607 if (mode != VOIDmode
7608 && GET_MODE_SIZE (extraction_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
7609 extraction_mode = mode;
7611 if (!MEM_P (inner))
7612 wanted_inner_mode = wanted_inner_reg_mode;
7613 else
7615 /* Be careful not to go beyond the extracted object and maintain the
7616 natural alignment of the memory. */
7617 wanted_inner_mode = smallest_mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT);
7618 while (pos % GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode) + len
7619 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode))
7621 wanted_inner_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wanted_inner_mode);
7622 gcc_assert (wanted_inner_mode != VOIDmode);
7626 orig_pos = pos;
7628 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7630 /* POS is passed as if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0, so we need to convert it to
7631 BITS_BIG_ENDIAN style. If position is constant, compute new
7632 position. Otherwise, build subtraction.
7633 Note that POS is relative to the mode of the original argument.
7634 If it's a MEM we need to recompute POS relative to that.
7635 However, if we're extracting from (or inserting into) a register,
7636 we want to recompute POS relative to wanted_inner_mode. */
7637 int width = (MEM_P (inner)
7638 ? GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode)
7639 : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode));
7641 if (pos_rtx == 0)
7642 pos = width - len - pos;
7643 else
7644 pos_rtx
7645 = gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (pos_rtx),
7646 gen_int_mode (width - len, GET_MODE (pos_rtx)),
7647 pos_rtx);
7648 /* POS may be less than 0 now, but we check for that below.
7649 Note that it can only be less than 0 if !MEM_P (inner). */
7652 /* If INNER has a wider mode, and this is a constant extraction, try to
7653 make it smaller and adjust the byte to point to the byte containing
7654 the value. */
7655 if (wanted_inner_mode != VOIDmode
7656 && inner_mode != wanted_inner_mode
7657 && ! pos_rtx
7658 && GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)
7659 && MEM_P (inner)
7660 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner))
7661 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner))
7663 int offset = 0;
7665 /* The computations below will be correct if the machine is big
7666 endian in both bits and bytes or little endian in bits and bytes.
7667 If it is mixed, we must adjust. */
7669 /* If bytes are big endian and we had a paradoxical SUBREG, we must
7670 adjust OFFSET to compensate. */
7671 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7672 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode))
7673 offset -= GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode);
7675 /* We can now move to the desired byte. */
7676 offset += (pos / GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode))
7677 * GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode);
7678 pos %= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode);
7680 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
7681 && is_mode != wanted_inner_mode)
7682 offset = (GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)
7683 - GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode) - offset);
7685 inner = adjust_address_nv (inner, wanted_inner_mode, offset);
7688 /* If INNER is not memory, get it into the proper mode. If we are changing
7689 its mode, POS must be a constant and smaller than the size of the new
7690 mode. */
7691 else if (!MEM_P (inner))
7693 /* On the LHS, don't create paradoxical subregs implicitely truncating
7694 the register unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION. */
7695 if (in_dest
7696 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (GET_MODE (inner),
7697 wanted_inner_mode))
7698 return NULL_RTX;
7700 if (GET_MODE (inner) != wanted_inner_mode
7701 && (pos_rtx != 0
7702 || orig_pos + len > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode)))
7703 return NULL_RTX;
7705 if (orig_pos < 0)
7706 return NULL_RTX;
7708 inner = force_to_mode (inner, wanted_inner_mode,
7709 pos_rtx
7710 || len + orig_pos >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7711 ? HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
7712 : (((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1)
7713 << orig_pos),
7717 /* Adjust mode of POS_RTX, if needed. If we want a wider mode, we
7718 have to zero extend. Otherwise, we can just use a SUBREG. */
7719 if (pos_rtx != 0
7720 && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx)))
7722 rtx temp = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx,
7723 GET_MODE (pos_rtx));
7725 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7726 bit is not set, convert extraction to cheaper one - either
7727 SIGN_EXTENSION or ZERO_EXTENSION, that are equivalent in these
7728 cases. */
7729 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7730 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (pos_rtx))
7731 && ((nonzero_bits (pos_rtx, GET_MODE (pos_rtx))
7732 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
7733 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (pos_rtx)))
7734 >> 1))
7735 == 0)))
7737 rtx temp1 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx,
7738 GET_MODE (pos_rtx));
7740 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7741 backends. */
7742 if (set_src_cost (temp1, pos_mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7743 < set_src_cost (temp, pos_mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7744 temp = temp1;
7746 pos_rtx = temp;
7749 /* Make POS_RTX unless we already have it and it is correct. If we don't
7750 have a POS_RTX but we do have an ORIG_POS_RTX, the latter must
7751 be a CONST_INT. */
7752 if (pos_rtx == 0 && orig_pos_rtx != 0 && INTVAL (orig_pos_rtx) == pos)
7753 pos_rtx = orig_pos_rtx;
7755 else if (pos_rtx == 0)
7756 pos_rtx = GEN_INT (pos);
7758 /* Make the required operation. See if we can use existing rtx. */
7759 new_rtx = gen_rtx_fmt_eee (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTRACT : SIGN_EXTRACT,
7760 extraction_mode, inner, GEN_INT (len), pos_rtx);
7761 if (! in_dest)
7762 new_rtx = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7764 return new_rtx;
7767 /* See if X contains an ASHIFT of COUNT or more bits that can be commuted
7768 with any other operations in X. Return X without that shift if so. */
7770 static rtx
7771 extract_left_shift (rtx x, int count)
7773 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7774 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7775 rtx tem;
7777 switch (code)
7779 case ASHIFT:
7780 /* This is the shift itself. If it is wide enough, we will return
7781 either the value being shifted if the shift count is equal to
7782 COUNT or a shift for the difference. */
7783 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7784 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= count)
7785 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
7786 INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) - count);
7787 break;
7789 case NEG: case NOT:
7790 if ((tem = extract_left_shift (XEXP (x, 0), count)) != 0)
7791 return simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, tem, mode);
7793 break;
7795 case PLUS: case IOR: case XOR: case AND:
7796 /* If we can safely shift this constant and we find the inner shift,
7797 make a new operation. */
7798 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7799 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
7800 & (((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << count)) - 1)) == 0
7801 && (tem = extract_left_shift (XEXP (x, 0), count)) != 0)
7803 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >> count;
7804 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, tem,
7805 gen_int_mode (val, mode));
7807 break;
7809 default:
7810 break;
7813 return 0;
7816 /* Subroutine of make_compound_operation. *X_PTR is the rtx at the current
7817 level of the expression and MODE is its mode. IN_CODE is as for
7818 make_compound_operation. *NEXT_CODE_PTR is the value of IN_CODE
7819 that should be used when recursing on operands of *X_PTR.
7821 There are two possible actions:
7823 - Return null. This tells the caller to recurse on *X_PTR with IN_CODE
7824 equal to *NEXT_CODE_PTR, after which *X_PTR holds the final value.
7826 - Return a new rtx, which the caller returns directly. */
7828 static rtx
7829 make_compound_operation_int (machine_mode mode, rtx *x_ptr,
7830 enum rtx_code in_code,
7831 enum rtx_code *next_code_ptr)
7833 rtx x = *x_ptr;
7834 enum rtx_code next_code = *next_code_ptr;
7835 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7836 int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
7837 rtx rhs, lhs;
7838 rtx new_rtx = 0;
7839 int i;
7840 rtx tem;
7841 bool equality_comparison = false;
7843 if (in_code == EQ)
7845 equality_comparison = true;
7846 in_code = COMPARE;
7849 /* Process depending on the code of this operation. If NEW is set
7850 nonzero, it will be returned. */
7852 switch (code)
7854 case ASHIFT:
7855 /* Convert shifts by constants into multiplications if inside
7856 an address. */
7857 if (in_code == MEM && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7858 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7859 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0)
7861 HOST_WIDE_INT count = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
7862 HOST_WIDE_INT multval = HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << count;
7864 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
7865 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == NEG)
7867 new_rtx = XEXP (new_rtx, 0);
7868 multval = -multval;
7870 multval = trunc_int_for_mode (multval, mode);
7871 new_rtx = gen_rtx_MULT (mode, new_rtx, gen_int_mode (multval, mode));
7873 break;
7875 case PLUS:
7876 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7877 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7878 lhs = make_compound_operation (lhs, next_code);
7879 rhs = make_compound_operation (rhs, next_code);
7880 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 0)) == NEG)
7882 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (lhs, 0), 0),
7883 XEXP (lhs, 1));
7884 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, rhs, tem);
7886 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
7887 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < 0))
7889 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (lhs, 0),
7890 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
7891 XEXP (lhs, 1),
7892 mode));
7893 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, rhs, tem);
7895 else
7897 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), lhs);
7898 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), rhs);
7900 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x);
7901 return x;
7903 case MINUS:
7904 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7905 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7906 lhs = make_compound_operation (lhs, next_code);
7907 rhs = make_compound_operation (rhs, next_code);
7908 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 0)) == NEG)
7910 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (rhs, 0), 0),
7911 XEXP (rhs, 1));
7912 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, tem, lhs);
7914 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
7915 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < 0))
7917 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (rhs, 0),
7918 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
7919 XEXP (rhs, 1),
7920 mode));
7921 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, tem, lhs);
7923 else
7925 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), lhs);
7926 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), rhs);
7927 return x;
7930 case AND:
7931 /* If the second operand is not a constant, we can't do anything
7932 with it. */
7933 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
7934 break;
7936 /* If the constant is a power of two minus one and the first operand
7937 is a logical right shift, make an extraction. */
7938 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7939 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7941 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code);
7942 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), i, 1,
7943 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7946 /* Same as previous, but for (subreg (lshiftrt ...)) in first op. */
7947 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7948 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7949 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == LSHIFTRT
7950 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7952 rtx inner_x0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7953 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner_x0);
7954 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (inner_x0, 0), next_code);
7955 new_rtx = make_extraction (inner_mode, new_rtx, 0,
7956 XEXP (inner_x0, 1),
7957 i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7959 /* If we narrowed the mode when dropping the subreg, then we lose. */
7960 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
7961 new_rtx = NULL;
7963 /* If that didn't give anything, see if the AND simplifies on
7964 its own. */
7965 if (!new_rtx && i >= 0)
7967 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
7968 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, NULL_RTX, i, 1,
7969 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7972 /* Same as previous, but for (xor/ior (lshiftrt...) (lshiftrt...)). */
7973 else if ((GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR
7974 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR)
7975 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7976 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == LSHIFTRT
7977 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7979 /* Apply the distributive law, and then try to make extractions. */
7980 new_rtx = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)), mode,
7981 gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
7982 XEXP (x, 1)),
7983 gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1),
7984 XEXP (x, 1)));
7985 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (new_rtx, in_code);
7988 /* If we are have (and (rotate X C) M) and C is larger than the number
7989 of bits in M, this is an extraction. */
7991 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE
7992 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
7993 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0
7994 && i <= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
7996 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code);
7997 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx,
7998 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
7999 - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))),
8000 NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8003 /* On machines without logical shifts, if the operand of the AND is
8004 a logical shift and our mask turns off all the propagated sign
8005 bits, we can replace the logical shift with an arithmetic shift. */
8006 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8007 && !have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT, mode)
8008 && have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT, mode)
8009 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8010 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8011 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8012 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8014 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
8016 mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8017 if ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~mask) == 0)
8018 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
8019 gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode,
8020 make_compound_operation
8021 (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code),
8022 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)));
8025 /* If the constant is one less than a power of two, this might be
8026 representable by an extraction even if no shift is present.
8027 If it doesn't end up being a ZERO_EXTEND, we will ignore it unless
8028 we are in a COMPARE. */
8029 else if ((i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
8030 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode,
8031 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
8032 next_code),
8033 0, NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8035 /* If we are in a comparison and this is an AND with a power of two,
8036 convert this into the appropriate bit extract. */
8037 else if (in_code == COMPARE
8038 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0
8039 && (equality_comparison || i < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1))
8040 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode,
8041 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
8042 next_code),
8043 i, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 1);
8045 /* If the one operand is a paradoxical subreg of a register or memory and
8046 the constant (limited to the smaller mode) has only zero bits where
8047 the sub expression has known zero bits, this can be expressed as
8048 a zero_extend. */
8049 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG)
8051 rtx sub;
8053 sub = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
8054 machine_mode sub_mode = GET_MODE (sub);
8055 if ((REG_P (sub) || MEM_P (sub))
8056 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (sub_mode) < mode_width)
8058 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mode_mask = GET_MODE_MASK (sub_mode);
8059 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
8061 /* original AND constant with all the known zero bits set */
8062 mask = UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) | (~nonzero_bits (sub, sub_mode));
8063 if ((mask & mode_mask) == mode_mask)
8065 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (sub, next_code);
8066 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, 0,
8067 GET_MODE_PRECISION (sub_mode),
8068 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8073 break;
8075 case LSHIFTRT:
8076 /* If the sign bit is known to be zero, replace this with an
8077 arithmetic shift. */
8078 if (have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT, mode)
8079 && ! have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT, mode)
8080 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8081 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) & (1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0)
8083 new_rtx = gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode,
8084 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
8085 next_code),
8086 XEXP (x, 1));
8087 break;
8090 /* fall through */
8092 case ASHIFTRT:
8093 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
8094 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
8096 /* If we have (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) with C2 >= C1,
8097 this is a SIGN_EXTRACT. */
8098 if (CONST_INT_P (rhs)
8099 && GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
8100 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
8101 && INTVAL (rhs) >= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1))
8102 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
8103 && INTVAL (rhs) < mode_width)
8105 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (lhs, 0), next_code);
8106 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx,
8107 INTVAL (rhs) - INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)),
8108 NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (rhs),
8109 code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8110 break;
8113 /* See if we have operations between an ASHIFTRT and an ASHIFT.
8114 If so, try to merge the shifts into a SIGN_EXTEND. We could
8115 also do this for some cases of SIGN_EXTRACT, but it doesn't
8116 seem worth the effort; the case checked for occurs on Alpha. */
8118 if (!OBJECT_P (lhs)
8119 && ! (GET_CODE (lhs) == SUBREG
8120 && (OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (lhs))))
8121 && CONST_INT_P (rhs)
8122 && INTVAL (rhs) >= 0
8123 && INTVAL (rhs) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8124 && INTVAL (rhs) < mode_width
8125 && (new_rtx = extract_left_shift (lhs, INTVAL (rhs))) != 0)
8126 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, make_compound_operation (new_rtx, next_code),
8127 0, NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (rhs),
8128 code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8130 break;
8132 case SUBREG:
8133 /* Call ourselves recursively on the inner expression. If we are
8134 narrowing the object and it has a different RTL code from
8135 what it originally did, do this SUBREG as a force_to_mode. */
8137 rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (x), simplified;
8138 enum rtx_code subreg_code = in_code;
8140 /* If the SUBREG is masking of a logical right shift,
8141 make an extraction. */
8142 if (GET_CODE (inner) == LSHIFTRT
8143 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
8144 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8145 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1))
8146 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
8147 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
8149 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (inner, 0), next_code);
8150 int width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner))
8151 - INTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1));
8152 if (width > mode_width)
8153 width = mode_width;
8154 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, XEXP (inner, 1),
8155 width, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8156 break;
8159 /* If in_code is COMPARE, it isn't always safe to pass it through
8160 to the recursive make_compound_operation call. */
8161 if (subreg_code == COMPARE
8162 && (!subreg_lowpart_p (x)
8163 || GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG
8164 /* (subreg:SI (and:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 0x800000000)) 0)
8165 is (const_int 0), rather than
8166 (subreg:SI (lshiftrt:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 35)) 0).
8167 Similarly (subreg:QI (and:SI (reg:SI) (const_int 0x80)) 0)
8168 for non-equality comparisons against 0 is not equivalent
8169 to (subreg:QI (lshiftrt:SI (reg:SI) (const_int 7)) 0). */
8170 || (GET_CODE (inner) == AND
8171 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
8172 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8173 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)))
8174 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)))
8175 subreg_code = SET;
8177 tem = make_compound_operation (inner, subreg_code);
8179 simplified
8180 = simplify_subreg (mode, tem, GET_MODE (inner), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
8181 if (simplified)
8182 tem = simplified;
8184 if (GET_CODE (tem) != GET_CODE (inner)
8185 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8186 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
8188 rtx newer
8189 = force_to_mode (tem, mode, HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U, 0);
8191 /* If we have something other than a SUBREG, we might have
8192 done an expansion, so rerun ourselves. */
8193 if (GET_CODE (newer) != SUBREG)
8194 newer = make_compound_operation (newer, in_code);
8196 /* force_to_mode can expand compounds. If it just re-expanded the
8197 compound, use gen_lowpart to convert to the desired mode. */
8198 if (rtx_equal_p (newer, x)
8199 /* Likewise if it re-expanded the compound only partially.
8200 This happens for SUBREG of ZERO_EXTRACT if they extract
8201 the same number of bits. */
8202 || (GET_CODE (newer) == SUBREG
8203 && (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer)) == LSHIFTRT
8204 || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer)) == ASHIFTRT)
8205 && GET_CODE (inner) == AND
8206 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (newer), XEXP (inner, 0))))
8207 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), tem);
8209 return newer;
8212 if (simplified)
8213 return tem;
8215 break;
8217 default:
8218 break;
8221 if (new_rtx)
8222 *x_ptr = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
8223 *next_code_ptr = next_code;
8224 return NULL_RTX;
8227 /* Look at the expression rooted at X. Look for expressions
8228 equivalent to ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, ZERO_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTEND.
8229 Form these expressions.
8231 Return the new rtx, usually just X.
8233 Also, for machines like the VAX that don't have logical shift insns,
8234 try to convert logical to arithmetic shift operations in cases where
8235 they are equivalent. This undoes the canonicalizations to logical
8236 shifts done elsewhere.
8238 We try, as much as possible, to re-use rtl expressions to save memory.
8240 IN_CODE says what kind of expression we are processing. Normally, it is
8241 SET. In a memory address it is MEM. When processing the arguments of
8242 a comparison or a COMPARE against zero, it is COMPARE, or EQ if more
8243 precisely it is an equality comparison against zero. */
8246 make_compound_operation (rtx x, enum rtx_code in_code)
8248 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8249 const char *fmt;
8250 int i, j;
8251 enum rtx_code next_code;
8252 rtx new_rtx, tem;
8254 /* Select the code to be used in recursive calls. Once we are inside an
8255 address, we stay there. If we have a comparison, set to COMPARE,
8256 but once inside, go back to our default of SET. */
8258 next_code = (code == MEM ? MEM
8259 : ((code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
8260 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx) ? COMPARE
8261 : in_code == COMPARE || in_code == EQ ? SET : in_code);
8263 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8265 rtx new_rtx = make_compound_operation_int (GET_MODE (x), &x,
8266 in_code, &next_code);
8267 if (new_rtx)
8268 return new_rtx;
8269 code = GET_CODE (x);
8272 /* Now recursively process each operand of this operation. We need to
8273 handle ZERO_EXTEND specially so that we don't lose track of the
8274 inner mode. */
8275 if (code == ZERO_EXTEND)
8277 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
8278 tem = simplify_const_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
8279 new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8280 if (tem)
8281 return tem;
8282 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), new_rtx);
8283 return x;
8286 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8287 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
8288 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8290 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, i), next_code);
8291 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new_rtx);
8293 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8294 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
8296 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XVECEXP (x, i, j), next_code);
8297 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new_rtx);
8300 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x);
8301 return x;
8304 /* Given M see if it is a value that would select a field of bits
8305 within an item, but not the entire word. Return -1 if not.
8306 Otherwise, return the starting position of the field, where 0 is the
8307 low-order bit.
8309 *PLEN is set to the length of the field. */
8311 static int
8312 get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *plen)
8314 /* Get the bit number of the first 1 bit from the right, -1 if none. */
8315 int pos = m ? ctz_hwi (m) : -1;
8316 int len = 0;
8318 if (pos >= 0)
8319 /* Now shift off the low-order zero bits and see if we have a
8320 power of two minus 1. */
8321 len = exact_log2 ((m >> pos) + 1);
8323 if (len <= 0)
8324 pos = -1;
8326 *plen = len;
8327 return pos;
8330 /* If X refers to a register that equals REG in value, replace these
8331 references with REG. */
8332 static rtx
8333 canon_reg_for_combine (rtx x, rtx reg)
8335 rtx op0, op1, op2;
8336 const char *fmt;
8337 int i;
8338 bool copied;
8340 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8341 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
8343 case RTX_UNARY:
8344 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8345 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8346 return simplify_gen_unary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), op0,
8347 GET_MODE (reg));
8348 break;
8350 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
8351 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
8352 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8353 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8354 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8355 return simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), op0, op1);
8356 break;
8358 case RTX_COMPARE:
8359 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
8360 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8361 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8362 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8363 return simplify_gen_relational (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8364 GET_MODE (op0), op0, op1);
8365 break;
8367 case RTX_TERNARY:
8368 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
8369 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8370 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8371 op2 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 2), reg);
8372 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1) || op2 != XEXP (x, 2))
8373 return simplify_gen_ternary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8374 GET_MODE (op0), op0, op1, op2);
8375 /* FALLTHRU */
8377 case RTX_OBJ:
8378 if (REG_P (x))
8380 if (rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (reg), x)
8381 || rtx_equal_p (reg, get_last_value (x)))
8382 return reg;
8383 else
8384 break;
8387 /* fall through */
8389 default:
8390 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8391 copied = false;
8392 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8393 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8395 rtx op = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, i), reg);
8396 if (op != XEXP (x, i))
8398 if (!copied)
8400 copied = true;
8401 x = copy_rtx (x);
8403 XEXP (x, i) = op;
8406 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8408 int j;
8409 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
8411 rtx op = canon_reg_for_combine (XVECEXP (x, i, j), reg);
8412 if (op != XVECEXP (x, i, j))
8414 if (!copied)
8416 copied = true;
8417 x = copy_rtx (x);
8419 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = op;
8424 break;
8427 return x;
8430 /* Return X converted to MODE. If the value is already truncated to
8431 MODE we can just return a subreg even though in the general case we
8432 would need an explicit truncation. */
8434 static rtx
8435 gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode mode, rtx x)
8437 if (!CONST_INT_P (x)
8438 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
8439 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, GET_MODE (x))
8440 && !(REG_P (x) && reg_truncated_to_mode (mode, x)))
8442 /* Bit-cast X into an integer mode. */
8443 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8444 x = gen_lowpart (int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (x)), x);
8445 x = simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE, int_mode_for_mode (mode),
8446 x, GET_MODE (x));
8449 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
8452 /* See if X can be simplified knowing that we will only refer to it in
8453 MODE and will only refer to those bits that are nonzero in MASK.
8454 If other bits are being computed or if masking operations are done
8455 that select a superset of the bits in MASK, they can sometimes be
8456 ignored.
8458 Return a possibly simplified expression, but always convert X to
8459 MODE. If X is a CONST_INT, AND the CONST_INT with MASK.
8461 If JUST_SELECT is nonzero, don't optimize by noticing that bits in MASK
8462 are all off in X. This is used when X will be complemented, by either
8463 NOT, NEG, or XOR. */
8465 static rtx
8466 force_to_mode (rtx x, machine_mode mode, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask,
8467 int just_select)
8469 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8470 int next_select = just_select || code == XOR || code == NOT || code == NEG;
8471 machine_mode op_mode;
8472 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT fuller_mask, nonzero;
8473 rtx op0, op1, temp;
8475 /* If this is a CALL or ASM_OPERANDS, don't do anything. Some of the
8476 code below will do the wrong thing since the mode of such an
8477 expression is VOIDmode.
8479 Also do nothing if X is a CLOBBER; this can happen if X was
8480 the return value from a call to gen_lowpart. */
8481 if (code == CALL || code == ASM_OPERANDS || code == CLOBBER)
8482 return x;
8484 /* We want to perform the operation in its present mode unless we know
8485 that the operation is valid in MODE, in which case we do the operation
8486 in MODE. */
8487 op_mode = ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x))
8488 && have_insn_for (code, mode))
8489 ? mode : GET_MODE (x));
8491 /* It is not valid to do a right-shift in a narrower mode
8492 than the one it came in with. */
8493 if ((code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
8494 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8495 op_mode = GET_MODE (x);
8497 /* Truncate MASK to fit OP_MODE. */
8498 if (op_mode)
8499 mask &= GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
8501 /* When we have an arithmetic operation, or a shift whose count we
8502 do not know, we need to assume that all bits up to the highest-order
8503 bit in MASK will be needed. This is how we form such a mask. */
8504 if (mask & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1)))
8505 fuller_mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U;
8506 else
8507 fuller_mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (floor_log2 (mask) + 1))
8508 - 1);
8510 /* Determine what bits of X are guaranteed to be (non)zero. */
8511 nonzero = nonzero_bits (x, mode);
8513 /* If none of the bits in X are needed, return a zero. */
8514 if (!just_select && (nonzero & mask) == 0 && !side_effects_p (x))
8515 x = const0_rtx;
8517 /* If X is a CONST_INT, return a new one. Do this here since the
8518 test below will fail. */
8519 if (CONST_INT_P (x))
8521 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
8522 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (x) & mask, mode);
8523 else
8525 x = GEN_INT (INTVAL (x) & mask);
8526 return gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
8530 /* If X is narrower than MODE and we want all the bits in X's mode, just
8531 get X in the proper mode. */
8532 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)
8533 && (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) & ~mask) == 0)
8534 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
8536 /* We can ignore the effect of a SUBREG if it narrows the mode or
8537 if the constant masks to zero all the bits the mode doesn't have. */
8538 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
8539 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
8540 && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
8541 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
8542 || (0 == (mask
8543 & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))
8544 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))))
8545 return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x), mode, mask, next_select);
8547 /* The arithmetic simplifications here only work for scalar integer modes. */
8548 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode) || !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8549 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8551 switch (code)
8553 case CLOBBER:
8554 /* If X is a (clobber (const_int)), return it since we know we are
8555 generating something that won't match. */
8556 return x;
8558 case SIGN_EXTEND:
8559 case ZERO_EXTEND:
8560 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
8561 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
8562 x = expand_compound_operation (x);
8563 if (GET_CODE (x) != code)
8564 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8565 break;
8567 case TRUNCATE:
8568 /* Similarly for a truncate. */
8569 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8571 case AND:
8572 /* If this is an AND with a constant, convert it into an AND
8573 whose constant is the AND of that constant with MASK. If it
8574 remains an AND of MASK, delete it since it is redundant. */
8576 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
8578 x = simplify_and_const_int (x, op_mode, XEXP (x, 0),
8579 mask & INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
8581 /* If X is still an AND, see if it is an AND with a mask that
8582 is just some low-order bits. If so, and it is MASK, we don't
8583 need it. */
8585 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8586 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)))
8587 == mask))
8588 x = XEXP (x, 0);
8590 /* If it remains an AND, try making another AND with the bits
8591 in the mode mask that aren't in MASK turned on. If the
8592 constant in the AND is wide enough, this might make a
8593 cheaper constant. */
8595 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8596 && GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) != mask
8597 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8599 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT cval
8600 = UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8601 | (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) & ~mask);
8602 rtx y;
8604 y = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8605 gen_int_mode (cval, GET_MODE (x)));
8606 if (set_src_cost (y, GET_MODE (x), optimize_this_for_speed_p)
8607 < set_src_cost (x, GET_MODE (x), optimize_this_for_speed_p))
8608 x = y;
8611 break;
8614 goto binop;
8616 case PLUS:
8617 /* In (and (plus FOO C1) M), if M is a mask that just turns off
8618 low-order bits (as in an alignment operation) and FOO is already
8619 aligned to that boundary, mask C1 to that boundary as well.
8620 This may eliminate that PLUS and, later, the AND. */
8623 unsigned int width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
8624 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT smask = mask;
8626 /* If MODE is narrower than HOST_WIDE_INT and mask is a negative
8627 number, sign extend it. */
8629 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8630 && (smask & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (width - 1))) != 0)
8631 smask |= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U << width;
8633 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8634 && pow2p_hwi (- smask)
8635 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) & ~smask) == 0
8636 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~smask) != 0)
8637 return force_to_mode (plus_constant (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8638 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & smask)),
8639 mode, smask, next_select);
8642 /* fall through */
8644 case MULT:
8645 /* Substituting into the operands of a widening MULT is not likely to
8646 create RTL matching a machine insn. */
8647 if (code == MULT
8648 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8649 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
8650 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8651 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
8652 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
8653 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0)))
8654 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8656 /* For PLUS, MINUS and MULT, we need any bits less significant than the
8657 most significant bit in MASK since carries from those bits will
8658 affect the bits we are interested in. */
8659 mask = fuller_mask;
8660 goto binop;
8662 case MINUS:
8663 /* If X is (minus C Y) where C's least set bit is larger than any bit
8664 in the mask, then we may replace with (neg Y). */
8665 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
8666 && least_bit_hwi (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0))) > mask)
8668 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 1),
8669 GET_MODE (x));
8670 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8673 /* Similarly, if C contains every bit in the fuller_mask, then we may
8674 replace with (not Y). */
8675 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
8676 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)) | fuller_mask) == UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0))))
8678 x = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x),
8679 XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (x));
8680 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8683 mask = fuller_mask;
8684 goto binop;
8686 case IOR:
8687 case XOR:
8688 /* If X is (ior (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2), try to commute the IOR and
8689 LSHIFTRT so we end up with an (and (lshiftrt (ior ...) ...) ...)
8690 operation which may be a bitfield extraction. Ensure that the
8691 constant we form is not wider than the mode of X. */
8693 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8694 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8695 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8696 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8697 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8698 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8699 + floor_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))))
8700 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8701 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8702 & ~nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x))) == 0)
8704 temp = gen_int_mode ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & mask)
8705 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)),
8706 GET_MODE (x));
8707 temp = simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8708 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp);
8709 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), temp,
8710 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8711 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8714 binop:
8715 /* For most binary operations, just propagate into the operation and
8716 change the mode if we have an operation of that mode. */
8718 op0 = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8719 op1 = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode, mask, next_select);
8721 /* If we ended up truncating both operands, truncate the result of the
8722 operation instead. */
8723 if (GET_CODE (op0) == TRUNCATE
8724 && GET_CODE (op1) == TRUNCATE)
8726 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
8727 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
8730 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode, op0);
8731 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode, op1);
8733 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8734 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, op_mode, op0, op1);
8735 break;
8737 case ASHIFT:
8738 /* For left shifts, do the same, but just for the first operand.
8739 However, we cannot do anything with shifts where we cannot
8740 guarantee that the counts are smaller than the size of the mode
8741 because such a count will have a different meaning in a
8742 wider mode. */
8744 if (! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8745 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8746 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
8747 && ! (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != VOIDmode
8748 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)))
8749 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))))
8750 break;
8752 /* If the shift count is a constant and we can do arithmetic in
8753 the mode of the shift, refine which bits we need. Otherwise, use the
8754 conservative form of the mask. */
8755 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8756 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8757 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op_mode)
8758 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode))
8759 mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8760 else
8761 mask = fuller_mask;
8763 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode,
8764 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), op_mode,
8765 mask, next_select));
8767 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8768 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, op_mode, op0, XEXP (x, 1));
8769 break;
8771 case LSHIFTRT:
8772 /* Here we can only do something if the shift count is a constant,
8773 this shift constant is valid for the host, and we can do arithmetic
8774 in OP_MODE. */
8776 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8777 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8778 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8779 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode))
8781 rtx inner = XEXP (x, 0);
8782 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_mask;
8784 /* Select the mask of the bits we need for the shift operand. */
8785 inner_mask = mask << INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8787 /* We can only change the mode of the shift if we can do arithmetic
8788 in the mode of the shift and INNER_MASK is no wider than the
8789 width of X's mode. */
8790 if ((inner_mask & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))) != 0)
8791 op_mode = GET_MODE (x);
8793 inner = force_to_mode (inner, op_mode, inner_mask, next_select);
8795 if (GET_MODE (x) != op_mode || inner != XEXP (x, 0))
8796 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, op_mode, inner, XEXP (x, 1));
8799 /* If we have (and (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2) where the combination of the
8800 shift and AND produces only copies of the sign bit (C2 is one less
8801 than a power of two), we can do this with just a shift. */
8803 if (GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT
8804 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8805 /* The shift puts one of the sign bit copies in the least significant
8806 bit. */
8807 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8808 + num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
8809 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8810 && pow2p_hwi (mask + 1)
8811 /* Number of bits left after the shift must be more than the mask
8812 needs. */
8813 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + exact_log2 (mask + 1))
8814 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8815 /* Must be more sign bit copies than the mask needs. */
8816 && ((int) num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
8817 >= exact_log2 (mask + 1)))
8818 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8819 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x))
8820 - exact_log2 (mask + 1)));
8822 goto shiftrt;
8824 case ASHIFTRT:
8825 /* If we are just looking for the sign bit, we don't need this shift at
8826 all, even if it has a variable count. */
8827 if (val_signbit_p (GET_MODE (x), mask))
8828 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8830 /* If this is a shift by a constant, get a mask that contains those bits
8831 that are not copies of the sign bit. We then have two cases: If
8832 MASK only includes those bits, this can be a logical shift, which may
8833 allow simplifications. If MASK is a single-bit field not within
8834 those bits, we are requesting a copy of the sign bit and hence can
8835 shift the sign bit to the appropriate location. */
8837 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8838 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8840 int i;
8842 /* If the considered data is wider than HOST_WIDE_INT, we can't
8843 represent a mask for all its bits in a single scalar.
8844 But we only care about the lower bits, so calculate these. */
8846 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8848 nonzero = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U;
8850 /* GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8851 is the number of bits a full-width mask would have set.
8852 We need only shift if these are fewer than nonzero can
8853 hold. If not, we must keep all bits set in nonzero. */
8855 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8856 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8857 nonzero >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8858 + HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8859 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) ;
8861 else
8863 nonzero = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
8864 nonzero >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8867 if ((mask & ~nonzero) == 0)
8869 x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8870 XEXP (x, 0), INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
8871 if (GET_CODE (x) != ASHIFTRT)
8872 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8875 else if ((i = exact_log2 (mask)) >= 0)
8877 x = simplify_shift_const
8878 (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8879 GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - 1 - i);
8881 if (GET_CODE (x) != ASHIFTRT)
8882 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8886 /* If MASK is 1, convert this to an LSHIFTRT. This can be done
8887 even if the shift count isn't a constant. */
8888 if (mask == 1)
8889 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8890 XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
8892 shiftrt:
8894 /* If this is a zero- or sign-extension operation that just affects bits
8895 we don't care about, remove it. Be sure the call above returned
8896 something that is still a shift. */
8898 if ((GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFTRT)
8899 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8900 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8901 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8902 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - (floor_log2 (mask) + 1))
8903 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
8904 && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == XEXP (x, 1))
8905 return force_to_mode (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode, mask,
8906 next_select);
8908 break;
8910 case ROTATE:
8911 case ROTATERT:
8912 /* If the shift count is constant and we can do computations
8913 in the mode of X, compute where the bits we care about are.
8914 Otherwise, we can't do anything. Don't change the mode of
8915 the shift or propagate MODE into the shift, though. */
8916 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8917 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0)
8919 temp = simplify_binary_operation (code == ROTATE ? ROTATERT : ROTATE,
8920 GET_MODE (x),
8921 gen_int_mode (mask, GET_MODE (x)),
8922 XEXP (x, 1));
8923 if (temp && CONST_INT_P (temp))
8924 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x),
8925 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x),
8926 INTVAL (temp), next_select),
8927 XEXP (x, 1));
8929 break;
8931 case NEG:
8932 /* If we just want the low-order bit, the NEG isn't needed since it
8933 won't change the low-order bit. */
8934 if (mask == 1)
8935 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, just_select);
8937 /* We need any bits less significant than the most significant bit in
8938 MASK since carries from those bits will affect the bits we are
8939 interested in. */
8940 mask = fuller_mask;
8941 goto unop;
8943 case NOT:
8944 /* (not FOO) is (xor FOO CONST), so if FOO is an LSHIFTRT, we can do the
8945 same as the XOR case above. Ensure that the constant we form is not
8946 wider than the mode of X. */
8948 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8949 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8950 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8951 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) + floor_log2 (mask)
8952 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8953 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8955 temp = gen_int_mode (mask << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)),
8956 GET_MODE (x));
8957 temp = simplify_gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (x),
8958 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp);
8959 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8960 temp, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8962 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8965 /* (and (not FOO) CONST) is (not (or FOO (not CONST))), so we must
8966 use the full mask inside the NOT. */
8967 mask = fuller_mask;
8969 unop:
8970 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode,
8971 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask,
8972 next_select));
8973 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8974 x = simplify_gen_unary (code, op_mode, op0, op_mode);
8975 break;
8977 case NE:
8978 /* (and (ne FOO 0) CONST) can be (and FOO CONST) if CONST is included
8979 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE and FOO has a single bit that might be nonzero,
8980 which is equal to STORE_FLAG_VALUE. */
8981 if ((mask & ~STORE_FLAG_VALUE) == 0
8982 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx
8983 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == mode
8984 && pow2p_hwi (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode))
8985 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
8986 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
8987 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8989 break;
8991 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
8992 /* We have no way of knowing if the IF_THEN_ELSE can itself be
8993 written in a narrower mode. We play it safe and do not do so. */
8995 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x),
8996 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
8997 mask, next_select));
8998 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x),
8999 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 2), mode,
9000 mask, next_select));
9001 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 1) || op1 != XEXP (x, 2))
9002 x = simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE, GET_MODE (x),
9003 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), XEXP (x, 0),
9004 op0, op1);
9005 break;
9007 default:
9008 break;
9011 /* Ensure we return a value of the proper mode. */
9012 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
9015 /* Return nonzero if X is an expression that has one of two values depending on
9016 whether some other value is zero or nonzero. In that case, we return the
9017 value that is being tested, *PTRUE is set to the value if the rtx being
9018 returned has a nonzero value, and *PFALSE is set to the other alternative.
9020 If we return zero, we set *PTRUE and *PFALSE to X. */
9022 static rtx
9023 if_then_else_cond (rtx x, rtx *ptrue, rtx *pfalse)
9025 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
9026 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9027 rtx cond0, cond1, true0, true1, false0, false1;
9028 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz;
9030 /* If we are comparing a value against zero, we are done. */
9031 if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
9032 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx)
9034 *ptrue = (code == NE) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
9035 *pfalse = (code == NE) ? const0_rtx : const_true_rtx;
9036 return XEXP (x, 0);
9039 /* If this is a unary operation whose operand has one of two values, apply
9040 our opcode to compute those values. */
9041 else if (UNARY_P (x)
9042 && (cond0 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 0), &true0, &false0)) != 0)
9044 *ptrue = simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, true0, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
9045 *pfalse = simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, false0,
9046 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
9047 return cond0;
9050 /* If this is a COMPARE, do nothing, since the IF_THEN_ELSE we would
9051 make can't possibly match and would suppress other optimizations. */
9052 else if (code == COMPARE)
9055 /* If this is a binary operation, see if either side has only one of two
9056 values. If either one does or if both do and they are conditional on
9057 the same value, compute the new true and false values. */
9058 else if (BINARY_P (x))
9060 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
9061 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
9062 cond0 = if_then_else_cond (op0, &true0, &false0);
9063 cond1 = if_then_else_cond (op1, &true1, &false1);
9065 if ((cond0 != 0 && cond1 != 0 && !rtx_equal_p (cond0, cond1))
9066 && (REG_P (op0) || REG_P (op1)))
9068 /* Try to enable a simplification by undoing work done by
9069 if_then_else_cond if it converted a REG into something more
9070 complex. */
9071 if (REG_P (op0))
9073 cond0 = 0;
9074 true0 = false0 = op0;
9076 else
9078 cond1 = 0;
9079 true1 = false1 = op1;
9083 if ((cond0 != 0 || cond1 != 0)
9084 && ! (cond0 != 0 && cond1 != 0 && !rtx_equal_p (cond0, cond1)))
9086 /* If if_then_else_cond returned zero, then true/false are the
9087 same rtl. We must copy one of them to prevent invalid rtl
9088 sharing. */
9089 if (cond0 == 0)
9090 true0 = copy_rtx (true0);
9091 else if (cond1 == 0)
9092 true1 = copy_rtx (true1);
9094 if (COMPARISON_P (x))
9096 *ptrue = simplify_gen_relational (code, mode, VOIDmode,
9097 true0, true1);
9098 *pfalse = simplify_gen_relational (code, mode, VOIDmode,
9099 false0, false1);
9101 else
9103 *ptrue = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, true0, true1);
9104 *pfalse = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, false0, false1);
9107 return cond0 ? cond0 : cond1;
9110 /* See if we have PLUS, IOR, XOR, MINUS or UMAX, where one of the
9111 operands is zero when the other is nonzero, and vice-versa,
9112 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or -1. */
9114 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
9115 && (code == PLUS || code == IOR || code == XOR || code == MINUS
9116 || code == UMAX)
9117 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
9119 rtx op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
9120 rtx op1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1);
9122 cond0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
9123 cond1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
9125 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0)
9126 && COMPARISON_P (cond1)
9127 && ((GET_CODE (cond0) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL)
9128 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 0))
9129 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 1)))
9130 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0))
9131 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL))
9132 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 1))
9133 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 0))))
9134 && ! side_effects_p (x))
9136 *ptrue = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, op0, const_true_rtx);
9137 *pfalse = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode,
9138 (code == MINUS
9139 ? simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
9140 op1, mode)
9141 : op1),
9142 const_true_rtx);
9143 return cond0;
9147 /* Similarly for MULT, AND and UMIN, except that for these the result
9148 is always zero. */
9149 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
9150 && (code == MULT || code == AND || code == UMIN)
9151 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
9153 cond0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
9154 cond1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
9156 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0)
9157 && COMPARISON_P (cond1)
9158 && ((GET_CODE (cond0) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL)
9159 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 0))
9160 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 1)))
9161 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0))
9162 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL))
9163 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 1))
9164 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 0))))
9165 && ! side_effects_p (x))
9167 *ptrue = *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9168 return cond0;
9173 else if (code == IF_THEN_ELSE)
9175 /* If we have IF_THEN_ELSE already, extract the condition and
9176 canonicalize it if it is NE or EQ. */
9177 cond0 = XEXP (x, 0);
9178 *ptrue = XEXP (x, 1), *pfalse = XEXP (x, 2);
9179 if (GET_CODE (cond0) == NE && XEXP (cond0, 1) == const0_rtx)
9180 return XEXP (cond0, 0);
9181 else if (GET_CODE (cond0) == EQ && XEXP (cond0, 1) == const0_rtx)
9183 *ptrue = XEXP (x, 2), *pfalse = XEXP (x, 1);
9184 return XEXP (cond0, 0);
9186 else
9187 return cond0;
9190 /* If X is a SUBREG, we can narrow both the true and false values
9191 if the inner expression, if there is a condition. */
9192 else if (code == SUBREG
9193 && 0 != (cond0 = if_then_else_cond (SUBREG_REG (x),
9194 &true0, &false0)))
9196 true0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, true0,
9197 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9198 false0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, false0,
9199 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9200 if (true0 && false0)
9202 *ptrue = true0;
9203 *pfalse = false0;
9204 return cond0;
9208 /* If X is a constant, this isn't special and will cause confusions
9209 if we treat it as such. Likewise if it is equivalent to a constant. */
9210 else if (CONSTANT_P (x)
9211 || ((cond0 = get_last_value (x)) != 0 && CONSTANT_P (cond0)))
9214 /* If we're in BImode, canonicalize on 0 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE, as that
9215 will be least confusing to the rest of the compiler. */
9216 else if (mode == BImode)
9218 *ptrue = GEN_INT (STORE_FLAG_VALUE), *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9219 return x;
9222 /* If X is known to be either 0 or -1, those are the true and
9223 false values when testing X. */
9224 else if (x == constm1_rtx || x == const0_rtx
9225 || (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
9226 && num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
9228 *ptrue = constm1_rtx, *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9229 return x;
9232 /* Likewise for 0 or a single bit. */
9233 else if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
9234 && pow2p_hwi (nz = nonzero_bits (x, mode)))
9236 *ptrue = gen_int_mode (nz, mode), *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9237 return x;
9240 /* Otherwise fail; show no condition with true and false values the same. */
9241 *ptrue = *pfalse = x;
9242 return 0;
9245 /* Return the value of expression X given the fact that condition COND
9246 is known to be true when applied to REG as its first operand and VAL
9247 as its second. X is known to not be shared and so can be modified in
9248 place.
9250 We only handle the simplest cases, and specifically those cases that
9251 arise with IF_THEN_ELSE expressions. */
9253 static rtx
9254 known_cond (rtx x, enum rtx_code cond, rtx reg, rtx val)
9256 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9257 const char *fmt;
9258 int i, j;
9260 if (side_effects_p (x))
9261 return x;
9263 /* If either operand of the condition is a floating point value,
9264 then we have to avoid collapsing an EQ comparison. */
9265 if (cond == EQ
9266 && rtx_equal_p (x, reg)
9267 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9268 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (val)))
9269 return val;
9271 if (cond == UNEQ && rtx_equal_p (x, reg))
9272 return val;
9274 /* If X is (abs REG) and we know something about REG's relationship
9275 with zero, we may be able to simplify this. */
9277 if (code == ABS && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && val == const0_rtx)
9278 switch (cond)
9280 case GE: case GT: case EQ:
9281 return XEXP (x, 0);
9282 case LT: case LE:
9283 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)),
9284 XEXP (x, 0),
9285 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
9286 default:
9287 break;
9290 /* The only other cases we handle are MIN, MAX, and comparisons if the
9291 operands are the same as REG and VAL. */
9293 else if (COMPARISON_P (x) || COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
9295 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), val))
9297 std::swap (val, reg);
9298 cond = swap_condition (cond);
9301 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), val))
9303 if (COMPARISON_P (x))
9305 if (comparison_dominates_p (cond, code))
9306 return const_true_rtx;
9308 code = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL);
9309 if (code != UNKNOWN
9310 && comparison_dominates_p (cond, code))
9311 return const0_rtx;
9312 else
9313 return x;
9315 else if (code == SMAX || code == SMIN
9316 || code == UMIN || code == UMAX)
9318 int unsignedp = (code == UMIN || code == UMAX);
9320 /* Do not reverse the condition when it is NE or EQ.
9321 This is because we cannot conclude anything about
9322 the value of 'SMAX (x, y)' when x is not equal to y,
9323 but we can when x equals y. */
9324 if ((code == SMAX || code == UMAX)
9325 && ! (cond == EQ || cond == NE))
9326 cond = reverse_condition (cond);
9328 switch (cond)
9330 case GE: case GT:
9331 return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 1);
9332 case LE: case LT:
9333 return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 0);
9334 case GEU: case GTU:
9335 return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 1) : x;
9336 case LEU: case LTU:
9337 return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 0) : x;
9338 default:
9339 break;
9344 else if (code == SUBREG)
9346 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
9347 rtx new_rtx, r = known_cond (SUBREG_REG (x), cond, reg, val);
9349 if (SUBREG_REG (x) != r)
9351 /* We must simplify subreg here, before we lose track of the
9352 original inner_mode. */
9353 new_rtx = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), r,
9354 inner_mode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9355 if (new_rtx)
9356 return new_rtx;
9357 else
9358 SUBST (SUBREG_REG (x), r);
9361 return x;
9363 /* We don't have to handle SIGN_EXTEND here, because even in the
9364 case of replacing something with a modeless CONST_INT, a
9365 CONST_INT is already (supposed to be) a valid sign extension for
9366 its narrower mode, which implies it's already properly
9367 sign-extended for the wider mode. Now, for ZERO_EXTEND, the
9368 story is different. */
9369 else if (code == ZERO_EXTEND)
9371 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
9372 rtx new_rtx, r = known_cond (XEXP (x, 0), cond, reg, val);
9374 if (XEXP (x, 0) != r)
9376 /* We must simplify the zero_extend here, before we lose
9377 track of the original inner_mode. */
9378 new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
9379 r, inner_mode);
9380 if (new_rtx)
9381 return new_rtx;
9382 else
9383 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), r);
9386 return x;
9389 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
9390 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
9392 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
9393 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), known_cond (XEXP (x, i), cond, reg, val));
9394 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
9395 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
9396 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), known_cond (XVECEXP (x, i, j),
9397 cond, reg, val));
9400 return x;
9403 /* See if X and Y are equal for the purposes of seeing if we can rewrite an
9404 assignment as a field assignment. */
9406 static int
9407 rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx x, rtx y, bool widen_x)
9409 if (widen_x && GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
9411 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (y)))
9412 return 0;
9413 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
9414 return 0;
9415 /* For big endian, adjust the memory offset. */
9416 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
9417 x = adjust_address_nv (x, GET_MODE (y),
9418 -subreg_lowpart_offset (GET_MODE (x),
9419 GET_MODE (y)));
9420 else
9421 x = adjust_address_nv (x, GET_MODE (y), 0);
9424 if (x == y || rtx_equal_p (x, y))
9425 return 1;
9427 if (x == 0 || y == 0 || GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
9428 return 0;
9430 /* Check for a paradoxical SUBREG of a MEM compared with the MEM.
9431 Note that all SUBREGs of MEM are paradoxical; otherwise they
9432 would have been rewritten. */
9433 if (MEM_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG
9434 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (y))
9435 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (y),
9436 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y)), x)))
9437 return 1;
9439 if (MEM_P (y) && GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
9440 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
9441 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (x),
9442 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), y)))
9443 return 1;
9445 /* We used to see if get_last_value of X and Y were the same but that's
9446 not correct. In one direction, we'll cause the assignment to have
9447 the wrong destination and in the case, we'll import a register into this
9448 insn that might have already have been dead. So fail if none of the
9449 above cases are true. */
9450 return 0;
9453 /* See if X, a SET operation, can be rewritten as a bit-field assignment.
9454 Return that assignment if so.
9456 We only handle the most common cases. */
9458 static rtx
9459 make_field_assignment (rtx x)
9461 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
9462 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
9463 rtx assign;
9464 rtx rhs, lhs;
9465 HOST_WIDE_INT c1;
9466 HOST_WIDE_INT pos;
9467 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
9468 rtx other;
9469 machine_mode mode;
9471 /* If SRC was (and (not (ashift (const_int 1) POS)) DEST), this is
9472 a clear of a one-bit field. We will have changed it to
9473 (and (rotate (const_int -2) POS) DEST), so check for that. Also check
9474 for a SUBREG. */
9476 if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ROTATE
9477 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))
9478 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)) == -2
9479 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9481 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1),
9482 1, 1, 1, 0);
9483 if (assign != 0)
9484 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, const0_rtx);
9485 return x;
9488 if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == SUBREG
9489 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (src, 0))
9490 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0)))
9491 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)))))
9492 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0))) == ROTATE
9493 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0))
9494 && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0)) == -2
9495 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9497 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0,
9498 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 1),
9499 1, 1, 1, 0);
9500 if (assign != 0)
9501 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, const0_rtx);
9502 return x;
9505 /* If SRC is (ior (ashift (const_int 1) POS) DEST), this is a set of a
9506 one-bit field. */
9507 if (GET_CODE (src) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ASHIFT
9508 && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
9509 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9511 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1),
9512 1, 1, 1, 0);
9513 if (assign != 0)
9514 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, const1_rtx);
9515 return x;
9518 /* If DEST is already a field assignment, i.e. ZERO_EXTRACT, and the
9519 SRC is an AND with all bits of that field set, then we can discard
9520 the AND. */
9521 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9522 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 1))
9523 && GET_CODE (src) == AND
9524 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1)))
9526 HOST_WIDE_INT width = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 1));
9527 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT and_mask = INTVAL (XEXP (src, 1));
9528 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ze_mask;
9530 if (width >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
9531 ze_mask = -1;
9532 else
9533 ze_mask = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)1 << width) - 1;
9535 /* Complete overlap. We can remove the source AND. */
9536 if ((and_mask & ze_mask) == ze_mask)
9537 return gen_rtx_SET (dest, XEXP (src, 0));
9539 /* Partial overlap. We can reduce the source AND. */
9540 if ((and_mask & ze_mask) != and_mask)
9542 mode = GET_MODE (src);
9543 src = gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (src, 0),
9544 gen_int_mode (and_mask & ze_mask, mode));
9545 return gen_rtx_SET (dest, src);
9549 /* The other case we handle is assignments into a constant-position
9550 field. They look like (ior/xor (and DEST C1) OTHER). If C1 represents
9551 a mask that has all one bits except for a group of zero bits and
9552 OTHER is known to have zeros where C1 has ones, this is such an
9553 assignment. Compute the position and length from C1. Shift OTHER
9554 to the appropriate position, force it to the required mode, and
9555 make the extraction. Check for the AND in both operands. */
9557 /* One or more SUBREGs might obscure the constant-position field
9558 assignment. The first one we are likely to encounter is an outer
9559 narrowing SUBREG, which we can just strip for the purposes of
9560 identifying the constant-field assignment. */
9561 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src))
9562 src = SUBREG_REG (src);
9564 if (GET_CODE (src) != IOR && GET_CODE (src) != XOR)
9565 return x;
9567 rhs = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src, 0));
9568 lhs = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src, 1));
9570 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == AND
9571 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1))
9572 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (rhs, 0), dest))
9573 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), other = lhs;
9574 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9575 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9576 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9577 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9578 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9579 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9580 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == AND
9581 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (rhs, 0))
9582 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9583 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1))
9584 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs, 0)),
9585 dest, true))
9586 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), other = lhs;
9587 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == AND
9588 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
9589 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), dest))
9590 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), other = rhs;
9591 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9592 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9593 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9594 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9595 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9596 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9597 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == AND
9598 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (lhs, 0))
9599 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs, 0)))
9600 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
9601 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs, 0)),
9602 dest, true))
9603 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), other = rhs;
9604 else
9605 return x;
9607 pos = get_pos_from_mask ((~c1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (dest)), &len);
9608 if (pos < 0 || pos + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest))
9609 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9610 || (c1 & nonzero_bits (other, GET_MODE (dest))) != 0)
9611 return x;
9613 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, pos, NULL_RTX, len, 1, 1, 0);
9614 if (assign == 0)
9615 return x;
9617 /* The mode to use for the source is the mode of the assignment, or of
9618 what is inside a possible STRICT_LOW_PART. */
9619 mode = (GET_CODE (assign) == STRICT_LOW_PART
9620 ? GET_MODE (XEXP (assign, 0)) : GET_MODE (assign));
9622 /* Shift OTHER right POS places and make it the source, restricting it
9623 to the proper length and mode. */
9625 src = canon_reg_for_combine (simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT,
9626 GET_MODE (src),
9627 other, pos),
9628 dest);
9629 src = force_to_mode (src, mode,
9630 len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9631 ? HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
9632 : (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << len) - 1,
9635 /* If SRC is masked by an AND that does not make a difference in
9636 the value being stored, strip it. */
9637 if (GET_CODE (assign) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9638 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (assign, 1))
9639 && INTVAL (XEXP (assign, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9640 && GET_CODE (src) == AND
9641 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
9642 && UINTVAL (XEXP (src, 1))
9643 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << INTVAL (XEXP (assign, 1))) - 1)
9644 src = XEXP (src, 0);
9646 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, src);
9649 /* See if X is of the form (+ (* a c) (* b c)) and convert to (* (+ a b) c)
9650 if so. */
9652 static rtx
9653 apply_distributive_law (rtx x)
9655 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9656 enum rtx_code inner_code;
9657 rtx lhs, rhs, other;
9658 rtx tem;
9660 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9661 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9662 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9663 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
9664 return x;
9666 /* The outer operation can only be one of the following: */
9667 if (code != IOR && code != AND && code != XOR
9668 && code != PLUS && code != MINUS)
9669 return x;
9671 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
9672 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
9674 /* If either operand is a primitive we can't do anything, so get out
9675 fast. */
9676 if (OBJECT_P (lhs) || OBJECT_P (rhs))
9677 return x;
9679 lhs = expand_compound_operation (lhs);
9680 rhs = expand_compound_operation (rhs);
9681 inner_code = GET_CODE (lhs);
9682 if (inner_code != GET_CODE (rhs))
9683 return x;
9685 /* See if the inner and outer operations distribute. */
9686 switch (inner_code)
9688 case LSHIFTRT:
9689 case ASHIFTRT:
9690 case AND:
9691 case IOR:
9692 /* These all distribute except over PLUS. */
9693 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
9694 return x;
9695 break;
9697 case MULT:
9698 if (code != PLUS && code != MINUS)
9699 return x;
9700 break;
9702 case ASHIFT:
9703 /* This is also a multiply, so it distributes over everything. */
9704 break;
9706 /* This used to handle SUBREG, but this turned out to be counter-
9707 productive, since (subreg (op ...)) usually is not handled by
9708 insn patterns, and this "optimization" therefore transformed
9709 recognizable patterns into unrecognizable ones. Therefore the
9710 SUBREG case was removed from here.
9712 It is possible that distributing SUBREG over arithmetic operations
9713 leads to an intermediate result than can then be optimized further,
9714 e.g. by moving the outer SUBREG to the other side of a SET as done
9715 in simplify_set. This seems to have been the original intent of
9716 handling SUBREGs here.
9718 However, with current GCC this does not appear to actually happen,
9719 at least on major platforms. If some case is found where removing
9720 the SUBREG case here prevents follow-on optimizations, distributing
9721 SUBREGs ought to be re-added at that place, e.g. in simplify_set. */
9723 default:
9724 return x;
9727 /* Set LHS and RHS to the inner operands (A and B in the example
9728 above) and set OTHER to the common operand (C in the example).
9729 There is only one way to do this unless the inner operation is
9730 commutative. */
9731 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9732 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9733 other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1);
9734 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9735 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 1)))
9736 other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
9737 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9738 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9739 other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1);
9740 else if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 1)))
9741 other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
9742 else
9743 return x;
9745 /* Form the new inner operation, seeing if it simplifies first. */
9746 tem = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x), lhs, rhs);
9748 /* There is one exception to the general way of distributing:
9749 (a | c) ^ (b | c) -> (a ^ b) & ~c */
9750 if (code == XOR && inner_code == IOR)
9752 inner_code = AND;
9753 other = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x), other, GET_MODE (x));
9756 /* We may be able to continuing distributing the result, so call
9757 ourselves recursively on the inner operation before forming the
9758 outer operation, which we return. */
9759 return simplify_gen_binary (inner_code, GET_MODE (x),
9760 apply_distributive_law (tem), other);
9763 /* See if X is of the form (* (+ A B) C), and if so convert to
9764 (+ (* A C) (* B C)) and try to simplify.
9766 Most of the time, this results in no change. However, if some of
9767 the operands are the same or inverses of each other, simplifications
9768 will result.
9770 For example, (and (ior A B) (not B)) can occur as the result of
9771 expanding a bit field assignment. When we apply the distributive
9772 law to this, we get (ior (and (A (not B))) (and (B (not B)))),
9773 which then simplifies to (and (A (not B))).
9775 Note that no checks happen on the validity of applying the inverse
9776 distributive law. This is pointless since we can do it in the
9777 few places where this routine is called.
9779 N is the index of the term that is decomposed (the arithmetic operation,
9780 i.e. (+ A B) in the first example above). !N is the index of the term that
9781 is distributed, i.e. of C in the first example above. */
9782 static rtx
9783 distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx x, int n)
9785 machine_mode mode;
9786 enum rtx_code outer_code, inner_code;
9787 rtx decomposed, distributed, inner_op0, inner_op1, new_op0, new_op1, tmp;
9789 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9790 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9791 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9792 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
9793 return NULL_RTX;
9795 decomposed = XEXP (x, n);
9796 if (!ARITHMETIC_P (decomposed))
9797 return NULL_RTX;
9799 mode = GET_MODE (x);
9800 outer_code = GET_CODE (x);
9801 distributed = XEXP (x, !n);
9803 inner_code = GET_CODE (decomposed);
9804 inner_op0 = XEXP (decomposed, 0);
9805 inner_op1 = XEXP (decomposed, 1);
9807 /* Special case (and (xor B C) (not A)), which is equivalent to
9808 (xor (ior A B) (ior A C)) */
9809 if (outer_code == AND && inner_code == XOR && GET_CODE (distributed) == NOT)
9811 distributed = XEXP (distributed, 0);
9812 outer_code = IOR;
9815 if (n == 0)
9817 /* Distribute the second term. */
9818 new_op0 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, inner_op0, distributed);
9819 new_op1 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, inner_op1, distributed);
9821 else
9823 /* Distribute the first term. */
9824 new_op0 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, distributed, inner_op0);
9825 new_op1 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, distributed, inner_op1);
9828 tmp = apply_distributive_law (simplify_gen_binary (inner_code, mode,
9829 new_op0, new_op1));
9830 if (GET_CODE (tmp) != outer_code
9831 && (set_src_cost (tmp, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
9832 < set_src_cost (x, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)))
9833 return tmp;
9835 return NULL_RTX;
9838 /* Simplify a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9839 in MODE. Return an equivalent form, if different from (and VAROP
9840 (const_int CONSTOP)). Otherwise, return NULL_RTX. */
9842 static rtx
9843 simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode mode, rtx varop,
9844 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop)
9846 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero;
9847 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT orig_constop;
9848 rtx orig_varop;
9849 int i;
9851 orig_varop = varop;
9852 orig_constop = constop;
9853 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9854 return NULL_RTX;
9856 /* Simplify VAROP knowing that we will be only looking at some of the
9857 bits in it.
9859 Note by passing in CONSTOP, we guarantee that the bits not set in
9860 CONSTOP are not significant and will never be examined. We must
9861 ensure that is the case by explicitly masking out those bits
9862 before returning. */
9863 varop = force_to_mode (varop, mode, constop, 0);
9865 /* If VAROP is a CLOBBER, we will fail so return it. */
9866 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9867 return varop;
9869 /* If VAROP is a CONST_INT, then we need to apply the mask in CONSTOP
9870 to VAROP and return the new constant. */
9871 if (CONST_INT_P (varop))
9872 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (varop) & constop, mode);
9874 /* See what bits may be nonzero in VAROP. Unlike the general case of
9875 a call to nonzero_bits, here we don't care about bits outside
9876 MODE. */
9878 nonzero = nonzero_bits (varop, mode) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9880 /* Turn off all bits in the constant that are known to already be zero.
9881 Thus, if the AND isn't needed at all, we will have CONSTOP == NONZERO_BITS
9882 which is tested below. */
9884 constop &= nonzero;
9886 /* If we don't have any bits left, return zero. */
9887 if (constop == 0)
9888 return const0_rtx;
9890 /* If VAROP is a NEG of something known to be zero or 1 and CONSTOP is
9891 a power of two, we can replace this with an ASHIFT. */
9892 if (GET_CODE (varop) == NEG && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), mode) == 1
9893 && (i = exact_log2 (constop)) >= 0)
9894 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), i);
9896 /* If VAROP is an IOR or XOR, apply the AND to both branches of the IOR
9897 or XOR, then try to apply the distributive law. This may eliminate
9898 operations if either branch can be simplified because of the AND.
9899 It may also make some cases more complex, but those cases probably
9900 won't match a pattern either with or without this. */
9902 if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR || GET_CODE (varop) == XOR)
9903 return
9904 gen_lowpart
9905 (mode,
9906 apply_distributive_law
9907 (simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), GET_MODE (varop),
9908 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX,
9909 GET_MODE (varop),
9910 XEXP (varop, 0),
9911 constop),
9912 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX,
9913 GET_MODE (varop),
9914 XEXP (varop, 1),
9915 constop))));
9917 /* If VAROP is PLUS, and the constant is a mask of low bits, distribute
9918 the AND and see if one of the operands simplifies to zero. If so, we
9919 may eliminate it. */
9921 if (GET_CODE (varop) == PLUS
9922 && pow2p_hwi (constop + 1))
9924 rtx o0, o1;
9926 o0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), constop);
9927 o1 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (varop, 1), constop);
9928 if (o0 == const0_rtx)
9929 return o1;
9930 if (o1 == const0_rtx)
9931 return o0;
9934 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
9935 varop = gen_lowpart (mode, varop);
9936 if (varop == NULL_RTX || GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9937 return NULL_RTX;
9939 /* If we are only masking insignificant bits, return VAROP. */
9940 if (constop == nonzero)
9941 return varop;
9943 if (varop == orig_varop && constop == orig_constop)
9944 return NULL_RTX;
9946 /* Otherwise, return an AND. */
9947 return simplify_gen_binary (AND, mode, varop, gen_int_mode (constop, mode));
9951 /* We have X, a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9952 in MODE.
9954 Return an equivalent form, if different from X. Otherwise, return X. If
9955 X is zero, we are to always construct the equivalent form. */
9957 static rtx
9958 simplify_and_const_int (rtx x, machine_mode mode, rtx varop,
9959 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop)
9961 rtx tem = simplify_and_const_int_1 (mode, varop, constop);
9962 if (tem)
9963 return tem;
9965 if (!x)
9966 x = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (varop), varop,
9967 gen_int_mode (constop, mode));
9968 if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
9969 x = gen_lowpart (mode, x);
9970 return x;
9973 /* Given a REG, X, compute which bits in X can be nonzero.
9974 We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE.
9976 For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is
9977 a shift, AND, or zero_extract, we can do better. */
9979 static rtx
9980 reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
9981 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9982 machine_mode known_mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9983 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9984 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *nonzero)
9986 rtx tem;
9987 reg_stat_type *rsp;
9989 /* If X is a register whose nonzero bits value is current, use it.
9990 Otherwise, if X is a register whose value we can find, use that
9991 value. Otherwise, use the previously-computed global nonzero bits
9992 for this register. */
9994 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
9995 if (rsp->last_set_value != 0
9996 && (rsp->last_set_mode == mode
9997 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (rsp->last_set_mode) == MODE_INT
9998 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT))
9999 && ((rsp->last_set_label >= label_tick_ebb_start
10000 && rsp->last_set_label < label_tick)
10001 || (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
10002 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) < subst_low_luid)
10003 || (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
10004 && REGNO (x) < reg_n_sets_max
10005 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x)) == 1
10006 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
10007 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
10008 REGNO (x)))))
10010 /* Note that, even if the precision of last_set_mode is lower than that
10011 of mode, record_value_for_reg invoked nonzero_bits on the register
10012 with nonzero_bits_mode (because last_set_mode is necessarily integral
10013 and HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P in this case) so bits in nonzero_bits_mode
10014 are all valid, hence in mode too since nonzero_bits_mode is defined
10015 to the largest HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P mode. */
10016 *nonzero &= rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits;
10017 return NULL;
10020 tem = get_last_value (x);
10021 if (tem)
10023 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND)
10024 tem = sign_extend_short_imm (tem, GET_MODE (x),
10025 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode));
10027 return tem;
10030 if (nonzero_sign_valid && rsp->nonzero_bits)
10032 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = rsp->nonzero_bits;
10034 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
10035 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
10036 mask |= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
10038 *nonzero &= mask;
10041 return NULL;
10044 /* Return the number of bits at the high-order end of X that are known to
10045 be equal to the sign bit. X will be used in mode MODE; if MODE is
10046 VOIDmode, X will be used in its own mode. The returned value will always
10047 be between 1 and the number of bits in MODE. */
10049 static rtx
10050 reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
10051 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
10052 machine_mode known_mode
10053 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
10054 unsigned int known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
10055 unsigned int *result)
10057 rtx tem;
10058 reg_stat_type *rsp;
10060 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
10061 if (rsp->last_set_value != 0
10062 && rsp->last_set_mode == mode
10063 && ((rsp->last_set_label >= label_tick_ebb_start
10064 && rsp->last_set_label < label_tick)
10065 || (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
10066 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) < subst_low_luid)
10067 || (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
10068 && REGNO (x) < reg_n_sets_max
10069 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x)) == 1
10070 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
10071 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
10072 REGNO (x)))))
10074 *result = rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies;
10075 return NULL;
10078 tem = get_last_value (x);
10079 if (tem != 0)
10080 return tem;
10082 if (nonzero_sign_valid && rsp->sign_bit_copies != 0
10083 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
10084 *result = rsp->sign_bit_copies;
10086 return NULL;
10089 /* Return the number of "extended" bits there are in X, when interpreted
10090 as a quantity in MODE whose signedness is indicated by UNSIGNEDP. For
10091 unsigned quantities, this is the number of high-order zero bits.
10092 For signed quantities, this is the number of copies of the sign bit
10093 minus 1. In both case, this function returns the number of "spare"
10094 bits. For example, if two quantities for which this function returns
10095 at least 1 are added, the addition is known not to overflow.
10097 This function will always return 0 unless called during combine, which
10098 implies that it must be called from a define_split. */
10100 unsigned int
10101 extended_count (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode, int unsignedp)
10103 if (nonzero_sign_valid == 0)
10104 return 0;
10106 return (unsignedp
10107 ? (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
10108 ? (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1
10109 - floor_log2 (nonzero_bits (x, mode)))
10110 : 0)
10111 : num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) - 1);
10114 /* This function is called from `simplify_shift_const' to merge two
10115 outer operations. Specifically, we have already found that we need
10116 to perform operation *POP0 with constant *PCONST0 at the outermost
10117 position. We would now like to also perform OP1 with constant CONST1
10118 (with *POP0 being done last).
10120 Return 1 if we can do the operation and update *POP0 and *PCONST0 with
10121 the resulting operation. *PCOMP_P is set to 1 if we would need to
10122 complement the innermost operand, otherwise it is unchanged.
10124 MODE is the mode in which the operation will be done. No bits outside
10125 the width of this mode matter. It is assumed that the width of this mode
10126 is smaller than or equal to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT.
10128 If *POP0 or OP1 are UNKNOWN, it means no operation is required. Only NEG, PLUS,
10129 IOR, XOR, and AND are supported. We may set *POP0 to SET if the proper
10130 result is simply *PCONST0.
10132 If the resulting operation cannot be expressed as one operation, we
10133 return 0 and do not change *POP0, *PCONST0, and *PCOMP_P. */
10135 static int
10136 merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code *pop0, HOST_WIDE_INT *pconst0, enum rtx_code op1, HOST_WIDE_INT const1, machine_mode mode, int *pcomp_p)
10138 enum rtx_code op0 = *pop0;
10139 HOST_WIDE_INT const0 = *pconst0;
10141 const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
10142 const1 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
10144 /* If OP0 is an AND, clear unimportant bits in CONST1. */
10145 if (op0 == AND)
10146 const1 &= const0;
10148 /* If OP0 or OP1 is UNKNOWN, this is easy. Similarly if they are the same or
10149 if OP0 is SET. */
10151 if (op1 == UNKNOWN || op0 == SET)
10152 return 1;
10154 else if (op0 == UNKNOWN)
10155 op0 = op1, const0 = const1;
10157 else if (op0 == op1)
10159 switch (op0)
10161 case AND:
10162 const0 &= const1;
10163 break;
10164 case IOR:
10165 const0 |= const1;
10166 break;
10167 case XOR:
10168 const0 ^= const1;
10169 break;
10170 case PLUS:
10171 const0 += const1;
10172 break;
10173 case NEG:
10174 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10175 break;
10176 default:
10177 break;
10181 /* Otherwise, if either is a PLUS or NEG, we can't do anything. */
10182 else if (op0 == PLUS || op1 == PLUS || op0 == NEG || op1 == NEG)
10183 return 0;
10185 /* If the two constants aren't the same, we can't do anything. The
10186 remaining six cases can all be done. */
10187 else if (const0 != const1)
10188 return 0;
10190 else
10191 switch (op0)
10193 case IOR:
10194 if (op1 == AND)
10195 /* (a & b) | b == b */
10196 op0 = SET;
10197 else /* op1 == XOR */
10198 /* (a ^ b) | b == a | b */
10200 break;
10202 case XOR:
10203 if (op1 == AND)
10204 /* (a & b) ^ b == (~a) & b */
10205 op0 = AND, *pcomp_p = 1;
10206 else /* op1 == IOR */
10207 /* (a | b) ^ b == a & ~b */
10208 op0 = AND, const0 = ~const0;
10209 break;
10211 case AND:
10212 if (op1 == IOR)
10213 /* (a | b) & b == b */
10214 op0 = SET;
10215 else /* op1 == XOR */
10216 /* (a ^ b) & b) == (~a) & b */
10217 *pcomp_p = 1;
10218 break;
10219 default:
10220 break;
10223 /* Check for NO-OP cases. */
10224 const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
10225 if (const0 == 0
10226 && (op0 == IOR || op0 == XOR || op0 == PLUS))
10227 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10228 else if (const0 == 0 && op0 == AND)
10229 op0 = SET;
10230 else if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const0 == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
10231 && op0 == AND)
10232 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10234 *pop0 = op0;
10236 /* ??? Slightly redundant with the above mask, but not entirely.
10237 Moving this above means we'd have to sign-extend the mode mask
10238 for the final test. */
10239 if (op0 != UNKNOWN && op0 != NEG)
10240 *pconst0 = trunc_int_for_mode (const0, mode);
10242 return 1;
10245 /* A helper to simplify_shift_const_1 to determine the mode we can perform
10246 the shift in. The original shift operation CODE is performed on OP in
10247 ORIG_MODE. Return the wider mode MODE if we can perform the operation
10248 in that mode. Return ORIG_MODE otherwise. We can also assume that the
10249 result of the shift is subject to operation OUTER_CODE with operand
10250 OUTER_CONST. */
10252 static machine_mode
10253 try_widen_shift_mode (enum rtx_code code, rtx op, int count,
10254 machine_mode orig_mode, machine_mode mode,
10255 enum rtx_code outer_code, HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const)
10257 if (orig_mode == mode)
10258 return mode;
10259 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode));
10261 /* In general we can't perform in wider mode for right shift and rotate. */
10262 switch (code)
10264 case ASHIFTRT:
10265 /* We can still widen if the bits brought in from the left are identical
10266 to the sign bit of ORIG_MODE. */
10267 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op, mode)
10268 > (unsigned) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
10269 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode)))
10270 return mode;
10271 return orig_mode;
10273 case LSHIFTRT:
10274 /* Similarly here but with zero bits. */
10275 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
10276 && (nonzero_bits (op, mode) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (orig_mode)) == 0)
10277 return mode;
10279 /* We can also widen if the bits brought in will be masked off. This
10280 operation is performed in ORIG_MODE. */
10281 if (outer_code == AND)
10283 int care_bits = low_bitmask_len (orig_mode, outer_const);
10285 if (care_bits >= 0
10286 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode) - care_bits >= count)
10287 return mode;
10289 /* fall through */
10291 case ROTATE:
10292 return orig_mode;
10294 case ROTATERT:
10295 gcc_unreachable ();
10297 default:
10298 return mode;
10302 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by ORIG_COUNT bits. CODE says what kind
10303 of shift. The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. Return NULL_RTX
10304 if we cannot simplify it. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10306 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10307 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10308 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10310 static rtx
10311 simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode result_mode,
10312 rtx varop, int orig_count)
10314 enum rtx_code orig_code = code;
10315 rtx orig_varop = varop;
10316 int count;
10317 machine_mode mode = result_mode;
10318 machine_mode shift_mode, tmode;
10319 unsigned int mode_words
10320 = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
10321 /* We form (outer_op (code varop count) (outer_const)). */
10322 enum rtx_code outer_op = UNKNOWN;
10323 HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const = 0;
10324 int complement_p = 0;
10325 rtx new_rtx, x;
10327 /* Make sure and truncate the "natural" shift on the way in. We don't
10328 want to do this inside the loop as it makes it more difficult to
10329 combine shifts. */
10330 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
10331 orig_count &= GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1;
10333 /* If we were given an invalid count, don't do anything except exactly
10334 what was requested. */
10336 if (orig_count < 0 || orig_count >= (int) GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode))
10337 return NULL_RTX;
10339 count = orig_count;
10341 /* Unless one of the branches of the `if' in this loop does a `continue',
10342 we will `break' the loop after the `if'. */
10344 while (count != 0)
10346 /* If we have an operand of (clobber (const_int 0)), fail. */
10347 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
10348 return NULL_RTX;
10350 /* Convert ROTATERT to ROTATE. */
10351 if (code == ROTATERT)
10353 unsigned int bitsize = GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (result_mode);
10354 code = ROTATE;
10355 count = bitsize - count;
10358 shift_mode = try_widen_shift_mode (code, varop, count, result_mode,
10359 mode, outer_op, outer_const);
10360 machine_mode shift_unit_mode = GET_MODE_INNER (shift_mode);
10362 /* Handle cases where the count is greater than the size of the mode
10363 minus 1. For ASHIFT, use the size minus one as the count (this can
10364 occur when simplifying (lshiftrt (ashiftrt ..))). For rotates,
10365 take the count modulo the size. For other shifts, the result is
10366 zero.
10368 Since these shifts are being produced by the compiler by combining
10369 multiple operations, each of which are defined, we know what the
10370 result is supposed to be. */
10372 if (count > (GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode) - 1))
10374 if (code == ASHIFTRT)
10375 count = GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode) - 1;
10376 else if (code == ROTATE || code == ROTATERT)
10377 count %= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode);
10378 else
10380 /* We can't simply return zero because there may be an
10381 outer op. */
10382 varop = const0_rtx;
10383 count = 0;
10384 break;
10388 /* If we discovered we had to complement VAROP, leave. Making a NOT
10389 here would cause an infinite loop. */
10390 if (complement_p)
10391 break;
10393 if (shift_mode == shift_unit_mode)
10395 /* An arithmetic right shift of a quantity known to be -1 or 0
10396 is a no-op. */
10397 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10398 && (num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_unit_mode)
10399 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode)))
10401 count = 0;
10402 break;
10405 /* If we are doing an arithmetic right shift and discarding all but
10406 the sign bit copies, this is equivalent to doing a shift by the
10407 bitsize minus one. Convert it into that shift because it will
10408 often allow other simplifications. */
10410 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10411 && (count + num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_unit_mode)
10412 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode)))
10413 count = GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode) - 1;
10415 /* We simplify the tests below and elsewhere by converting
10416 ASHIFTRT to LSHIFTRT if we know the sign bit is clear.
10417 `make_compound_operation' will convert it to an ASHIFTRT for
10418 those machines (such as VAX) that don't have an LSHIFTRT. */
10419 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10420 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode)
10421 && val_signbit_known_clear_p (shift_unit_mode,
10422 nonzero_bits (varop,
10423 shift_unit_mode)))
10424 code = LSHIFTRT;
10426 if (((code == LSHIFTRT
10427 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode)
10428 && !(nonzero_bits (varop, shift_unit_mode) >> count))
10429 || (code == ASHIFT
10430 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode)
10431 && !((nonzero_bits (varop, shift_unit_mode) << count)
10432 & GET_MODE_MASK (shift_unit_mode))))
10433 && !side_effects_p (varop))
10434 varop = const0_rtx;
10437 switch (GET_CODE (varop))
10439 case SIGN_EXTEND:
10440 case ZERO_EXTEND:
10441 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
10442 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
10443 new_rtx = expand_compound_operation (varop);
10444 if (new_rtx != varop)
10446 varop = new_rtx;
10447 continue;
10449 break;
10451 case MEM:
10452 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10453 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10454 break;
10456 /* If we have (xshiftrt (mem ...) C) and C is MODE_WIDTH
10457 minus the width of a smaller mode, we can do this with a
10458 SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND from the narrower memory location. */
10459 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10460 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (varop, 0),
10461 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (varop))
10462 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop)
10463 && (tmode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - count,
10464 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode)
10466 new_rtx = adjust_address_nv (varop, tmode,
10467 BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? 0
10468 : count / BITS_PER_UNIT);
10470 varop = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code == ASHIFTRT ? SIGN_EXTEND
10471 : ZERO_EXTEND, mode, new_rtx);
10472 count = 0;
10473 continue;
10475 break;
10477 case SUBREG:
10478 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10479 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10480 break;
10482 /* If VAROP is a SUBREG, strip it as long as the inner operand has
10483 the same number of words as what we've seen so far. Then store
10484 the widest mode in MODE. */
10485 if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop)
10486 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))
10487 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)))
10488 && (unsigned int) ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))
10489 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
10490 == mode_words
10491 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (varop)) == MODE_INT
10492 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop))) == MODE_INT)
10494 varop = SUBREG_REG (varop);
10495 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
10496 mode = GET_MODE (varop);
10497 continue;
10499 break;
10501 case MULT:
10502 /* Some machines use MULT instead of ASHIFT because MULT
10503 is cheaper. But it is still better on those machines to
10504 merge two shifts into one. */
10505 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10506 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0)
10508 varop
10509 = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, GET_MODE (varop),
10510 XEXP (varop, 0),
10511 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10512 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));
10513 continue;
10515 break;
10517 case UDIV:
10518 /* Similar, for when divides are cheaper. */
10519 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10520 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0)
10522 varop
10523 = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop),
10524 XEXP (varop, 0),
10525 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10526 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));
10527 continue;
10529 break;
10531 case ASHIFTRT:
10532 /* If we are extracting just the sign bit of an arithmetic
10533 right shift, that shift is not needed. However, the sign
10534 bit of a wider mode may be different from what would be
10535 interpreted as the sign bit in a narrower mode, so, if
10536 the result is narrower, don't discard the shift. */
10537 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10538 && count == (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1)
10539 && (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (result_mode)
10540 >= GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop))))
10542 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10543 continue;
10546 /* fall through */
10548 case LSHIFTRT:
10549 case ASHIFT:
10550 case ROTATE:
10551 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10552 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10553 break;
10555 /* Here we have two nested shifts. The result is usually the
10556 AND of a new shift with a mask. We compute the result below. */
10557 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10558 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) >= 0
10559 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop))
10560 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10561 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
10563 enum rtx_code first_code = GET_CODE (varop);
10564 unsigned int first_count = INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1));
10565 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
10566 rtx mask_rtx;
10568 /* We have one common special case. We can't do any merging if
10569 the inner code is an ASHIFTRT of a smaller mode. However, if
10570 we have (ashift:M1 (subreg:M1 (ashiftrt:M2 FOO C1) 0) C2)
10571 with C2 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M1) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M2),
10572 we can convert it to
10573 (ashiftrt:M1 (ashift:M1 (and:M1 (subreg:M1 FOO 0) C3) C2) C1).
10574 This simplifies certain SIGN_EXTEND operations. */
10575 if (code == ASHIFT && first_code == ASHIFTRT
10576 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode)
10577 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop))))
10579 /* C3 has the low-order C1 bits zero. */
10581 mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
10582 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << first_count) - 1);
10584 varop = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode,
10585 XEXP (varop, 0), mask);
10586 varop = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, result_mode,
10587 varop, count);
10588 count = first_count;
10589 code = ASHIFTRT;
10590 continue;
10593 /* If this was (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) and FOO has more
10594 than C1 high-order bits equal to the sign bit, we can convert
10595 this to either an ASHIFT or an ASHIFTRT depending on the
10596 two counts.
10598 We cannot do this if VAROP's mode is not SHIFT_MODE. */
10600 if (code == ASHIFTRT && first_code == ASHIFT
10601 && GET_MODE (varop) == shift_mode
10602 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (varop, 0), shift_mode)
10603 > first_count))
10605 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10606 count -= first_count;
10607 if (count < 0)
10609 count = -count;
10610 code = ASHIFT;
10613 continue;
10616 /* There are some cases we can't do. If CODE is ASHIFTRT,
10617 we can only do this if FIRST_CODE is also ASHIFTRT.
10619 We can't do the case when CODE is ROTATE and FIRST_CODE is
10620 ASHIFTRT.
10622 If the mode of this shift is not the mode of the outer shift,
10623 we can't do this if either shift is a right shift or ROTATE.
10625 Finally, we can't do any of these if the mode is too wide
10626 unless the codes are the same.
10628 Handle the case where the shift codes are the same
10629 first. */
10631 if (code == first_code)
10633 if (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode
10634 && (code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT
10635 || code == ROTATE))
10636 break;
10638 count += first_count;
10639 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10640 continue;
10643 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10644 || (code == ROTATE && first_code == ASHIFTRT)
10645 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10646 || (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode
10647 && (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT
10648 || first_code == ROTATE
10649 || code == ROTATE)))
10650 break;
10652 /* To compute the mask to apply after the shift, shift the
10653 nonzero bits of the inner shift the same way the
10654 outer shift will. */
10656 mask_rtx = gen_int_mode (nonzero_bits (varop, GET_MODE (varop)),
10657 result_mode);
10659 mask_rtx
10660 = simplify_const_binary_operation (code, result_mode, mask_rtx,
10661 GEN_INT (count));
10663 /* Give up if we can't compute an outer operation to use. */
10664 if (mask_rtx == 0
10665 || !CONST_INT_P (mask_rtx)
10666 || ! merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, AND,
10667 INTVAL (mask_rtx),
10668 result_mode, &complement_p))
10669 break;
10671 /* If the shifts are in the same direction, we add the
10672 counts. Otherwise, we subtract them. */
10673 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10674 == (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT))
10675 count += first_count;
10676 else
10677 count -= first_count;
10679 /* If COUNT is positive, the new shift is usually CODE,
10680 except for the two exceptions below, in which case it is
10681 FIRST_CODE. If the count is negative, FIRST_CODE should
10682 always be used */
10683 if (count > 0
10684 && ((first_code == ROTATE && code == ASHIFT)
10685 || (first_code == ASHIFTRT && code == LSHIFTRT)))
10686 code = first_code;
10687 else if (count < 0)
10688 code = first_code, count = -count;
10690 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10691 continue;
10694 /* If we have (A << B << C) for any shift, we can convert this to
10695 (A << C << B). This wins if A is a constant. Only try this if
10696 B is not a constant. */
10698 else if (GET_CODE (varop) == code
10699 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 0))
10700 && !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1)))
10702 /* For ((unsigned) (cstULL >> count)) >> cst2 we have to make
10703 sure the result will be masked. See PR70222. */
10704 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10705 && mode != result_mode
10706 && !merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, AND,
10707 GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode)
10708 >> orig_count, result_mode,
10709 &complement_p))
10710 break;
10711 /* For ((int) (cstLL >> count)) >> cst2 just give up. Queuing
10712 up outer sign extension (often left and right shift) is
10713 hardly more efficient than the original. See PR70429. */
10714 if (code == ASHIFTRT && mode != result_mode)
10715 break;
10717 rtx new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation (code, mode,
10718 XEXP (varop, 0),
10719 GEN_INT (count));
10720 varop = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, mode, new_rtx, XEXP (varop, 1));
10721 count = 0;
10722 continue;
10724 break;
10726 case NOT:
10727 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10728 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10729 break;
10731 /* Make this fit the case below. */
10732 varop = gen_rtx_XOR (mode, XEXP (varop, 0), constm1_rtx);
10733 continue;
10735 case IOR:
10736 case AND:
10737 case XOR:
10738 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10739 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10740 break;
10742 /* If we have (xshiftrt (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) C)
10743 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10744 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10745 we have an (le X 0) operation. If we have an arithmetic shift
10746 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or we have a logical shift with
10747 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of -1, we have a (neg (le X 0)) operation. */
10749 if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == PLUS
10750 && XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
10751 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
10752 && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
10753 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1)
10754 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1)))
10756 count = 0;
10757 varop = gen_rtx_LE (GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1),
10758 const0_rtx);
10760 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT)
10761 varop = gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop), varop);
10763 continue;
10766 /* If we have (shift (logical)), move the logical to the outside
10767 to allow it to possibly combine with another logical and the
10768 shift to combine with another shift. This also canonicalizes to
10769 what a ZERO_EXTRACT looks like. Also, some machines have
10770 (and (shift)) insns. */
10772 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10773 /* We can't do this if we have (ashiftrt (xor)) and the
10774 constant has its sign bit set in shift_mode with shift_mode
10775 wider than result_mode. */
10776 && !(code == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (varop) == XOR
10777 && result_mode != shift_mode
10778 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)),
10779 shift_mode))
10780 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10781 (code, result_mode,
10782 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10783 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10784 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10785 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, GET_CODE (varop),
10786 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10788 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10789 continue;
10792 /* If we can't do that, try to simplify the shift in each arm of the
10793 logical expression, make a new logical expression, and apply
10794 the inverse distributive law. This also can't be done for
10795 (ashiftrt (xor)) where we've widened the shift and the constant
10796 changes the sign bit. */
10797 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10798 && !(code == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (varop) == XOR
10799 && result_mode != shift_mode
10800 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)),
10801 shift_mode)))
10803 rtx lhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, shift_mode,
10804 XEXP (varop, 0), count);
10805 rtx rhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, shift_mode,
10806 XEXP (varop, 1), count);
10808 varop = simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), shift_mode,
10809 lhs, rhs);
10810 varop = apply_distributive_law (varop);
10812 count = 0;
10813 continue;
10815 break;
10817 case EQ:
10818 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10819 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10820 break;
10822 /* Convert (lshiftrt (eq FOO 0) C) to (xor FOO 1) if STORE_FLAG_VALUE
10823 says that the sign bit can be tested, FOO has mode MODE, C is
10824 GET_MODE_PRECISION (MODE) - 1, and FOO has only its low-order bit
10825 that may be nonzero. */
10826 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10827 && XEXP (varop, 1) == const0_rtx
10828 && GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == result_mode
10829 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10830 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10831 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
10832 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1
10833 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, 1, result_mode,
10834 &complement_p))
10836 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10837 count = 0;
10838 continue;
10840 break;
10842 case NEG:
10843 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10844 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10845 break;
10847 /* (lshiftrt (neg A) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C is one less
10848 than the number of bits in the mode is equivalent to A. */
10849 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10850 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10851 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1)
10853 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10854 count = 0;
10855 continue;
10858 /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Move the
10859 NEG outside to allow shifts to combine. */
10860 if (code == ASHIFT
10861 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, NEG, 0, result_mode,
10862 &complement_p))
10864 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10865 continue;
10867 break;
10869 case PLUS:
10870 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10871 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10872 break;
10874 /* (lshiftrt (plus A -1) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C
10875 is one less than the number of bits in the mode is
10876 equivalent to (xor A 1). */
10877 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10878 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10879 && XEXP (varop, 1) == constm1_rtx
10880 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1
10881 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, 1, result_mode,
10882 &complement_p))
10884 count = 0;
10885 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10886 continue;
10889 /* If we have (xshiftrt (plus FOO BAR) C), and the only bits
10890 that might be nonzero in BAR are those being shifted out and those
10891 bits are known zero in FOO, we can replace the PLUS with FOO.
10892 Similarly in the other operand order. This code occurs when
10893 we are computing the size of a variable-size array. */
10895 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10896 && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10897 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode) >> count == 0
10898 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode)
10899 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)) == 0)
10901 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10902 continue;
10904 else if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10905 && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10906 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10907 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)
10908 >> count)
10909 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)
10910 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1),
10911 result_mode)))
10913 varop = XEXP (varop, 1);
10914 continue;
10917 /* (ashift (plus foo C) N) is (plus (ashift foo N) C'). */
10918 if (code == ASHIFT
10919 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10920 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10921 (ASHIFT, result_mode,
10922 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10923 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10924 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10925 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, PLUS,
10926 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10928 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10929 continue;
10932 /* Check for 'PLUS signbit', which is the canonical form of 'XOR
10933 signbit', and attempt to change the PLUS to an XOR and move it to
10934 the outer operation as is done above in the AND/IOR/XOR case
10935 leg for shift(logical). See details in logical handling above
10936 for reasoning in doing so. */
10937 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10938 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10939 && mode_signbit_p (result_mode, XEXP (varop, 1))
10940 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10941 (code, result_mode,
10942 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10943 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10944 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10945 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR,
10946 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10948 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10949 continue;
10952 break;
10954 case MINUS:
10955 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10956 if (shift_mode != shift_unit_mode)
10957 break;
10959 /* If we have (xshiftrt (minus (ashiftrt X C)) X) C)
10960 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10961 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10962 we have a (gt X 0) operation. If the shift is arithmetic with
10963 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of 1 or logical with STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1,
10964 we have a (neg (gt X 0)) operation. */
10966 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
10967 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
10968 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1)
10969 && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
10970 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10971 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == count
10972 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1)))
10974 count = 0;
10975 varop = gen_rtx_GT (GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1),
10976 const0_rtx);
10978 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT)
10979 varop = gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop), varop);
10981 continue;
10983 break;
10985 case TRUNCATE:
10986 /* Change (lshiftrt (truncate (lshiftrt))) to (truncate (lshiftrt))
10987 if the truncate does not affect the value. */
10988 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10989 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
10990 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10991 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10992 >= (GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)))
10993 - GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)))))
10995 rtx varop_inner = XEXP (varop, 0);
10997 varop_inner
10998 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (GET_MODE (varop_inner),
10999 XEXP (varop_inner, 0),
11000 GEN_INT
11001 (count + INTVAL (XEXP (varop_inner, 1))));
11002 varop = gen_rtx_TRUNCATE (GET_MODE (varop), varop_inner);
11003 count = 0;
11004 continue;
11006 break;
11008 default:
11009 break;
11012 break;
11015 shift_mode = try_widen_shift_mode (code, varop, count, result_mode, mode,
11016 outer_op, outer_const);
11018 /* We have now finished analyzing the shift. The result should be
11019 a shift of type CODE with SHIFT_MODE shifting VAROP COUNT places. If
11020 OUTER_OP is non-UNKNOWN, it is an operation that needs to be applied
11021 to the result of the shift. OUTER_CONST is the relevant constant,
11022 but we must turn off all bits turned off in the shift. */
11024 if (outer_op == UNKNOWN
11025 && orig_code == code && orig_count == count
11026 && varop == orig_varop
11027 && shift_mode == GET_MODE (varop))
11028 return NULL_RTX;
11030 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
11031 varop = gen_lowpart (shift_mode, varop);
11032 if (varop == NULL_RTX || GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
11033 return NULL_RTX;
11035 /* If we have an outer operation and we just made a shift, it is
11036 possible that we could have simplified the shift were it not
11037 for the outer operation. So try to do the simplification
11038 recursively. */
11040 if (outer_op != UNKNOWN)
11041 x = simplify_shift_const_1 (code, shift_mode, varop, count);
11042 else
11043 x = NULL_RTX;
11045 if (x == NULL_RTX)
11046 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, shift_mode, varop, GEN_INT (count));
11048 /* If we were doing an LSHIFTRT in a wider mode than it was originally,
11049 turn off all the bits that the shift would have turned off. */
11050 if (orig_code == LSHIFTRT && result_mode != shift_mode)
11051 x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, shift_mode, x,
11052 GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode) >> orig_count);
11054 /* Do the remainder of the processing in RESULT_MODE. */
11055 x = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (result_mode, x);
11057 /* If COMPLEMENT_P is set, we have to complement X before doing the outer
11058 operation. */
11059 if (complement_p)
11060 x = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, result_mode, x, result_mode);
11062 if (outer_op != UNKNOWN)
11064 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) != RTX_UNARY
11065 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11066 outer_const = trunc_int_for_mode (outer_const, result_mode);
11068 if (outer_op == AND)
11069 x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode, x, outer_const);
11070 else if (outer_op == SET)
11072 /* This means that we have determined that the result is
11073 equivalent to a constant. This should be rare. */
11074 if (!side_effects_p (x))
11075 x = GEN_INT (outer_const);
11077 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) == RTX_UNARY)
11078 x = simplify_gen_unary (outer_op, result_mode, x, result_mode);
11079 else
11080 x = simplify_gen_binary (outer_op, result_mode, x,
11081 GEN_INT (outer_const));
11084 return x;
11087 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by COUNT bits. CODE says what kind of shift.
11088 The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. If we cannot simplify it,
11089 return X or, if it is NULL, synthesize the expression with
11090 simplify_gen_binary. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
11092 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
11093 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
11094 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
11096 static rtx
11097 simplify_shift_const (rtx x, enum rtx_code code, machine_mode result_mode,
11098 rtx varop, int count)
11100 rtx tem = simplify_shift_const_1 (code, result_mode, varop, count);
11101 if (tem)
11102 return tem;
11104 if (!x)
11105 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (varop), varop, GEN_INT (count));
11106 if (GET_MODE (x) != result_mode)
11107 x = gen_lowpart (result_mode, x);
11108 return x;
11112 /* A subroutine of recog_for_combine. See there for arguments and
11113 return value. */
11115 static int
11116 recog_for_combine_1 (rtx *pnewpat, rtx_insn *insn, rtx *pnotes)
11118 rtx pat = *pnewpat;
11119 rtx pat_without_clobbers;
11120 int insn_code_number;
11121 int num_clobbers_to_add = 0;
11122 int i;
11123 rtx notes = NULL_RTX;
11124 rtx old_notes, old_pat;
11125 int old_icode;
11127 /* If PAT is a PARALLEL, check to see if it contains the CLOBBER
11128 we use to indicate that something didn't match. If we find such a
11129 thing, force rejection. */
11130 if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
11131 for (i = XVECLEN (pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
11132 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER
11133 && XEXP (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i), 0) == const0_rtx)
11134 return -1;
11136 old_pat = PATTERN (insn);
11137 old_notes = REG_NOTES (insn);
11138 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
11139 REG_NOTES (insn) = NULL_RTX;
11141 insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add);
11142 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
11144 if (insn_code_number < 0)
11145 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file);
11146 else
11147 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file);
11148 print_rtl_single (dump_file, pat);
11151 /* If it isn't, there is the possibility that we previously had an insn
11152 that clobbered some register as a side effect, but the combined
11153 insn doesn't need to do that. So try once more without the clobbers
11154 unless this represents an ASM insn. */
11156 if (insn_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (pat)
11157 && GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
11159 int pos;
11161 for (pos = 0, i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
11162 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER)
11164 if (i != pos)
11165 SUBST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, pos), XVECEXP (pat, 0, i));
11166 pos++;
11169 SUBST_INT (XVECLEN (pat, 0), pos);
11171 if (pos == 1)
11172 pat = XVECEXP (pat, 0, 0);
11174 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
11175 insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add);
11176 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
11178 if (insn_code_number < 0)
11179 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file);
11180 else
11181 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file);
11182 print_rtl_single (dump_file, pat);
11186 pat_without_clobbers = pat;
11188 PATTERN (insn) = old_pat;
11189 REG_NOTES (insn) = old_notes;
11191 /* Recognize all noop sets, these will be killed by followup pass. */
11192 if (insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (pat) == SET && set_noop_p (pat))
11193 insn_code_number = NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE, num_clobbers_to_add = 0;
11195 /* If we had any clobbers to add, make a new pattern than contains
11196 them. Then check to make sure that all of them are dead. */
11197 if (num_clobbers_to_add)
11199 rtx newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
11200 rtvec_alloc (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL
11201 ? (XVECLEN (pat, 0)
11202 + num_clobbers_to_add)
11203 : num_clobbers_to_add + 1));
11205 if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
11206 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
11207 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i) = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
11208 else
11209 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = pat;
11211 add_clobbers (newpat, insn_code_number);
11213 for (i = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - num_clobbers_to_add;
11214 i < XVECLEN (newpat, 0); i++)
11216 if (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0))
11217 && ! reg_dead_at_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), insn))
11218 return -1;
11219 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)) != SCRATCH)
11221 gcc_assert (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)));
11222 notes = alloc_reg_note (REG_UNUSED,
11223 XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), notes);
11226 pat = newpat;
11229 if (insn_code_number >= 0
11230 && insn_code_number != NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE)
11232 old_pat = PATTERN (insn);
11233 old_notes = REG_NOTES (insn);
11234 old_icode = INSN_CODE (insn);
11235 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
11236 REG_NOTES (insn) = notes;
11237 INSN_CODE (insn) = insn_code_number;
11239 /* Allow targets to reject combined insn. */
11240 if (!targetm.legitimate_combined_insn (insn))
11242 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
11243 fputs ("Instruction not appropriate for target.",
11244 dump_file);
11246 /* Callers expect recog_for_combine to strip
11247 clobbers from the pattern on failure. */
11248 pat = pat_without_clobbers;
11249 notes = NULL_RTX;
11251 insn_code_number = -1;
11254 PATTERN (insn) = old_pat;
11255 REG_NOTES (insn) = old_notes;
11256 INSN_CODE (insn) = old_icode;
11259 *pnewpat = pat;
11260 *pnotes = notes;
11262 return insn_code_number;
11265 /* Change every ZERO_EXTRACT and ZERO_EXTEND of a SUBREG that can be
11266 expressed as an AND and maybe an LSHIFTRT, to that formulation.
11267 Return whether anything was so changed. */
11269 static bool
11270 change_zero_ext (rtx pat)
11272 bool changed = false;
11273 rtx *src = &SET_SRC (pat);
11275 subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array;
11276 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter, array, src, NONCONST)
11278 rtx x = **iter;
11279 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
11280 int size;
11282 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11283 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
11284 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 2))
11285 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) != VOIDmode
11286 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
11287 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
11289 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
11291 size = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
11293 int start = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 2));
11294 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11295 start = GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode) - size - start;
11297 if (start)
11298 x = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (inner_mode, XEXP (x, 0), GEN_INT (start));
11299 else
11300 x = XEXP (x, 0);
11301 if (mode != inner_mode)
11302 x = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, x);
11304 else if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND
11305 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode)
11306 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
11307 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))))
11308 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (x, 0))
11309 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0)))
11311 size = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
11312 x = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
11313 if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
11314 x = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, x);
11316 else if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND
11317 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode)
11318 && REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
11319 && HARD_REGISTER_P (XEXP (x, 0))
11320 && can_change_dest_mode (XEXP (x, 0), 0, mode))
11322 size = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
11323 x = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)));
11325 else
11326 continue;
11328 if (!(GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT
11329 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
11330 && size + INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
11332 wide_int mask = wi::mask (size, false, GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode));
11333 x = gen_rtx_AND (mode, x, immed_wide_int_const (mask, mode));
11336 SUBST (**iter, x);
11337 changed = true;
11340 if (changed)
11341 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter, array, src, NONCONST)
11342 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (**iter);
11344 rtx *dst = &SET_DEST (pat);
11345 if (GET_CODE (*dst) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11346 && REG_P (XEXP (*dst, 0))
11347 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*dst, 1))
11348 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*dst, 2)))
11350 rtx reg = XEXP (*dst, 0);
11351 int width = INTVAL (XEXP (*dst, 1));
11352 int offset = INTVAL (XEXP (*dst, 2));
11353 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (reg);
11354 int reg_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11355 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11356 offset = reg_width - width - offset;
11358 rtx x, y, z, w;
11359 wide_int mask = wi::shifted_mask (offset, width, true, reg_width);
11360 wide_int mask2 = wi::shifted_mask (offset, width, false, reg_width);
11361 x = gen_rtx_AND (mode, reg, immed_wide_int_const (mask, mode));
11362 if (offset)
11363 y = gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode, SET_SRC (pat), GEN_INT (offset));
11364 else
11365 y = SET_SRC (pat);
11366 z = gen_rtx_AND (mode, y, immed_wide_int_const (mask2, mode));
11367 w = gen_rtx_IOR (mode, x, z);
11368 SUBST (SET_DEST (pat), reg);
11369 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat), w);
11371 changed = true;
11374 return changed;
11377 /* Like recog, but we receive the address of a pointer to a new pattern.
11378 We try to match the rtx that the pointer points to.
11379 If that fails, we may try to modify or replace the pattern,
11380 storing the replacement into the same pointer object.
11382 Modifications include deletion or addition of CLOBBERs. If the
11383 instruction will still not match, we change ZERO_EXTEND and ZERO_EXTRACT
11384 to the equivalent AND and perhaps LSHIFTRT patterns, and try with that
11385 (and undo if that fails).
11387 PNOTES is a pointer to a location where any REG_UNUSED notes added for
11388 the CLOBBERs are placed.
11390 The value is the final insn code from the pattern ultimately matched,
11391 or -1. */
11393 static int
11394 recog_for_combine (rtx *pnewpat, rtx_insn *insn, rtx *pnotes)
11396 rtx pat = *pnewpat;
11397 int insn_code_number = recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat, insn, pnotes);
11398 if (insn_code_number >= 0 || check_asm_operands (pat))
11399 return insn_code_number;
11401 void *marker = get_undo_marker ();
11402 bool changed = false;
11404 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
11405 changed = change_zero_ext (pat);
11406 else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
11408 int i;
11409 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
11411 rtx set = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
11412 if (GET_CODE (set) == SET)
11413 changed |= change_zero_ext (set);
11417 if (changed)
11419 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat, insn, pnotes);
11421 if (insn_code_number < 0)
11422 undo_to_marker (marker);
11425 return insn_code_number;
11428 /* Like gen_lowpart_general but for use by combine. In combine it
11429 is not possible to create any new pseudoregs. However, it is
11430 safe to create invalid memory addresses, because combine will
11431 try to recognize them and all they will do is make the combine
11432 attempt fail.
11434 If for some reason this cannot do its job, an rtx
11435 (clobber (const_int 0)) is returned.
11436 An insn containing that will not be recognized. */
11438 static rtx
11439 gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode omode, rtx x)
11441 machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (x);
11442 unsigned int osize = GET_MODE_SIZE (omode);
11443 unsigned int isize = GET_MODE_SIZE (imode);
11444 rtx result;
11446 if (omode == imode)
11447 return x;
11449 /* We can only support MODE being wider than a word if X is a
11450 constant integer or has a mode the same size. */
11451 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (omode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
11452 && ! (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (x) || isize == osize))
11453 goto fail;
11455 /* X might be a paradoxical (subreg (mem)). In that case, gen_lowpart
11456 won't know what to do. So we will strip off the SUBREG here and
11457 process normally. */
11458 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
11460 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
11462 /* For use in case we fall down into the address adjustments
11463 further below, we need to adjust the known mode and size of
11464 x; imode and isize, since we just adjusted x. */
11465 imode = GET_MODE (x);
11467 if (imode == omode)
11468 return x;
11470 isize = GET_MODE_SIZE (imode);
11473 result = gen_lowpart_common (omode, x);
11475 if (result)
11476 return result;
11478 if (MEM_P (x))
11480 int offset = 0;
11482 /* Refuse to work on a volatile memory ref or one with a mode-dependent
11483 address. */
11484 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
11485 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (x, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
11486 goto fail;
11488 /* If we want to refer to something bigger than the original memref,
11489 generate a paradoxical subreg instead. That will force a reload
11490 of the original memref X. */
11491 if (isize < osize)
11492 return gen_rtx_SUBREG (omode, x, 0);
11494 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11495 offset = MAX (isize, UNITS_PER_WORD) - MAX (osize, UNITS_PER_WORD);
11497 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data is
11498 unchanged. */
11499 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
11500 offset -= MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, osize) - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, isize);
11502 return adjust_address_nv (x, omode, offset);
11505 /* If X is a comparison operator, rewrite it in a new mode. This
11506 probably won't match, but may allow further simplifications. */
11507 else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
11508 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (x), omode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
11510 /* If we couldn't simplify X any other way, just enclose it in a
11511 SUBREG. Normally, this SUBREG won't match, but some patterns may
11512 include an explicit SUBREG or we may simplify it further in combine. */
11513 else
11515 rtx res;
11517 if (imode == VOIDmode)
11519 imode = int_mode_for_mode (omode);
11520 x = gen_lowpart_common (imode, x);
11521 if (x == NULL)
11522 goto fail;
11524 res = lowpart_subreg (omode, x, imode);
11525 if (res)
11526 return res;
11529 fail:
11530 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (omode, const0_rtx);
11533 /* Try to simplify a comparison between OP0 and a constant OP1,
11534 where CODE is the comparison code that will be tested, into a
11535 (CODE OP0 const0_rtx) form.
11537 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use.
11538 *POP1 may be updated. */
11540 static enum rtx_code
11541 simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode,
11542 rtx op0, rtx *pop1)
11544 unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11545 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op = INTVAL (*pop1);
11547 /* Get the constant we are comparing against and turn off all bits
11548 not on in our mode. */
11549 if (mode != VOIDmode)
11550 const_op = trunc_int_for_mode (const_op, mode);
11552 /* If we are comparing against a constant power of two and the value
11553 being compared can only have that single bit nonzero (e.g., it was
11554 `and'ed with that bit), we can replace this with a comparison
11555 with zero. */
11556 if (const_op
11557 && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == GEU
11558 || code == LT || code == LTU)
11559 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11560 && pow2p_hwi (const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
11561 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11562 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))))
11564 code = (code == EQ || code == GE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ);
11565 const_op = 0;
11568 /* Similarly, if we are comparing a value known to be either -1 or
11569 0 with -1, change it to the opposite comparison against zero. */
11570 if (const_op == -1
11571 && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GT || code == LE
11572 || code == GEU || code == LTU)
11573 && num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) == mode_width)
11575 code = (code == EQ || code == LE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ);
11576 const_op = 0;
11579 /* Do some canonicalizations based on the comparison code. We prefer
11580 comparisons against zero and then prefer equality comparisons.
11581 If we can reduce the size of a constant, we will do that too. */
11582 switch (code)
11584 case LT:
11585 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1) */
11586 if (const_op > 0)
11588 const_op -= 1;
11589 code = LE;
11590 /* ... fall through to LE case below. */
11591 gcc_fallthrough ();
11593 else
11594 break;
11596 case LE:
11597 /* <= C is equivalent to < (C + 1); we do this for C < 0 */
11598 if (const_op < 0)
11600 const_op += 1;
11601 code = LT;
11604 /* If we are doing a <= 0 comparison on a value known to have
11605 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with == 0. */
11606 else if (const_op == 0
11607 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11608 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11609 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)))
11610 == 0)
11611 code = EQ;
11612 break;
11614 case GE:
11615 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11616 if (const_op > 0)
11618 const_op -= 1;
11619 code = GT;
11620 /* ... fall through to GT below. */
11621 gcc_fallthrough ();
11623 else
11624 break;
11626 case GT:
11627 /* > C is equivalent to >= (C + 1); we do this for C < 0. */
11628 if (const_op < 0)
11630 const_op += 1;
11631 code = GE;
11634 /* If we are doing a > 0 comparison on a value known to have
11635 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with != 0. */
11636 else if (const_op == 0
11637 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11638 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11639 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)))
11640 == 0)
11641 code = NE;
11642 break;
11644 case LTU:
11645 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1). */
11646 if (const_op > 0)
11648 const_op -= 1;
11649 code = LEU;
11650 /* ... fall through ... */
11652 /* (unsigned) < 0x80000000 is equivalent to >= 0. */
11653 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11654 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11655 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1))
11657 const_op = 0;
11658 code = GE;
11659 break;
11661 else
11662 break;
11664 case LEU:
11665 /* unsigned <= 0 is equivalent to == 0 */
11666 if (const_op == 0)
11667 code = EQ;
11668 /* (unsigned) <= 0x7fffffff is equivalent to >= 0. */
11669 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11670 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11671 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)) - 1)
11673 const_op = 0;
11674 code = GE;
11676 break;
11678 case GEU:
11679 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11680 if (const_op > 1)
11682 const_op -= 1;
11683 code = GTU;
11684 /* ... fall through ... */
11687 /* (unsigned) >= 0x80000000 is equivalent to < 0. */
11688 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11689 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11690 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1))
11692 const_op = 0;
11693 code = LT;
11694 break;
11696 else
11697 break;
11699 case GTU:
11700 /* unsigned > 0 is equivalent to != 0 */
11701 if (const_op == 0)
11702 code = NE;
11703 /* (unsigned) > 0x7fffffff is equivalent to < 0. */
11704 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11705 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11706 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)) - 1)
11708 const_op = 0;
11709 code = LT;
11711 break;
11713 default:
11714 break;
11717 *pop1 = GEN_INT (const_op);
11718 return code;
11721 /* Simplify a comparison between *POP0 and *POP1 where CODE is the
11722 comparison code that will be tested.
11724 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use. *POP0 and
11725 *POP1 may be updated.
11727 It is possible that we might detect that a comparison is either always
11728 true or always false. However, we do not perform general constant
11729 folding in combine, so this knowledge isn't useful. Such tautologies
11730 should have been detected earlier. Hence we ignore all such cases. */
11732 static enum rtx_code
11733 simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code code, rtx *pop0, rtx *pop1)
11735 rtx op0 = *pop0;
11736 rtx op1 = *pop1;
11737 rtx tem, tem1;
11738 int i;
11739 machine_mode mode, tmode;
11741 /* Try a few ways of applying the same transformation to both operands. */
11742 while (1)
11744 /* The test below this one won't handle SIGN_EXTENDs on these machines,
11745 so check specially. */
11746 if (!WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
11747 && code != GTU && code != GEU && code != LTU && code != LEU
11748 && GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (op1) == ASHIFTRT
11749 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
11750 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == ASHIFT
11751 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11752 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11753 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)))
11754 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0))))
11755 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11756 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1)
11757 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)
11758 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 1)
11759 && (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
11760 == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0))
11761 - (GET_MODE_PRECISION
11762 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))))))))
11764 op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0));
11765 op1 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0));
11768 /* If both operands are the same constant shift, see if we can ignore the
11769 shift. We can if the shift is a rotate or if the bits shifted out of
11770 this shift are known to be zero for both inputs and if the type of
11771 comparison is compatible with the shift. */
11772 if (GET_CODE (op0) == GET_CODE (op1)
11773 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
11774 && ((GET_CODE (op0) == ROTATE && (code == NE || code == EQ))
11775 || ((GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT)
11776 && (code != GT && code != LT && code != GE && code != LE))
11777 || (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT
11778 && (code != GTU && code != LTU
11779 && code != GEU && code != LEU)))
11780 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11781 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0
11782 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11783 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1))
11785 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
11786 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
11787 int shift_count = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
11789 if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT)
11790 mask &= (mask >> shift_count) << shift_count;
11791 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT)
11792 mask = (mask & (mask << shift_count)) >> shift_count;
11794 if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) & ~mask) == 0
11795 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op1, 0), mode) & ~mask) == 0)
11796 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
11797 else
11798 break;
11801 /* If both operands are AND's of a paradoxical SUBREG by constant, the
11802 SUBREGs are of the same mode, and, in both cases, the AND would
11803 be redundant if the comparison was done in the narrower mode,
11804 do the comparison in the narrower mode (e.g., we are AND'ing with 1
11805 and the operand's possibly nonzero bits are 0xffffff01; in that case
11806 if we only care about QImode, we don't need the AND). This case
11807 occurs if the output mode of an scc insn is not SImode and
11808 STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 (e.g., the 386).
11810 Similarly, check for a case where the AND's are ZERO_EXTEND
11811 operations from some narrower mode even though a SUBREG is not
11812 present. */
11814 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND && GET_CODE (op1) == AND
11815 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11816 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
11818 rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11819 rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
11820 HOST_WIDE_INT c0 = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
11821 HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (op1, 1));
11822 int changed = 0;
11824 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (inner_op0)
11825 && GET_CODE (inner_op1) == SUBREG
11826 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0))
11827 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1)))
11828 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0)))
11829 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11830 && (0 == ((~c0) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0),
11831 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0)))))
11832 && (0 == ((~c1) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1),
11833 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1))))))
11835 op0 = SUBREG_REG (inner_op0);
11836 op1 = SUBREG_REG (inner_op1);
11838 /* The resulting comparison is always unsigned since we masked
11839 off the original sign bit. */
11840 code = unsigned_condition (code);
11842 changed = 1;
11845 else if (c0 == c1)
11846 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE
11847 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)));
11848 tmode != GET_MODE (op0); tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
11849 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c0 == GET_MODE_MASK (tmode))
11851 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode, inner_op0);
11852 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode, inner_op1);
11853 code = unsigned_condition (code);
11854 changed = 1;
11855 break;
11858 if (! changed)
11859 break;
11862 /* If both operands are NOT, we can strip off the outer operation
11863 and adjust the comparison code for swapped operands; similarly for
11864 NEG, except that this must be an equality comparison. */
11865 else if ((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && GET_CODE (op1) == NOT)
11866 || (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG && GET_CODE (op1) == NEG
11867 && (code == EQ || code == NE)))
11868 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0), code = swap_condition (code);
11870 else
11871 break;
11874 /* If the first operand is a constant, swap the operands and adjust the
11875 comparison code appropriately, but don't do this if the second operand
11876 is already a constant integer. */
11877 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
11879 std::swap (op0, op1);
11880 code = swap_condition (code);
11883 /* We now enter a loop during which we will try to simplify the comparison.
11884 For the most part, we only are concerned with comparisons with zero,
11885 but some things may really be comparisons with zero but not start
11886 out looking that way. */
11888 while (CONST_INT_P (op1))
11890 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
11891 unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11892 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
11893 int equality_comparison_p;
11894 int sign_bit_comparison_p;
11895 int unsigned_comparison_p;
11896 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op;
11898 /* We only want to handle integral modes. This catches VOIDmode,
11899 CCmode, and the floating-point modes. An exception is that we
11900 can handle VOIDmode if OP0 is a COMPARE or a comparison
11901 operation. */
11903 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT
11904 && ! (mode == VOIDmode
11905 && (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (op0))))
11906 break;
11908 /* Try to simplify the compare to constant, possibly changing the
11909 comparison op, and/or changing op1 to zero. */
11910 code = simplify_compare_const (code, mode, op0, &op1);
11911 const_op = INTVAL (op1);
11913 /* Compute some predicates to simplify code below. */
11915 equality_comparison_p = (code == EQ || code == NE);
11916 sign_bit_comparison_p = ((code == LT || code == GE) && const_op == 0);
11917 unsigned_comparison_p = (code == LTU || code == LEU || code == GTU
11918 || code == GEU);
11920 /* If this is a sign bit comparison and we can do arithmetic in
11921 MODE, say that we will only be needing the sign bit of OP0. */
11922 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
11923 op0 = force_to_mode (op0, mode,
11924 HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
11925 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1),
11928 /* Now try cases based on the opcode of OP0. If none of the cases
11929 does a "continue", we exit this loop immediately after the
11930 switch. */
11932 switch (GET_CODE (op0))
11934 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
11935 /* If we are extracting a single bit from a variable position in
11936 a constant that has only a single bit set and are comparing it
11937 with zero, we can convert this into an equality comparison
11938 between the position and the location of the single bit. */
11939 /* Except we can't if SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED is set, since we might
11940 have already reduced the shift count modulo the word size. */
11941 if (!SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
11942 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
11943 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
11944 && equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0
11945 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 0)))) >= 0)
11947 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11948 i = BITS_PER_WORD - 1 - i;
11950 op0 = XEXP (op0, 2);
11951 op1 = GEN_INT (i);
11952 const_op = i;
11954 /* Result is nonzero iff shift count is equal to I. */
11955 code = reverse_condition (code);
11956 continue;
11959 /* fall through */
11961 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
11962 tem = expand_compound_operation (op0);
11963 if (tem != op0)
11965 op0 = tem;
11966 continue;
11968 break;
11970 case NOT:
11971 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NOT of the constant. */
11972 if (equality_comparison_p
11973 && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NOT, mode, op1, mode)) != 0)
11975 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11976 op1 = tem;
11977 continue;
11980 /* If just looking at the sign bit, reverse the sense of the
11981 comparison. */
11982 if (sign_bit_comparison_p)
11984 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11985 code = (code == GE ? LT : GE);
11986 continue;
11988 break;
11990 case NEG:
11991 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NEG of the constant. */
11992 if (equality_comparison_p
11993 && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op1, mode)) != 0)
11995 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11996 op1 = tem;
11997 continue;
12000 /* The remaining cases only apply to comparisons with zero. */
12001 if (const_op != 0)
12002 break;
12004 /* When X is ABS or is known positive,
12005 (neg X) is < 0 if and only if X != 0. */
12007 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
12008 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS
12009 || (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12010 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12011 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)))
12012 == 0)))
12014 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12015 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
12016 continue;
12019 /* If we have NEG of something whose two high-order bits are the
12020 same, we know that "(-a) < 0" is equivalent to "a > 0". */
12021 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) >= 2)
12023 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12024 code = swap_condition (code);
12025 continue;
12027 break;
12029 case ROTATE:
12030 /* If we are testing equality and our count is a constant, we
12031 can perform the inverse operation on our RHS. */
12032 if (equality_comparison_p && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12033 && (tem = simplify_binary_operation (ROTATERT, mode,
12034 op1, XEXP (op0, 1))) != 0)
12036 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12037 op1 = tem;
12038 continue;
12041 /* If we are doing a < 0 or >= 0 comparison, it means we are testing
12042 a particular bit. Convert it to an AND of a constant of that
12043 bit. This will be converted into a ZERO_EXTRACT. */
12044 if (const_op == 0 && sign_bit_comparison_p
12045 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12046 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12048 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
12049 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12050 << (mode_width - 1
12051 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
12052 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
12053 continue;
12056 /* Fall through. */
12058 case ABS:
12059 /* ABS is ignorable inside an equality comparison with zero. */
12060 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p)
12062 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12063 continue;
12065 break;
12067 case SIGN_EXTEND:
12068 /* Can simplify (compare (zero/sign_extend FOO) CONST) to
12069 (compare FOO CONST) if CONST fits in FOO's mode and we
12070 are either testing inequality or have an unsigned
12071 comparison with ZERO_EXTEND or a signed comparison with
12072 SIGN_EXTEND. But don't do it if we don't have a compare
12073 insn of the given mode, since we'd have to revert it
12074 later on, and then we wouldn't know whether to sign- or
12075 zero-extend. */
12076 mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0));
12077 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12078 && ! unsigned_comparison_p
12079 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
12080 && trunc_int_for_mode (const_op, mode) == const_op
12081 && have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
12083 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12084 continue;
12086 break;
12088 case SUBREG:
12089 /* Check for the case where we are comparing A - C1 with C2, that is
12091 (subreg:MODE (plus (A) (-C1))) op (C2)
12093 with C1 a constant, and try to lift the SUBREG, i.e. to do the
12094 comparison in the wider mode. One of the following two conditions
12095 must be true in order for this to be valid:
12097 1. The mode extension results in the same bit pattern being added
12098 on both sides and the comparison is equality or unsigned. As
12099 C2 has been truncated to fit in MODE, the pattern can only be
12100 all 0s or all 1s.
12102 2. The mode extension results in the sign bit being copied on
12103 each side.
12105 The difficulty here is that we have predicates for A but not for
12106 (A - C1) so we need to check that C1 is within proper bounds so
12107 as to perturbate A as little as possible. */
12109 if (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12110 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
12111 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) > mode_width
12112 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)) == PLUS
12113 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1)))
12115 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
12116 rtx a = XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 0);
12117 HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = -INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1));
12119 if ((c1 > 0
12120 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c1
12121 < HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)
12122 && (equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p)
12123 /* (A - C1) zero-extends if it is positive and sign-extends
12124 if it is negative, C2 both zero- and sign-extends. */
12125 && ((0 == (nonzero_bits (a, inner_mode)
12126 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12127 && const_op >= 0)
12128 /* (A - C1) sign-extends if it is positive and 1-extends
12129 if it is negative, C2 both sign- and 1-extends. */
12130 || (num_sign_bit_copies (a, inner_mode)
12131 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode)
12132 - mode_width)
12133 && const_op < 0)))
12134 || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c1
12135 < HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 2)
12136 /* (A - C1) always sign-extends, like C2. */
12137 && num_sign_bit_copies (a, inner_mode)
12138 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode)
12139 - (mode_width - 1))))
12141 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
12142 continue;
12146 /* If the inner mode is narrower and we are extracting the low part,
12147 we can treat the SUBREG as if it were a ZERO_EXTEND. */
12148 if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
12149 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) < mode_width)
12151 else if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
12152 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
12153 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == MODE_INT
12154 && (code == NE || code == EQ)
12155 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12156 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12157 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (op0)
12158 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0),
12159 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12160 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12162 /* Remove outer subregs that don't do anything. */
12163 tem = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)), op1);
12165 if ((nonzero_bits (tem, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12166 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12168 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
12169 op1 = tem;
12170 continue;
12172 break;
12174 else
12175 break;
12177 /* FALLTHROUGH */
12179 case ZERO_EXTEND:
12180 mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0));
12181 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12182 && (unsigned_comparison_p || equality_comparison_p)
12183 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
12184 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
12185 && const_op >= 0
12186 && have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
12188 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12189 continue;
12191 break;
12193 case PLUS:
12194 /* (eq (plus X A) B) -> (eq X (minus B A)). We can only do
12195 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
12196 overflows. */
12197 if (equality_comparison_p
12198 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
12199 op1, XEXP (op0, 1))))
12201 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12202 op1 = tem;
12203 continue;
12206 /* (plus (abs X) (const_int -1)) is < 0 if and only if X == 0. */
12207 if (const_op == 0 && XEXP (op0, 1) == constm1_rtx
12208 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS && sign_bit_comparison_p)
12210 op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
12211 code = (code == LT ? EQ : NE);
12212 continue;
12214 break;
12216 case MINUS:
12217 /* We used to optimize signed comparisons against zero, but that
12218 was incorrect. Unsigned comparisons against zero (GTU, LEU)
12219 arrive here as equality comparisons, or (GEU, LTU) are
12220 optimized away. No need to special-case them. */
12222 /* (eq (minus A B) C) -> (eq A (plus B C)) or
12223 (eq B (minus A C)), whichever simplifies. We can only do
12224 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
12225 overflows. */
12226 if (equality_comparison_p
12227 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
12228 XEXP (op0, 1), op1)))
12230 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12231 op1 = tem;
12232 continue;
12235 if (equality_comparison_p
12236 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
12237 XEXP (op0, 0), op1)))
12239 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
12240 op1 = tem;
12241 continue;
12244 /* The sign bit of (minus (ashiftrt X C) X), where C is the number
12245 of bits in X minus 1, is one iff X > 0. */
12246 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
12247 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
12248 && UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == mode_width - 1
12249 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1)))
12251 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
12252 code = (code == GE ? LE : GT);
12253 continue;
12255 break;
12257 case XOR:
12258 /* (eq (xor A B) C) -> (eq A (xor B C)). This is a simplification
12259 if C is zero or B is a constant. */
12260 if (equality_comparison_p
12261 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (XOR, mode,
12262 XEXP (op0, 1), op1)))
12264 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12265 op1 = tem;
12266 continue;
12268 break;
12270 case EQ: case NE:
12271 case UNEQ: case LTGT:
12272 case LT: case LTU: case UNLT: case LE: case LEU: case UNLE:
12273 case GT: case GTU: case UNGT: case GE: case GEU: case UNGE:
12274 case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
12275 /* We can't do anything if OP0 is a condition code value, rather
12276 than an actual data value. */
12277 if (const_op != 0
12278 || CC0_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
12279 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) == MODE_CC)
12280 break;
12282 /* Get the two operands being compared. */
12283 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == COMPARE)
12284 tem = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), tem1 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12285 else
12286 tem = XEXP (op0, 0), tem1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
12288 /* Check for the cases where we simply want the result of the
12289 earlier test or the opposite of that result. */
12290 if (code == NE || code == EQ
12291 || (val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (op0), STORE_FLAG_VALUE)
12292 && (code == LT || code == GE)))
12294 enum rtx_code new_code;
12295 if (code == LT || code == NE)
12296 new_code = GET_CODE (op0);
12297 else
12298 new_code = reversed_comparison_code (op0, NULL);
12300 if (new_code != UNKNOWN)
12302 code = new_code;
12303 op0 = tem;
12304 op1 = tem1;
12305 continue;
12308 break;
12310 case IOR:
12311 /* The sign bit of (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) is nonzero
12312 iff X <= 0. */
12313 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS
12314 && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
12315 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1)))
12317 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
12318 code = (code == GE ? GT : LE);
12319 continue;
12321 break;
12323 case AND:
12324 /* Convert (and (xshift 1 X) Y) to (and (lshiftrt Y X) 1). This
12325 will be converted to a ZERO_EXTRACT later. */
12326 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12327 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
12328 && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0) == const1_rtx)
12330 op0 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode, XEXP (op0, 1),
12331 XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1));
12332 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, op0, 1);
12333 continue;
12336 /* If we are comparing (and (lshiftrt X C1) C2) for equality with
12337 zero and X is a comparison and C1 and C2 describe only bits set
12338 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE, we can compare with X. */
12339 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12340 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12341 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12342 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
12343 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
12344 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) >= 0
12345 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12347 mask = ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12348 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)));
12349 if ((~STORE_FLAG_VALUE & mask) == 0
12350 && (COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))
12351 || ((tem = get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))) != 0
12352 && COMPARISON_P (tem))))
12354 op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
12355 continue;
12359 /* If we are doing an equality comparison of an AND of a bit equal
12360 to the sign bit, replace this with a LT or GE comparison of
12361 the underlying value. */
12362 if (equality_comparison_p
12363 && const_op == 0
12364 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12365 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12366 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12367 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (mode_width - 1)))
12369 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12370 code = (code == EQ ? GE : LT);
12371 continue;
12374 /* If this AND operation is really a ZERO_EXTEND from a narrower
12375 mode, the constant fits within that mode, and this is either an
12376 equality or unsigned comparison, try to do this comparison in
12377 the narrower mode.
12379 Note that in:
12381 (ne:DI (and:DI (reg:DI 4) (const_int 0xffffffff)) (const_int 0))
12382 -> (ne:DI (reg:SI 4) (const_int 0))
12384 unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION allows it or the register is
12385 known to hold a value of the required mode the
12386 transformation is invalid. */
12387 if ((equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p)
12388 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12389 && (i = exact_log2 ((UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
12390 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12391 + 1)) >= 0
12392 && const_op >> i == 0
12393 && (tmode = mode_for_size (i, MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode)
12395 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode, XEXP (op0, 0));
12396 continue;
12399 /* If this is (and:M1 (subreg:M1 X:M2 0) (const_int C1)) where C1
12400 fits in both M1 and M2 and the SUBREG is either paradoxical
12401 or represents the low part, permute the SUBREG and the AND
12402 and try again. */
12403 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == SUBREG
12404 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12406 tmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)));
12407 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12408 /* Require an integral mode, to avoid creating something like
12409 (AND:SF ...). */
12410 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (tmode)
12411 /* It is unsafe to commute the AND into the SUBREG if the
12412 SUBREG is paradoxical and WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS is
12413 not defined. As originally written the upper bits
12414 have a defined value due to the AND operation.
12415 However, if we commute the AND inside the SUBREG then
12416 they no longer have defined values and the meaning of
12417 the code has been changed.
12418 Also C1 should not change value in the smaller mode,
12419 see PR67028 (a positive C1 can become negative in the
12420 smaller mode, so that the AND does no longer mask the
12421 upper bits). */
12422 && ((WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
12423 && mode_width > GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12424 && mode_width <= BITS_PER_WORD
12425 && trunc_int_for_mode (c1, tmode) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) c1)
12426 || (mode_width <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12427 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (op0, 0))))
12428 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12429 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode)
12430 && (c1 & ~mask) == 0
12431 && (c1 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)) == 0
12432 && c1 != mask
12433 && c1 != GET_MODE_MASK (tmode))
12435 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12436 SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)),
12437 gen_int_mode (c1, tmode));
12438 op0 = gen_lowpart (mode, op0);
12439 continue;
12443 /* Convert (ne (and (not X) 1) 0) to (eq (and X 1) 0). */
12444 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12445 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
12446 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == NOT)
12448 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode,
12449 XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 1);
12450 code = (code == NE ? EQ : NE);
12451 continue;
12454 /* Convert (ne (and (lshiftrt (not X)) 1) 0) to
12455 (eq (and (lshiftrt X) 1) 0).
12456 Also handle the case where (not X) is expressed using xor. */
12457 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12458 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
12459 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT)
12461 rtx shift_op = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
12462 rtx shift_count = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12464 if (GET_CODE (shift_op) == NOT
12465 || (GET_CODE (shift_op) == XOR
12466 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (shift_op, 1))
12467 && CONST_INT_P (shift_count)
12468 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
12469 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (shift_op, 1))
12470 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12471 << INTVAL (shift_count))))
12474 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode, XEXP (shift_op, 0), shift_count);
12475 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, op0, 1);
12476 code = (code == NE ? EQ : NE);
12477 continue;
12480 break;
12482 case ASHIFT:
12483 /* If we have (compare (ashift FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12484 the high order N bits of FOO (N+1 if an inequality comparison)
12485 are known to be zero, we can do this by comparing FOO with C
12486 shifted right N bits so long as the low-order N bits of C are
12487 zero. */
12488 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12489 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0
12490 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) + ! equality_comparison_p)
12491 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12492 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12493 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12494 - 1)) == 0)
12495 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12496 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12497 & ~(mask >> (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
12498 + ! equality_comparison_p))) == 0)
12500 /* We must perform a logical shift, not an arithmetic one,
12501 as we want the top N bits of C to be zero. */
12502 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT temp = const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
12504 temp >>= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12505 op1 = gen_int_mode (temp, mode);
12506 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12507 continue;
12510 /* If we are doing a sign bit comparison, it means we are testing
12511 a particular bit. Convert it to the appropriate AND. */
12512 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12513 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12515 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
12516 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12517 << (mode_width - 1
12518 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
12519 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
12520 continue;
12523 /* If this an equality comparison with zero and we are shifting
12524 the low bit to the sign bit, we can convert this to an AND of the
12525 low-order bit. */
12526 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12527 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12528 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1)
12530 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12531 continue;
12533 break;
12535 case ASHIFTRT:
12536 /* If this is an equality comparison with zero, we can do this
12537 as a logical shift, which might be much simpler. */
12538 if (equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0
12539 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12541 op0 = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode,
12542 XEXP (op0, 0),
12543 INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)));
12544 continue;
12547 /* If OP0 is a sign extension and CODE is not an unsigned comparison,
12548 do the comparison in a narrower mode. */
12549 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12550 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12551 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
12552 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)
12553 && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)),
12554 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
12555 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12556 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) >> 1) + 1)
12557 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))
12559 op0 = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0));
12560 continue;
12563 /* Likewise if OP0 is a PLUS of a sign extension with a
12564 constant, which is usually represented with the PLUS
12565 between the shifts. */
12566 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12567 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12568 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS
12569 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
12570 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT
12571 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 1)
12572 && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)),
12573 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
12574 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12575 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) >> 1) + 1)
12576 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))
12578 rtx inner = XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 0);
12579 rtx add_const = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12580 rtx new_const = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFTRT, GET_MODE (op0),
12581 add_const, XEXP (op0, 1));
12583 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, tmode,
12584 gen_lowpart (tmode, inner),
12585 new_const);
12586 continue;
12589 /* FALLTHROUGH */
12590 case LSHIFTRT:
12591 /* If we have (compare (xshiftrt FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12592 the low order N bits of FOO are known to be zero, we can do this
12593 by comparing FOO with C shifted left N bits so long as no
12594 overflow occurs. Even if the low order N bits of FOO aren't known
12595 to be zero, if the comparison is >= or < we can use the same
12596 optimization and for > or <= by setting all the low
12597 order N bits in the comparison constant. */
12598 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12599 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) > 0
12600 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12601 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12602 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12603 + (GET_CODE (op0) != LSHIFTRT
12604 ? ((GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >> 1)
12605 + 1)
12606 : 0))
12607 <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))))
12609 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits
12610 = (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12611 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12612 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1));
12613 if (low_bits == 0 || !equality_comparison_p)
12615 /* If the shift was logical, then we must make the condition
12616 unsigned. */
12617 if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT)
12618 code = unsigned_condition (code);
12620 const_op = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12621 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12622 if (low_bits != 0
12623 && (code == GT || code == GTU
12624 || code == LE || code == LEU))
12625 const_op
12626 |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1);
12627 op1 = GEN_INT (const_op);
12628 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12629 continue;
12633 /* If we are using this shift to extract just the sign bit, we
12634 can replace this with an LT or GE comparison. */
12635 if (const_op == 0
12636 && (equality_comparison_p || sign_bit_comparison_p)
12637 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12638 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1)
12640 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12641 code = (code == NE || code == GT ? LT : GE);
12642 continue;
12644 break;
12646 default:
12647 break;
12650 break;
12653 /* Now make any compound operations involved in this comparison. Then,
12654 check for an outmost SUBREG on OP0 that is not doing anything or is
12655 paradoxical. The latter transformation must only be performed when
12656 it is known that the "extra" bits will be the same in op0 and op1 or
12657 that they don't matter. There are three cases to consider:
12659 1. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a register. In this case the bits are don't
12660 care bits and we can assume they have any convenient value. So
12661 making the transformation is safe.
12663 2. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is UNKNOWN.
12664 In this case the upper bits of op0 are undefined. We should not make
12665 the simplification in that case as we do not know the contents of
12666 those bits.
12668 3. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is not UNKNOWN.
12669 In that case we know those bits are zeros or ones. We must also be
12670 sure that they are the same as the upper bits of op1.
12672 We can never remove a SUBREG for a non-equality comparison because
12673 the sign bit is in a different place in the underlying object. */
12675 rtx_code op0_mco_code = SET;
12676 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
12677 op0_mco_code = code == NE || code == EQ ? EQ : COMPARE;
12679 op0 = make_compound_operation (op0, op0_mco_code);
12680 op1 = make_compound_operation (op1, SET);
12682 if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
12683 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
12684 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == MODE_INT
12685 && (code == NE || code == EQ))
12687 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0))
12689 /* For paradoxical subregs, allow case 1 as above. Case 3 isn't
12690 implemented. */
12691 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12693 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
12694 op1 = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (op0), op1);
12697 else if ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12698 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12699 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0),
12700 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12701 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12703 tem = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)), op1);
12705 if ((nonzero_bits (tem, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12706 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12707 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0), op1 = tem;
12711 /* We now do the opposite procedure: Some machines don't have compare
12712 insns in all modes. If OP0's mode is an integer mode smaller than a
12713 word and we can't do a compare in that mode, see if there is a larger
12714 mode for which we can do the compare. There are a number of cases in
12715 which we can use the wider mode. */
12717 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
12718 if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12719 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD
12720 && ! have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
12721 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
12722 (tmode != VOIDmode && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode));
12723 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
12724 if (have_insn_for (COMPARE, tmode))
12726 int zero_extended;
12728 /* If this is a test for negative, we can make an explicit
12729 test of the sign bit. Test this first so we can use
12730 a paradoxical subreg to extend OP0. */
12732 if (op1 == const0_rtx && (code == LT || code == GE)
12733 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
12735 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sign
12736 = HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
12737 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12738 gen_lowpart (tmode, op0),
12739 gen_int_mode (sign, tmode));
12740 code = (code == LT) ? NE : EQ;
12741 break;
12744 /* If the only nonzero bits in OP0 and OP1 are those in the
12745 narrower mode and this is an equality or unsigned comparison,
12746 we can use the wider mode. Similarly for sign-extended
12747 values, in which case it is true for all comparisons. */
12748 zero_extended = ((code == EQ || code == NE
12749 || code == GEU || code == GTU
12750 || code == LEU || code == LTU)
12751 && (nonzero_bits (op0, tmode)
12752 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0
12753 && ((CONST_INT_P (op1)
12754 || (nonzero_bits (op1, tmode)
12755 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0)));
12757 if (zero_extended
12758 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (op0, tmode)
12759 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12760 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
12761 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op1, tmode)
12762 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12763 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))))
12765 /* If OP0 is an AND and we don't have an AND in MODE either,
12766 make a new AND in the proper mode. */
12767 if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND
12768 && !have_insn_for (AND, mode))
12769 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12770 gen_lowpart (tmode,
12771 XEXP (op0, 0)),
12772 gen_lowpart (tmode,
12773 XEXP (op0, 1)));
12774 else
12776 if (zero_extended)
12778 op0 = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, tmode, op0, mode);
12779 op1 = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, tmode, op1, mode);
12781 else
12783 op0 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, tmode, op0, mode);
12784 op1 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, tmode, op1, mode);
12786 break;
12791 /* We may have changed the comparison operands. Re-canonicalize. */
12792 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
12794 std::swap (op0, op1);
12795 code = swap_condition (code);
12798 /* If this machine only supports a subset of valid comparisons, see if we
12799 can convert an unsupported one into a supported one. */
12800 target_canonicalize_comparison (&code, &op0, &op1, 0);
12802 *pop0 = op0;
12803 *pop1 = op1;
12805 return code;
12808 /* Utility function for record_value_for_reg. Count number of
12809 rtxs in X. */
12810 static int
12811 count_rtxs (rtx x)
12813 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
12814 const char *fmt;
12815 int i, j, ret = 1;
12817 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12818 || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12820 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12821 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12823 if (x0 == x1)
12824 return 1 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0);
12826 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12827 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12828 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12829 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0)
12830 + count_rtxs (x == XEXP (x1, 0)
12831 ? XEXP (x1, 1) : XEXP (x1, 0));
12833 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12834 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12835 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12836 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x1)
12837 + count_rtxs (x == XEXP (x0, 0)
12838 ? XEXP (x0, 1) : XEXP (x0, 0));
12841 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
12842 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
12843 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12844 ret += count_rtxs (XEXP (x, i));
12845 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12846 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12847 ret += count_rtxs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12849 return ret;
12852 /* Utility function for following routine. Called when X is part of a value
12853 being stored into last_set_value. Sets last_set_table_tick
12854 for each register mentioned. Similar to mention_regs in cse.c */
12856 static void
12857 update_table_tick (rtx x)
12859 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
12860 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
12861 int i, j;
12863 if (code == REG)
12865 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
12866 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
12867 unsigned int r;
12869 for (r = regno; r < endregno; r++)
12871 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[r];
12872 rsp->last_set_table_tick = label_tick;
12875 return;
12878 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
12879 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12881 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
12882 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
12883 them. */
12884 if (i == 0 && ARITHMETIC_P (x))
12886 /* Note that at this point x1 has already been
12887 processed. */
12888 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12889 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12891 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then there is no need to
12892 process x0. */
12893 if (x0 == x1)
12894 break;
12896 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then while
12897 processing x1, x0 has already been processed. Thus we
12898 are done with x. */
12899 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
12900 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12901 break;
12903 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then we
12904 still have to process the rest of x0. */
12905 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
12906 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12908 update_table_tick (XEXP (x0, x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) ? 1 : 0));
12909 break;
12913 update_table_tick (XEXP (x, i));
12915 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12916 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12917 update_table_tick (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12920 /* Record that REG is set to VALUE in insn INSN. If VALUE is zero, we
12921 are saying that the register is clobbered and we no longer know its
12922 value. If INSN is zero, don't update reg_stat[].last_set; this is
12923 only permitted with VALUE also zero and is used to invalidate the
12924 register. */
12926 static void
12927 record_value_for_reg (rtx reg, rtx_insn *insn, rtx value)
12929 unsigned int regno = REGNO (reg);
12930 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (reg);
12931 unsigned int i;
12932 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12934 /* If VALUE contains REG and we have a previous value for REG, substitute
12935 the previous value. */
12936 if (value && insn && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, value))
12938 rtx tem;
12940 /* Set things up so get_last_value is allowed to see anything set up to
12941 our insn. */
12942 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12943 tem = get_last_value (reg);
12945 /* If TEM is simply a binary operation with two CLOBBERs as operands,
12946 it isn't going to be useful and will take a lot of time to process,
12947 so just use the CLOBBER. */
12949 if (tem)
12951 if (ARITHMETIC_P (tem)
12952 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER
12953 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 1)) == CLOBBER)
12954 tem = XEXP (tem, 0);
12955 else if (count_occurrences (value, reg, 1) >= 2)
12957 /* If there are two or more occurrences of REG in VALUE,
12958 prevent the value from growing too much. */
12959 if (count_rtxs (tem) > MAX_LAST_VALUE_RTL)
12960 tem = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (tem), const0_rtx);
12963 value = replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value), reg, tem);
12967 /* For each register modified, show we don't know its value, that
12968 we don't know about its bitwise content, that its value has been
12969 updated, and that we don't know the location of the death of the
12970 register. */
12971 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12973 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12975 if (insn)
12976 rsp->last_set = insn;
12978 rsp->last_set_value = 0;
12979 rsp->last_set_mode = VOIDmode;
12980 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = 0;
12981 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies = 0;
12982 rsp->last_death = 0;
12983 rsp->truncated_to_mode = VOIDmode;
12986 /* Mark registers that are being referenced in this value. */
12987 if (value)
12988 update_table_tick (value);
12990 /* Now update the status of each register being set.
12991 If someone is using this register in this block, set this register
12992 to invalid since we will get confused between the two lives in this
12993 basic block. This makes using this register always invalid. In cse, we
12994 scan the table to invalidate all entries using this register, but this
12995 is too much work for us. */
12997 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12999 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
13000 rsp->last_set_label = label_tick;
13001 if (!insn
13002 || (value && rsp->last_set_table_tick >= label_tick_ebb_start))
13003 rsp->last_set_invalid = 1;
13004 else
13005 rsp->last_set_invalid = 0;
13008 /* The value being assigned might refer to X (like in "x++;"). In that
13009 case, we must replace it with (clobber (const_int 0)) to prevent
13010 infinite loops. */
13011 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13012 if (value && !get_last_value_validate (&value, insn, label_tick, 0))
13014 value = copy_rtx (value);
13015 if (!get_last_value_validate (&value, insn, label_tick, 1))
13016 value = 0;
13019 /* For the main register being modified, update the value, the mode, the
13020 nonzero bits, and the number of sign bit copies. */
13022 rsp->last_set_value = value;
13024 if (value)
13026 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (reg);
13027 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
13028 rsp->last_set_mode = mode;
13029 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
13030 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
13031 mode = nonzero_bits_mode;
13032 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = nonzero_bits (value, mode);
13033 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies
13034 = num_sign_bit_copies (value, GET_MODE (reg));
13038 /* Called via note_stores from record_dead_and_set_regs to handle one
13039 SET or CLOBBER in an insn. DATA is the instruction in which the
13040 set is occurring. */
13042 static void
13043 record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx dest, const_rtx setter, void *data)
13045 rtx_insn *record_dead_insn = (rtx_insn *) data;
13047 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
13048 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
13050 if (!record_dead_insn)
13052 if (REG_P (dest))
13053 record_value_for_reg (dest, NULL, NULL_RTX);
13054 return;
13057 if (REG_P (dest))
13059 /* If we are setting the whole register, we know its value. Otherwise
13060 show that we don't know the value. We can handle SUBREG in
13061 some cases. */
13062 if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET && dest == SET_DEST (setter))
13063 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, SET_SRC (setter));
13064 else if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET
13065 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (setter)) == SUBREG
13066 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (setter)) == dest
13067 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) <= BITS_PER_WORD
13068 && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_DEST (setter)))
13069 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn,
13070 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (dest),
13071 SET_SRC (setter)));
13072 else
13073 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, NULL_RTX);
13075 else if (MEM_P (dest)
13076 /* Ignore pushes, they clobber nothing. */
13077 && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
13078 mem_last_set = DF_INSN_LUID (record_dead_insn);
13081 /* Update the records of when each REG was most recently set or killed
13082 for the things done by INSN. This is the last thing done in processing
13083 INSN in the combiner loop.
13085 We update reg_stat[], in particular fields last_set, last_set_value,
13086 last_set_mode, last_set_nonzero_bits, last_set_sign_bit_copies,
13087 last_death, and also the similar information mem_last_set (which insn
13088 most recently modified memory) and last_call_luid (which insn was the
13089 most recent subroutine call). */
13091 static void
13092 record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn *insn)
13094 rtx link;
13095 unsigned int i;
13097 for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
13099 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_DEAD
13100 && REG_P (XEXP (link, 0)))
13102 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
13103 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
13105 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
13107 reg_stat_type *rsp;
13109 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
13110 rsp->last_death = insn;
13113 else if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC)
13114 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (link, 0), insn, NULL_RTX);
13117 if (CALL_P (insn))
13119 hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi;
13120 EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call, 0, i, hrsi)
13122 reg_stat_type *rsp;
13124 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
13125 rsp->last_set_invalid = 1;
13126 rsp->last_set = insn;
13127 rsp->last_set_value = 0;
13128 rsp->last_set_mode = VOIDmode;
13129 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = 0;
13130 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies = 0;
13131 rsp->last_death = 0;
13132 rsp->truncated_to_mode = VOIDmode;
13135 last_call_luid = mem_last_set = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
13137 /* We can't combine into a call pattern. Remember, though, that
13138 the return value register is set at this LUID. We could
13139 still replace a register with the return value from the
13140 wrong subroutine call! */
13141 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1, NULL_RTX);
13143 else
13144 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1, insn);
13147 /* If a SUBREG has the promoted bit set, it is in fact a property of the
13148 register present in the SUBREG, so for each such SUBREG go back and
13149 adjust nonzero and sign bit information of the registers that are
13150 known to have some zero/sign bits set.
13152 This is needed because when combine blows the SUBREGs away, the
13153 information on zero/sign bits is lost and further combines can be
13154 missed because of that. */
13156 static void
13157 record_promoted_value (rtx_insn *insn, rtx subreg)
13159 struct insn_link *links;
13160 rtx set;
13161 unsigned int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (subreg));
13162 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (subreg);
13164 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
13165 return;
13167 for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links;)
13169 reg_stat_type *rsp;
13171 insn = links->insn;
13172 set = single_set (insn);
13174 if (! set || !REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
13175 || REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) != regno
13176 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) != GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subreg)))
13178 links = links->next;
13179 continue;
13182 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13183 if (rsp->last_set == insn)
13185 if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (subreg))
13186 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
13189 if (REG_P (SET_SRC (set)))
13191 regno = REGNO (SET_SRC (set));
13192 links = LOG_LINKS (insn);
13194 else
13195 break;
13199 /* Check if X, a register, is known to contain a value already
13200 truncated to MODE. In this case we can use a subreg to refer to
13201 the truncated value even though in the generic case we would need
13202 an explicit truncation. */
13204 static bool
13205 reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode mode, const_rtx x)
13207 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
13208 machine_mode truncated = rsp->truncated_to_mode;
13210 if (truncated == 0
13211 || rsp->truncation_label < label_tick_ebb_start)
13212 return false;
13213 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
13214 return true;
13215 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, truncated))
13216 return true;
13217 return false;
13220 /* If X is a hard reg or a subreg record the mode that the register is
13221 accessed in. For non-TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION targets we might be able
13222 to turn a truncate into a subreg using this information. Return true
13223 if traversing X is complete. */
13225 static bool
13226 record_truncated_value (rtx x)
13228 machine_mode truncated_mode;
13229 reg_stat_type *rsp;
13231 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
13233 machine_mode original_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
13234 truncated_mode = GET_MODE (x);
13236 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (original_mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode))
13237 return true;
13239 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (truncated_mode, original_mode))
13240 return true;
13242 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
13244 /* ??? For hard-regs we now record everything. We might be able to
13245 optimize this using last_set_mode. */
13246 else if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13247 truncated_mode = GET_MODE (x);
13248 else
13249 return false;
13251 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
13252 if (rsp->truncated_to_mode == 0
13253 || rsp->truncation_label < label_tick_ebb_start
13254 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode)
13255 < GET_MODE_SIZE (rsp->truncated_to_mode)))
13257 rsp->truncated_to_mode = truncated_mode;
13258 rsp->truncation_label = label_tick;
13261 return true;
13264 /* Callback for note_uses. Find hardregs and subregs of pseudos and
13265 the modes they are used in. This can help truning TRUNCATEs into
13266 SUBREGs. */
13268 static void
13269 record_truncated_values (rtx *loc, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
13271 subrtx_var_iterator::array_type array;
13272 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_VAR (iter, array, *loc, NONCONST)
13273 if (record_truncated_value (*iter))
13274 iter.skip_subrtxes ();
13277 /* Scan X for promoted SUBREGs. For each one found,
13278 note what it implies to the registers used in it. */
13280 static void
13281 check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn *insn, rtx x)
13283 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
13284 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x)
13285 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
13286 record_promoted_value (insn, x);
13287 else
13289 const char *format = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
13290 int i, j;
13292 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)); i++)
13293 switch (format[i])
13295 case 'e':
13296 check_promoted_subreg (insn, XEXP (x, i));
13297 break;
13298 case 'V':
13299 case 'E':
13300 if (XVEC (x, i) != 0)
13301 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
13302 check_promoted_subreg (insn, XVECEXP (x, i, j));
13303 break;
13308 /* Verify that all the registers and memory references mentioned in *LOC are
13309 still valid. *LOC was part of a value set in INSN when label_tick was
13310 equal to TICK. Return 0 if some are not. If REPLACE is nonzero, replace
13311 the invalid references with (clobber (const_int 0)) and return 1. This
13312 replacement is useful because we often can get useful information about
13313 the form of a value (e.g., if it was produced by a shift that always
13314 produces -1 or 0) even though we don't know exactly what registers it
13315 was produced from. */
13317 static int
13318 get_last_value_validate (rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, int tick, int replace)
13320 rtx x = *loc;
13321 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
13322 int len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x));
13323 int i, j;
13325 if (REG_P (x))
13327 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13328 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
13329 unsigned int j;
13331 for (j = regno; j < endregno; j++)
13333 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[j];
13334 if (rsp->last_set_invalid
13335 /* If this is a pseudo-register that was only set once and not
13336 live at the beginning of the function, it is always valid. */
13337 || (! (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13338 && regno < reg_n_sets_max
13339 && REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1
13340 && (!REGNO_REG_SET_P
13341 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
13342 regno)))
13343 && rsp->last_set_label > tick))
13345 if (replace)
13346 *loc = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
13347 return replace;
13351 return 1;
13353 /* If this is a memory reference, make sure that there were no stores after
13354 it that might have clobbered the value. We don't have alias info, so we
13355 assume any store invalidates it. Moreover, we only have local UIDs, so
13356 we also assume that there were stores in the intervening basic blocks. */
13357 else if (MEM_P (x) && !MEM_READONLY_P (x)
13358 && (tick != label_tick || DF_INSN_LUID (insn) <= mem_last_set))
13360 if (replace)
13361 *loc = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
13362 return replace;
13365 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
13367 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13369 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
13370 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
13371 them. */
13372 if (i == 1 && ARITHMETIC_P (x))
13374 /* Note that at this point x0 has already been checked
13375 and found valid. */
13376 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
13377 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
13379 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then x is also valid. */
13380 if (x0 == x1)
13381 return 1;
13383 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then
13384 while checking x0, x1 has already been checked. Thus
13385 it is valid and so as x. */
13386 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
13387 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
13388 return 1;
13390 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then x is
13391 valid iff the rest of x1 is valid. */
13392 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
13393 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
13394 return
13395 get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x1,
13396 x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) ? 1 : 0),
13397 insn, tick, replace);
13400 if (get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x, i), insn, tick,
13401 replace) == 0)
13402 return 0;
13404 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13405 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
13406 if (get_last_value_validate (&XVECEXP (x, i, j),
13407 insn, tick, replace) == 0)
13408 return 0;
13411 /* If we haven't found a reason for it to be invalid, it is valid. */
13412 return 1;
13415 /* Get the last value assigned to X, if known. Some registers
13416 in the value may be replaced with (clobber (const_int 0)) if their value
13417 is known longer known reliably. */
13419 static rtx
13420 get_last_value (const_rtx x)
13422 unsigned int regno;
13423 rtx value;
13424 reg_stat_type *rsp;
13426 /* If this is a non-paradoxical SUBREG, get the value of its operand and
13427 then convert it to the desired mode. If this is a paradoxical SUBREG,
13428 we cannot predict what values the "extra" bits might have. */
13429 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
13430 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
13431 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
13432 && (value = get_last_value (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
13433 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), value);
13435 if (!REG_P (x))
13436 return 0;
13438 regno = REGNO (x);
13439 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13440 value = rsp->last_set_value;
13442 /* If we don't have a value, or if it isn't for this basic block and
13443 it's either a hard register, set more than once, or it's a live
13444 at the beginning of the function, return 0.
13446 Because if it's not live at the beginning of the function then the reg
13447 is always set before being used (is never used without being set).
13448 And, if it's set only once, and it's always set before use, then all
13449 uses must have the same last value, even if it's not from this basic
13450 block. */
13452 if (value == 0
13453 || (rsp->last_set_label < label_tick_ebb_start
13454 && (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13455 || regno >= reg_n_sets_max
13456 || REG_N_SETS (regno) != 1
13457 || REGNO_REG_SET_P
13458 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb), regno))))
13459 return 0;
13461 /* If the value was set in a later insn than the ones we are processing,
13462 we can't use it even if the register was only set once. */
13463 if (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
13464 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) >= subst_low_luid)
13465 return 0;
13467 /* If fewer bits were set than what we are asked for now, we cannot use
13468 the value. */
13469 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (rsp->last_set_mode)
13470 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
13471 return 0;
13473 /* If the value has all its registers valid, return it. */
13474 if (get_last_value_validate (&value, rsp->last_set, rsp->last_set_label, 0))
13475 return value;
13477 /* Otherwise, make a copy and replace any invalid register with
13478 (clobber (const_int 0)). If that fails for some reason, return 0. */
13480 value = copy_rtx (value);
13481 if (get_last_value_validate (&value, rsp->last_set, rsp->last_set_label, 1))
13482 return value;
13484 return 0;
13487 /* Return nonzero if expression X refers to a REG or to memory
13488 that is set in an instruction more recent than FROM_LUID. */
13490 static int
13491 use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx x, int from_luid)
13493 const char *fmt;
13494 int i;
13495 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
13497 if (code == REG)
13499 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13500 unsigned endreg = END_REGNO (x);
13502 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
13503 /* Don't allow uses of the stack pointer to be moved,
13504 because we don't know whether the move crosses a push insn. */
13505 if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && PUSH_ARGS)
13506 return 1;
13507 #endif
13508 for (; regno < endreg; regno++)
13510 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13511 if (rsp->last_set
13512 && rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
13513 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) > from_luid)
13514 return 1;
13516 return 0;
13519 if (code == MEM && mem_last_set > from_luid)
13520 return 1;
13522 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13524 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13526 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13528 int j;
13529 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
13530 if (use_crosses_set_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from_luid))
13531 return 1;
13533 else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
13534 && use_crosses_set_p (XEXP (x, i), from_luid))
13535 return 1;
13537 return 0;
13540 /* Define three variables used for communication between the following
13541 routines. */
13543 static unsigned int reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno;
13544 static int reg_dead_flag;
13546 /* Function called via note_stores from reg_dead_at_p.
13548 If DEST is within [reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno), set
13549 reg_dead_flag to 1 if X is a CLOBBER and to -1 it is a SET. */
13551 static void
13552 reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx dest, const_rtx x, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
13554 unsigned int regno, endregno;
13556 if (!REG_P (dest))
13557 return;
13559 regno = REGNO (dest);
13560 endregno = END_REGNO (dest);
13561 if (reg_dead_endregno > regno && reg_dead_regno < endregno)
13562 reg_dead_flag = (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER) ? 1 : -1;
13565 /* Return nonzero if REG is known to be dead at INSN.
13567 We scan backwards from INSN. If we hit a REG_DEAD note or a CLOBBER
13568 referencing REG, it is dead. If we hit a SET referencing REG, it is
13569 live. Otherwise, see if it is live or dead at the start of the basic
13570 block we are in. Hard regs marked as being live in NEWPAT_USED_REGS
13571 must be assumed to be always live. */
13573 static int
13574 reg_dead_at_p (rtx reg, rtx_insn *insn)
13576 basic_block block;
13577 unsigned int i;
13579 /* Set variables for reg_dead_at_p_1. */
13580 reg_dead_regno = REGNO (reg);
13581 reg_dead_endregno = END_REGNO (reg);
13583 reg_dead_flag = 0;
13585 /* Check that reg isn't mentioned in NEWPAT_USED_REGS. For fixed registers
13586 we allow the machine description to decide whether use-and-clobber
13587 patterns are OK. */
13588 if (reg_dead_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13590 for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++)
13591 if (!fixed_regs[i] && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (newpat_used_regs, i))
13592 return 0;
13595 /* Scan backwards until we find a REG_DEAD note, SET, CLOBBER, or
13596 beginning of basic block. */
13597 block = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
13598 for (;;)
13600 if (INSN_P (insn))
13602 if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, reg_dead_regno))
13603 return 1;
13605 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), reg_dead_at_p_1, NULL);
13606 if (reg_dead_flag)
13607 return reg_dead_flag == 1 ? 1 : 0;
13609 if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, reg_dead_regno))
13610 return 1;
13613 if (insn == BB_HEAD (block))
13614 break;
13616 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
13619 /* Look at live-in sets for the basic block that we were in. */
13620 for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++)
13621 if (REGNO_REG_SET_P (df_get_live_in (block), i))
13622 return 0;
13624 return 1;
13627 /* Note hard registers in X that are used. */
13629 static void
13630 mark_used_regs_combine (rtx x)
13632 RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
13633 unsigned int regno;
13634 int i;
13636 switch (code)
13638 case LABEL_REF:
13639 case SYMBOL_REF:
13640 case CONST:
13641 CASE_CONST_ANY:
13642 case PC:
13643 case ADDR_VEC:
13644 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
13645 case ASM_INPUT:
13646 /* CC0 must die in the insn after it is set, so we don't need to take
13647 special note of it here. */
13648 case CC0:
13649 return;
13651 case CLOBBER:
13652 /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any hard registers inside the
13653 address as used. */
13654 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
13655 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0));
13656 return;
13658 case REG:
13659 regno = REGNO (x);
13660 /* A hard reg in a wide mode may really be multiple registers.
13661 If so, mark all of them just like the first. */
13662 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13664 /* None of this applies to the stack, frame or arg pointers. */
13665 if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
13666 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
13667 && regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
13668 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
13669 && regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[regno])
13670 || regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
13671 return;
13673 add_to_hard_reg_set (&newpat_used_regs, GET_MODE (x), regno);
13675 return;
13677 case SET:
13679 /* If setting a MEM, or a SUBREG of a MEM, then note any hard regs in
13680 the address. */
13681 rtx testreg = SET_DEST (x);
13683 while (GET_CODE (testreg) == SUBREG
13684 || GET_CODE (testreg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13685 || GET_CODE (testreg) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
13686 testreg = XEXP (testreg, 0);
13688 if (MEM_P (testreg))
13689 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (testreg, 0));
13691 mark_used_regs_combine (SET_SRC (x));
13693 return;
13695 default:
13696 break;
13699 /* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
13702 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13704 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13706 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13707 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (x, i));
13708 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13710 int j;
13712 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
13713 mark_used_regs_combine (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
13719 /* Remove register number REGNO from the dead registers list of INSN.
13721 Return the note used to record the death, if there was one. */
13724 remove_death (unsigned int regno, rtx_insn *insn)
13726 rtx note = find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, regno);
13728 if (note)
13729 remove_note (insn, note);
13731 return note;
13734 /* For each register (hardware or pseudo) used within expression X, if its
13735 death is in an instruction with luid between FROM_LUID (inclusive) and
13736 TO_INSN (exclusive), put a REG_DEAD note for that register in the
13737 list headed by PNOTES.
13739 That said, don't move registers killed by maybe_kill_insn.
13741 This is done when X is being merged by combination into TO_INSN. These
13742 notes will then be distributed as needed. */
13744 static void
13745 move_deaths (rtx x, rtx maybe_kill_insn, int from_luid, rtx_insn *to_insn,
13746 rtx *pnotes)
13748 const char *fmt;
13749 int len, i;
13750 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
13752 if (code == REG)
13754 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13755 rtx_insn *where_dead = reg_stat[regno].last_death;
13757 /* Don't move the register if it gets killed in between from and to. */
13758 if (maybe_kill_insn && reg_set_p (x, maybe_kill_insn)
13759 && ! reg_referenced_p (x, maybe_kill_insn))
13760 return;
13762 if (where_dead
13763 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (where_dead) == BLOCK_FOR_INSN (to_insn)
13764 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead) >= from_luid
13765 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead) < DF_INSN_LUID (to_insn))
13767 rtx note = remove_death (regno, where_dead);
13769 /* It is possible for the call above to return 0. This can occur
13770 when last_death points to I2 or I1 that we combined with.
13771 In that case make a new note.
13773 We must also check for the case where X is a hard register
13774 and NOTE is a death note for a range of hard registers
13775 including X. In that case, we must put REG_DEAD notes for
13776 the remaining registers in place of NOTE. */
13778 if (note != 0 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13779 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)))
13780 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))))
13782 unsigned int deadregno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13783 unsigned int deadend = END_REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13784 unsigned int ourend = END_REGNO (x);
13785 unsigned int i;
13787 for (i = deadregno; i < deadend; i++)
13788 if (i < regno || i >= ourend)
13789 add_reg_note (where_dead, REG_DEAD, regno_reg_rtx[i]);
13792 /* If we didn't find any note, or if we found a REG_DEAD note that
13793 covers only part of the given reg, and we have a multi-reg hard
13794 register, then to be safe we must check for REG_DEAD notes
13795 for each register other than the first. They could have
13796 their own REG_DEAD notes lying around. */
13797 else if ((note == 0
13798 || (note != 0
13799 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)))
13800 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))))
13801 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13802 && REG_NREGS (x) > 1)
13804 unsigned int ourend = END_REGNO (x);
13805 unsigned int i, offset;
13806 rtx oldnotes = 0;
13808 if (note)
13809 offset = hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))];
13810 else
13811 offset = 1;
13813 for (i = regno + offset; i < ourend; i++)
13814 move_deaths (regno_reg_rtx[i],
13815 maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, &oldnotes);
13818 if (note != 0 && GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == GET_MODE (x))
13820 XEXP (note, 1) = *pnotes;
13821 *pnotes = note;
13823 else
13824 *pnotes = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, x, *pnotes);
13827 return;
13830 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
13832 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
13834 move_deaths (SET_SRC (x), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13836 /* In the case of a ZERO_EXTRACT, a STRICT_LOW_PART, or a SUBREG
13837 that accesses one word of a multi-word item, some
13838 piece of everything register in the expression is used by
13839 this insn, so remove any old death. */
13840 /* ??? So why do we test for equality of the sizes? */
13842 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13843 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
13844 || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
13845 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
13846 + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
13847 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)))
13848 + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
13850 move_deaths (dest, maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13851 return;
13854 /* If this is some other SUBREG, we know it replaces the entire
13855 value, so use that as the destination. */
13856 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
13857 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
13859 /* If this is a MEM, adjust deaths of anything used in the address.
13860 For a REG (the only other possibility), the entire value is
13861 being replaced so the old value is not used in this insn. */
13863 if (MEM_P (dest))
13864 move_deaths (XEXP (dest, 0), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid,
13865 to_insn, pnotes);
13866 return;
13869 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
13870 return;
13872 len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
13873 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13875 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
13877 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13879 int j;
13880 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
13881 move_deaths (XVECEXP (x, i, j), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid,
13882 to_insn, pnotes);
13884 else if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13885 move_deaths (XEXP (x, i), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13889 /* Return 1 if X is the target of a bit-field assignment in BODY, the
13890 pattern of an insn. X must be a REG. */
13892 static int
13893 reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx x, rtx body)
13895 int i;
13897 if (GET_CODE (body) == SET)
13899 rtx dest = SET_DEST (body);
13900 rtx target;
13901 unsigned int regno, tregno, endregno, endtregno;
13903 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
13904 target = XEXP (dest, 0);
13905 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
13906 target = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
13907 else
13908 return 0;
13910 if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG)
13911 target = SUBREG_REG (target);
13913 if (!REG_P (target))
13914 return 0;
13916 tregno = REGNO (target), regno = REGNO (x);
13917 if (tregno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13918 return target == x;
13920 endtregno = end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (target), tregno);
13921 endregno = end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (x), regno);
13923 return endregno > tregno && regno < endtregno;
13926 else if (GET_CODE (body) == PARALLEL)
13927 for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13928 if (reg_bitfield_target_p (x, XVECEXP (body, 0, i)))
13929 return 1;
13931 return 0;
13934 /* Given a chain of REG_NOTES originally from FROM_INSN, try to place them
13935 as appropriate. I3 and I2 are the insns resulting from the combination
13936 insns including FROM (I2 may be zero).
13938 ELIM_I2 and ELIM_I1 are either zero or registers that we know will
13939 not need REG_DEAD notes because they are being substituted for. This
13940 saves searching in the most common cases.
13942 Each note in the list is either ignored or placed on some insns, depending
13943 on the type of note. */
13945 static void
13946 distribute_notes (rtx notes, rtx_insn *from_insn, rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *i2,
13947 rtx elim_i2, rtx elim_i1, rtx elim_i0)
13949 rtx note, next_note;
13950 rtx tem_note;
13951 rtx_insn *tem_insn;
13953 for (note = notes; note; note = next_note)
13955 rtx_insn *place = 0, *place2 = 0;
13957 next_note = XEXP (note, 1);
13958 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note))
13960 case REG_BR_PROB:
13961 case REG_BR_PRED:
13962 /* Doesn't matter much where we put this, as long as it's somewhere.
13963 It is preferable to keep these notes on branches, which is most
13964 likely to be i3. */
13965 place = i3;
13966 break;
13968 case REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO:
13969 if (JUMP_P (i3))
13970 place = i3;
13971 else
13973 gcc_assert (i2 && JUMP_P (i2));
13974 place = i2;
13976 break;
13978 case REG_EH_REGION:
13979 /* These notes must remain with the call or trapping instruction. */
13980 if (CALL_P (i3))
13981 place = i3;
13982 else if (i2 && CALL_P (i2))
13983 place = i2;
13984 else
13986 gcc_assert (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions);
13987 if (may_trap_p (i3))
13988 place = i3;
13989 else if (i2 && may_trap_p (i2))
13990 place = i2;
13991 /* ??? Otherwise assume we've combined things such that we
13992 can now prove that the instructions can't trap. Drop the
13993 note in this case. */
13995 break;
13997 case REG_ARGS_SIZE:
13998 /* ??? How to distribute between i3-i1. Assume i3 contains the
13999 entire adjustment. Assert i3 contains at least some adjust. */
14000 if (!noop_move_p (i3))
14002 int old_size, args_size = INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0));
14003 /* fixup_args_size_notes looks at REG_NORETURN note,
14004 so ensure the note is placed there first. */
14005 if (CALL_P (i3))
14007 rtx *np;
14008 for (np = &next_note; *np; np = &XEXP (*np, 1))
14009 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (*np) == REG_NORETURN)
14011 rtx n = *np;
14012 *np = XEXP (n, 1);
14013 XEXP (n, 1) = REG_NOTES (i3);
14014 REG_NOTES (i3) = n;
14015 break;
14018 old_size = fixup_args_size_notes (PREV_INSN (i3), i3, args_size);
14019 /* emit_call_1 adds for !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
14020 REG_ARGS_SIZE note to all noreturn calls, allow that here. */
14021 gcc_assert (old_size != args_size
14022 || (CALL_P (i3)
14023 && !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
14024 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_NORETURN, NULL_RTX)));
14026 break;
14028 case REG_NORETURN:
14029 case REG_SETJMP:
14030 case REG_TM:
14031 case REG_CALL_DECL:
14032 /* These notes must remain with the call. It should not be
14033 possible for both I2 and I3 to be a call. */
14034 if (CALL_P (i3))
14035 place = i3;
14036 else
14038 gcc_assert (i2 && CALL_P (i2));
14039 place = i2;
14041 break;
14043 case REG_UNUSED:
14044 /* Any clobbers for i3 may still exist, and so we must process
14045 REG_UNUSED notes from that insn.
14047 Any clobbers from i2 or i1 can only exist if they were added by
14048 recog_for_combine. In that case, recog_for_combine created the
14049 necessary REG_UNUSED notes. Trying to keep any original
14050 REG_UNUSED notes from these insns can cause incorrect output
14051 if it is for the same register as the original i3 dest.
14052 In that case, we will notice that the register is set in i3,
14053 and then add a REG_UNUSED note for the destination of i3, which
14054 is wrong. However, it is possible to have REG_UNUSED notes from
14055 i2 or i1 for register which were both used and clobbered, so
14056 we keep notes from i2 or i1 if they will turn into REG_DEAD
14057 notes. */
14059 /* If this register is set or clobbered in I3, put the note there
14060 unless there is one already. */
14061 if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
14063 if (from_insn != i3)
14064 break;
14066 if (! (REG_P (XEXP (note, 0))
14067 ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
14068 : find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, XEXP (note, 0))))
14069 place = i3;
14071 /* Otherwise, if this register is used by I3, then this register
14072 now dies here, so we must put a REG_DEAD note here unless there
14073 is one already. */
14074 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))
14075 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (note, 0))
14076 ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_DEAD,
14077 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
14078 : find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, XEXP (note, 0))))
14080 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_DEAD);
14081 place = i3;
14083 break;
14085 case REG_EQUAL:
14086 case REG_EQUIV:
14087 case REG_NOALIAS:
14088 /* These notes say something about results of an insn. We can
14089 only support them if they used to be on I3 in which case they
14090 remain on I3. Otherwise they are ignored.
14092 If the note refers to an expression that is not a constant, we
14093 must also ignore the note since we cannot tell whether the
14094 equivalence is still true. It might be possible to do
14095 slightly better than this (we only have a problem if I2DEST
14096 or I1DEST is present in the expression), but it doesn't
14097 seem worth the trouble. */
14099 if (from_insn == i3
14100 && (XEXP (note, 0) == 0 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note, 0))))
14101 place = i3;
14102 break;
14104 case REG_INC:
14105 /* These notes say something about how a register is used. They must
14106 be present on any use of the register in I2 or I3. */
14107 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
14108 place = i3;
14110 if (i2 && reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
14112 if (place)
14113 place2 = i2;
14114 else
14115 place = i2;
14117 break;
14119 case REG_LABEL_TARGET:
14120 case REG_LABEL_OPERAND:
14121 /* This can show up in several ways -- either directly in the
14122 pattern, or hidden off in the constant pool with (or without?)
14123 a REG_EQUAL note. */
14124 /* ??? Ignore the without-reg_equal-note problem for now. */
14125 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))
14126 || ((tem_note = find_reg_note (i3, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
14127 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == LABEL_REF
14128 && label_ref_label (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == XEXP (note, 0)))
14129 place = i3;
14131 if (i2
14132 && (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2))
14133 || ((tem_note = find_reg_note (i2, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
14134 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == LABEL_REF
14135 && label_ref_label (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == XEXP (note, 0))))
14137 if (place)
14138 place2 = i2;
14139 else
14140 place = i2;
14143 /* For REG_LABEL_TARGET on a JUMP_P, we prefer to put the note
14144 as a JUMP_LABEL or decrement LABEL_NUSES if it's already
14145 there. */
14146 if (place && JUMP_P (place)
14147 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
14148 && (JUMP_LABEL (place) == NULL
14149 || JUMP_LABEL (place) == XEXP (note, 0)))
14151 rtx label = JUMP_LABEL (place);
14153 if (!label)
14154 JUMP_LABEL (place) = XEXP (note, 0);
14155 else if (LABEL_P (label))
14156 LABEL_NUSES (label)--;
14159 if (place2 && JUMP_P (place2)
14160 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
14161 && (JUMP_LABEL (place2) == NULL
14162 || JUMP_LABEL (place2) == XEXP (note, 0)))
14164 rtx label = JUMP_LABEL (place2);
14166 if (!label)
14167 JUMP_LABEL (place2) = XEXP (note, 0);
14168 else if (LABEL_P (label))
14169 LABEL_NUSES (label)--;
14170 place2 = 0;
14172 break;
14174 case REG_NONNEG:
14175 /* This note says something about the value of a register prior
14176 to the execution of an insn. It is too much trouble to see
14177 if the note is still correct in all situations. It is better
14178 to simply delete it. */
14179 break;
14181 case REG_DEAD:
14182 /* If we replaced the right hand side of FROM_INSN with a
14183 REG_EQUAL note, the original use of the dying register
14184 will not have been combined into I3 and I2. In such cases,
14185 FROM_INSN is guaranteed to be the first of the combined
14186 instructions, so we simply need to search back before
14187 FROM_INSN for the previous use or set of this register,
14188 then alter the notes there appropriately.
14190 If the register is used as an input in I3, it dies there.
14191 Similarly for I2, if it is nonzero and adjacent to I3.
14193 If the register is not used as an input in either I3 or I2
14194 and it is not one of the registers we were supposed to eliminate,
14195 there are two possibilities. We might have a non-adjacent I2
14196 or we might have somehow eliminated an additional register
14197 from a computation. For example, we might have had A & B where
14198 we discover that B will always be zero. In this case we will
14199 eliminate the reference to A.
14201 In both cases, we must search to see if we can find a previous
14202 use of A and put the death note there. */
14204 if (from_insn
14205 && from_insn == i2mod
14206 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), i2mod_new_rhs))
14207 tem_insn = from_insn;
14208 else
14210 if (from_insn
14211 && CALL_P (from_insn)
14212 && find_reg_fusage (from_insn, USE, XEXP (note, 0)))
14213 place = from_insn;
14214 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
14215 place = i3;
14216 else if (i2 != 0 && next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
14217 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
14218 place = i2;
14219 else if ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i2)
14220 && !(i2mod
14221 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0),
14222 i2mod_old_rhs)))
14223 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i1)
14224 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i0))
14225 break;
14226 tem_insn = i3;
14227 /* If the new I2 sets the same register that is marked dead
14228 in the note, we do not know where to put the note.
14229 Give up. */
14230 if (i2 != 0 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
14231 break;
14234 if (place == 0)
14236 basic_block bb = this_basic_block;
14238 for (tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn); place == 0; tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn))
14240 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn))
14242 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
14243 break;
14244 continue;
14247 /* If the register is being set at TEM_INSN, see if that is all
14248 TEM_INSN is doing. If so, delete TEM_INSN. Otherwise, make this
14249 into a REG_UNUSED note instead. Don't delete sets to
14250 global register vars. */
14251 if ((REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
14252 || !global_regs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))])
14253 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn)))
14255 rtx set = single_set (tem_insn);
14256 rtx inner_dest = 0;
14257 rtx_insn *cc0_setter = NULL;
14259 if (set != 0)
14260 for (inner_dest = SET_DEST (set);
14261 (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14262 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG
14263 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT);
14264 inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0))
14267 /* Verify that it was the set, and not a clobber that
14268 modified the register.
14270 CC0 targets must be careful to maintain setter/user
14271 pairs. If we cannot delete the setter due to side
14272 effects, mark the user with an UNUSED note instead
14273 of deleting it. */
14275 if (set != 0 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
14276 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), inner_dest)
14277 && (!HAVE_cc0
14278 || (! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (set))
14279 || ((cc0_setter = prev_cc0_setter (tem_insn)) != NULL
14280 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (cc0_setter)) > 0))))
14282 /* Move the notes and links of TEM_INSN elsewhere.
14283 This might delete other dead insns recursively.
14284 First set the pattern to something that won't use
14285 any register. */
14286 rtx old_notes = REG_NOTES (tem_insn);
14288 PATTERN (tem_insn) = pc_rtx;
14289 REG_NOTES (tem_insn) = NULL;
14291 distribute_notes (old_notes, tem_insn, tem_insn, NULL,
14292 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
14293 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (tem_insn));
14295 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
14296 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
14297 if (rsp->last_set == tem_insn)
14298 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (note, 0), NULL, NULL_RTX);
14300 SET_INSN_DELETED (tem_insn);
14301 if (tem_insn == i2)
14302 i2 = NULL;
14304 /* Delete the setter too. */
14305 if (cc0_setter)
14307 PATTERN (cc0_setter) = pc_rtx;
14308 old_notes = REG_NOTES (cc0_setter);
14309 REG_NOTES (cc0_setter) = NULL;
14311 distribute_notes (old_notes, cc0_setter,
14312 cc0_setter, NULL,
14313 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
14314 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (cc0_setter));
14316 SET_INSN_DELETED (cc0_setter);
14317 if (cc0_setter == i2)
14318 i2 = NULL;
14321 else
14323 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_UNUSED);
14325 /* If there isn't already a REG_UNUSED note, put one
14326 here. Do not place a REG_DEAD note, even if
14327 the register is also used here; that would not
14328 match the algorithm used in lifetime analysis
14329 and can cause the consistency check in the
14330 scheduler to fail. */
14331 if (! find_regno_note (tem_insn, REG_UNUSED,
14332 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))))
14333 place = tem_insn;
14334 break;
14337 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn))
14338 || (CALL_P (tem_insn)
14339 && find_reg_fusage (tem_insn, USE, XEXP (note, 0))))
14341 place = tem_insn;
14343 /* If we are doing a 3->2 combination, and we have a
14344 register which formerly died in i3 and was not used
14345 by i2, which now no longer dies in i3 and is used in
14346 i2 but does not die in i2, and place is between i2
14347 and i3, then we may need to move a link from place to
14348 i2. */
14349 if (i2 && DF_INSN_LUID (place) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2)
14350 && from_insn
14351 && DF_INSN_LUID (from_insn) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2)
14352 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
14354 struct insn_link *links = LOG_LINKS (place);
14355 LOG_LINKS (place) = NULL;
14356 distribute_links (links);
14358 break;
14361 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
14362 break;
14367 /* If the register is set or already dead at PLACE, we needn't do
14368 anything with this note if it is still a REG_DEAD note.
14369 We check here if it is set at all, not if is it totally replaced,
14370 which is what `dead_or_set_p' checks, so also check for it being
14371 set partially. */
14373 if (place && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD)
14375 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
14376 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
14378 if (dead_or_set_p (place, XEXP (note, 0))
14379 || reg_bitfield_target_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (place)))
14381 /* Unless the register previously died in PLACE, clear
14382 last_death. [I no longer understand why this is
14383 being done.] */
14384 if (rsp->last_death != place)
14385 rsp->last_death = 0;
14386 place = 0;
14388 else
14389 rsp->last_death = place;
14391 /* If this is a death note for a hard reg that is occupying
14392 multiple registers, ensure that we are still using all
14393 parts of the object. If we find a piece of the object
14394 that is unused, we must arrange for an appropriate REG_DEAD
14395 note to be added for it. However, we can't just emit a USE
14396 and tag the note to it, since the register might actually
14397 be dead; so we recourse, and the recursive call then finds
14398 the previous insn that used this register. */
14400 if (place && REG_NREGS (XEXP (note, 0)) > 1)
14402 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
14403 bool all_used = true;
14404 unsigned int i;
14406 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
14407 if ((! refers_to_regno_p (i, PATTERN (place))
14408 && ! find_regno_fusage (place, USE, i))
14409 || dead_or_set_regno_p (place, i))
14411 all_used = false;
14412 break;
14415 if (! all_used)
14417 /* Put only REG_DEAD notes for pieces that are
14418 not already dead or set. */
14420 for (i = regno; i < endregno;
14421 i += hard_regno_nregs[i][reg_raw_mode[i]])
14423 rtx piece = regno_reg_rtx[i];
14424 basic_block bb = this_basic_block;
14426 if (! dead_or_set_p (place, piece)
14427 && ! reg_bitfield_target_p (piece,
14428 PATTERN (place)))
14430 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, piece,
14431 NULL_RTX);
14433 distribute_notes (new_note, place, place,
14434 NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
14435 NULL_RTX);
14437 else if (! refers_to_regno_p (i, PATTERN (place))
14438 && ! find_regno_fusage (place, USE, i))
14439 for (tem_insn = PREV_INSN (place); ;
14440 tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn))
14442 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn))
14444 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
14445 break;
14446 continue;
14448 if (dead_or_set_p (tem_insn, piece)
14449 || reg_bitfield_target_p (piece,
14450 PATTERN (tem_insn)))
14452 add_reg_note (tem_insn, REG_UNUSED, piece);
14453 break;
14458 place = 0;
14462 break;
14464 default:
14465 /* Any other notes should not be present at this point in the
14466 compilation. */
14467 gcc_unreachable ();
14470 if (place)
14472 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (place);
14473 REG_NOTES (place) = note;
14476 if (place2)
14477 add_shallow_copy_of_reg_note (place2, note);
14481 /* Similarly to above, distribute the LOG_LINKS that used to be present on
14482 I3, I2, and I1 to new locations. This is also called to add a link
14483 pointing at I3 when I3's destination is changed. */
14485 static void
14486 distribute_links (struct insn_link *links)
14488 struct insn_link *link, *next_link;
14490 for (link = links; link; link = next_link)
14492 rtx_insn *place = 0;
14493 rtx_insn *insn;
14494 rtx set, reg;
14496 next_link = link->next;
14498 /* If the insn that this link points to is a NOTE, ignore it. */
14499 if (NOTE_P (link->insn))
14500 continue;
14502 set = 0;
14503 rtx pat = PATTERN (link->insn);
14504 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
14505 set = pat;
14506 else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
14508 int i;
14509 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
14511 set = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
14512 if (GET_CODE (set) != SET)
14513 continue;
14515 reg = SET_DEST (set);
14516 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14517 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14518 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
14519 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
14521 if (!REG_P (reg))
14522 continue;
14524 if (REGNO (reg) == link->regno)
14525 break;
14527 if (i == XVECLEN (pat, 0))
14528 continue;
14530 else
14531 continue;
14533 reg = SET_DEST (set);
14535 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14536 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14537 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
14538 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
14540 /* A LOG_LINK is defined as being placed on the first insn that uses
14541 a register and points to the insn that sets the register. Start
14542 searching at the next insn after the target of the link and stop
14543 when we reach a set of the register or the end of the basic block.
14545 Note that this correctly handles the link that used to point from
14546 I3 to I2. Also note that not much searching is typically done here
14547 since most links don't point very far away. */
14549 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (link->insn);
14550 (insn && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
14551 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block->next_bb) != insn));
14552 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
14553 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
14554 continue;
14555 else if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
14557 if (reg_referenced_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
14558 place = insn;
14559 break;
14561 else if (CALL_P (insn)
14562 && find_reg_fusage (insn, USE, reg))
14564 place = insn;
14565 break;
14567 else if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_set_p (reg, insn))
14568 break;
14570 /* If we found a place to put the link, place it there unless there
14571 is already a link to the same insn as LINK at that point. */
14573 if (place)
14575 struct insn_link *link2;
14577 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link2, place)
14578 if (link2->insn == link->insn && link2->regno == link->regno)
14579 break;
14581 if (link2 == NULL)
14583 link->next = LOG_LINKS (place);
14584 LOG_LINKS (place) = link;
14586 /* Set added_links_insn to the earliest insn we added a
14587 link to. */
14588 if (added_links_insn == 0
14589 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) > DF_INSN_LUID (place))
14590 added_links_insn = place;
14596 /* Check for any register or memory mentioned in EQUIV that is not
14597 mentioned in EXPR. This is used to restrict EQUIV to "specializations"
14598 of EXPR where some registers may have been replaced by constants. */
14600 static bool
14601 unmentioned_reg_p (rtx equiv, rtx expr)
14603 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
14604 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, equiv, NONCONST)
14606 const_rtx x = *iter;
14607 if ((REG_P (x) || MEM_P (x))
14608 && !reg_mentioned_p (x, expr))
14609 return true;
14611 return false;
14614 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
14615 dump_combine_stats (FILE *file)
14617 fprintf
14618 (file,
14619 ";; Combiner statistics: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n\n",
14620 combine_attempts, combine_merges, combine_extras, combine_successes);
14623 void
14624 dump_combine_total_stats (FILE *file)
14626 fprintf
14627 (file,
14628 "\n;; Combiner totals: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n",
14629 total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes);
14632 /* Try combining insns through substitution. */
14633 static unsigned int
14634 rest_of_handle_combine (void)
14636 int rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine;
14638 df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE + DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
14639 df_note_add_problem ();
14640 df_analyze ();
14642 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs ();
14643 reg_n_sets_max = max_reg_num ();
14645 rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
14646 = combine_instructions (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
14648 /* Combining insns may have turned an indirect jump into a
14649 direct jump. Rebuild the JUMP_LABEL fields of jumping
14650 instructions. */
14651 if (rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine)
14653 if (dom_info_available_p (CDI_DOMINATORS))
14654 free_dominance_info (CDI_DOMINATORS);
14655 timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
14656 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
14657 cleanup_cfg (0);
14658 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
14661 regstat_free_n_sets_and_refs ();
14662 return 0;
14665 namespace {
14667 const pass_data pass_data_combine =
14669 RTL_PASS, /* type */
14670 "combine", /* name */
14671 OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
14672 TV_COMBINE, /* tv_id */
14673 PROP_cfglayout, /* properties_required */
14674 0, /* properties_provided */
14675 0, /* properties_destroyed */
14676 0, /* todo_flags_start */
14677 TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
14680 class pass_combine : public rtl_opt_pass
14682 public:
14683 pass_combine (gcc::context *ctxt)
14684 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_combine, ctxt)
14687 /* opt_pass methods: */
14688 virtual bool gate (function *) { return (optimize > 0); }
14689 virtual unsigned int execute (function *)
14691 return rest_of_handle_combine ();
14694 }; // class pass_combine
14696 } // anon namespace
14698 rtl_opt_pass *
14699 make_pass_combine (gcc::context *ctxt)
14701 return new pass_combine (ctxt);